The amazingly functional and customizable BiteSMS takes on the deeply integrated and easy to use Messages+ in a battle of the jailbreak messaging apps

Are you jailbroken on iOS 5 and wondering whether you should purchase BiteSMS or Messages+? Both applications add quick reply functionality and make messaging more functional. But which is a better choice for you?

BiteSMS for iOS 5

BiteSMS has been a long time favorite when it comes to messaging enhancement applications. Many competitors have come and gone while BiteSMS seemingly manages to stay at the top of its game.

One thing that sets BiteSMS apart is its ability to customize almost every aspect of your experience. You can choose what buttons you’d like to show up on your quick reply windows such as send, open, close, mark for later, Skype, FaceTime, templates, and more. The quick compose feature provides the option of auto-populating contacts. You can choose for it to auto show favorites, the last person you messaged, and more.

If you send a lot of international text messages, Bite allows you to buy credits to use on their own network. I don’t necessarily recommend it as a way not to have traditional text messaging as the rates aren’t cheaper than most carriers domestic rates. They are, however, cheaper than most carrier international texting rates. AT&T, for example, charges $10/month for 100 international messages. After that, it’s $0.20 per message. You can set up per contact rules for sending messages as well. So if you have certain contacts in a different country, only then will Bite utilize your credits. Bite’s prices are as follows –

• $6 for 50 SMS credits
• $12 for 105 SMS credits (includes 5 free credits)
• $24 for 215 SMS credits (includes 15 free credits)
• $60 for 550 SMS credits (includes 50 free credits)
• $120 for 1200 SMS credits (includes 200 free credits)

While BiteSMS has a sleek user interface in its own right, you can definitely tell it isn’t something made by Apple. People who choose to theme and don’t like the stock look of iOS may actually prefer this. Those of you who like to stick with the stock look may have an issue with it. It’s also worth noting that BiteSMS is compatible with both LockInfo and IntelliscreenX.

Messages+ for iOS 5

Messages+ is an update of the messaging enhancement app TLert. The update not only brought a more streamline experience but deep integration into iOS 5. It literally looks like something Apple would release.

While BiteSMS aims to bring you an array of different customizations and user controls, Messages+ aims to be an easy to use add-on that just works. There’s next to nothing to configure. You just enable Messages+ and set up a quick compose gesture and you’re on your way. Messages+ also comes built-in to IntelliscreenX.

If your main reason for wanting a messaging enhancement app is to not have to stop what you’re doing to compose a message, Messages+ will provide this functionality without any added icons. It simply adds a quick reply and quick compose function to the default iOS messaging app.

While Messages+ ties in nicely with IntelliscreenX, it is not currently supported by LockInfo. If you’re a LockInfo user, BiteSMS is going to be your best option. We don’t know if LockInfo will add support for Messages+ in the future.

BiteSMS vs Messages+ – which is better?

There’s no arguing that BiteSMS still has plenty more features and controls than Messages+. It will really come down to what you personally need from a messaging enhancement application.

I personally prefer Messages+ over BiteSMS as I don’t send that many international texts and just desire quick reply and quick compose functionality. I also like the stock feel of iOS and Messages+ gives me that. There are no added icons or tons of settings to configure before you start using it. Enable it, set a quick gesture for composing, and you’re done.

There are no doubt users out there who care more about control and functionality than interface and ease of use. For those of you that think heavily of these things, BiteSMS is probably going to serve you much better over the long run. Let us know what you decide on and why. Make sure to check out our other resources below for tons of jailbreak apps, themes, tips, and more!

• Messages+ vs BiteSMS forum thread – See what our readers are choosing
• Jailbreak guides, how to’s, and news
• Jailbreak apps, hacks, and themes forum
• General jailbreak discussion forum
• iMore downloads section
• List of Cydia repositories

I have a very short attention span when it comes to accessories for my iPhone and iPad, and my most used accessories reflect that. To really keep my attention an accessory has to stand out from what I already own. If it looks like something I already have or doesn’t provide any additional features, I probably won’t give it a second look. Here are the ones I’ve found to be functional and versatile enough to keep around.

iSkin Aura for iPhone 4 and iPhone 4S

The first iSkin product I ever purchased was an iSkin Solo FX case for my iPhone 3GS. I’ve been impressed with their product lines ever since. Yes, they’re a bit more expensive than other cases on the market but I really think they’re a prime example of “you get what you pay for”.

The iSkin Aura adds minimal bulk to your iPhone, if any at all. The inside of the case is a thin rubber than won’t scratch or damage your device. The sides of the case are also rubber which provides a good grip. The back is a beautiful brushed metal that’s available in three different colors – grey, blue, and white.

I’ve been using the iSkin Aura for a good few months now and the quality is just what I’ve come to expect from iSkin. It’s worth keeping in mind that this case isn’t aimed for people who drop their phone frequently. It isn’t an Otterbox and doesn’t claim to be. If you don’t need heavy protection, you’ll love it. If you do need heavy protection, I wouldn’t recommend it.

• $34.95 – iMore Store link

Bamboo Stylus for iPad and iPad 2

I first learned of the Bamboo stylus when Leanna used it as her pick of the week. I’d tried several types of stylus’ and never found one that was a good weight and provided good accuracy while writing. Not to mention a lot of them have very cheap tips on them that will start to come apart or lose their shape after a while.

I find the Bamboo stylus to be the perfect combination of weight and design. It comes in several different colors and is priced very reasonably.

• $25.95 – $29.95 (depending on color choice) – Amazon link

Bose MIE2i in-ear headphones

I finally broke down several months ago and bought a “good” pair of headphones. The stock Apple ear buds always hurt my ears after an hour or so of use. My brother actually talked me into finally picking up a pair of Bose headphones. While they’re not new to 2011, they’re still a top seller when it comes to quality headphones (and they’re new to me).

Aside from the great sound quality, they’re extremely comfortable even when worn for long durations. They come with several different ear pieces to ensure the best fit individually. As you would expect, they’ve got a built in mic and clicker so you can use them not only for music but for phone calls and other tasks as well.

They’re a bit more expensive than other headphone choices but I’ve found the quality to be more than worth the price.

• $129.95 – Amazon link

Apple iPad 2 Smart Cover

The Smart Cover continues to be one of my favorite accessories for my iPad 2. The iPad 2 is much slimmer than its predecessor and I like to keep that form factor to a minimum. I don’t want a case that’s going to make it bulky.

I’ve found the Smart Cover to be versatile enough for my needs. I can prop it up in one way when I need to utilize the keyboard and another way when I want to sit back and watch a movie. It doesn’t provide the greatest protection considering it doesn’t protect the back at all but I’ve got that covered with an iSkin Solo Smart that compliments it perfectly without adding additional weight or bulk.

• $39.99 to $69.99 – Amazon link

iSkin Solo Smart for iPad 2

While I love my Smart Cover I still felt like the back was left wide open to scratches and potential damage. I wanted something I could use in addition to my Smart Cover.

Then I found the iSkin Solo Smart. Not only does it cover everything the Smart Cover doesn’t, including ports, it strengthens the Smart Cover’s connection. Along the left side you’ll find a small bracket that comes up and around the hinge of the Smart Cover. No matter how hard you pull, you’re Smart Cover won’t come unattached.

And if you don’t want to use a Smart Cover at all, the Solo Smart comes with an extra piece you can put inside the bracket so nothing on the back or sides of your iPad 2 is exposed.

• $52.99 – iSkin Solo Smart for iPad 2

We all know the iPhone 4S camera can replace most point and shoot cameras in a heartbeat. But what about for professional photography? Does it make the cut for on the go photography or does it still leave something to be desired?

Ryan Bolger, a personal friend of mine, is a professional photographer and local gallery owner. He has been patiently waiting to pick up an iPhone until he thought Apple got the camera feature right. I suggested that he pick up the iPhone 4S and give it a chance as a camera to use while on the go.

Over a month later he has nothing but positive things to say about the iPhone 4S camera and the quality of the images that it produces.

So I’ve been holding out for years. I’ve had an upgrade ever since the original Iphone came out & I decided that I was going to wait until the camera was where I wanted it & knew it could be. The iPhone 4S has changed my creative life in a very big way. The App Store has also opened up my eyes to a whole new creative & visual world. The ability to capture, ratify, & share my creative life with a few simple taps has helped me in my quest of trying to make the world a better place through my art.

Within the first week of my new marriage to this phone I took over 2,000 photographs. I’m amazed at the detail & the versatility of the iPhone 4S’ camera. I’ve even used it on some paid client assignments. That’s how much I trust it as a professional photographer.

I just read an article last night that photography was one of the things Steve Jobs aimed to re-invent. As a guy whose life revolves around photography and has since childhood, you’ve already done this Sir. So thank you Steve Jobs and thank you Apple.

Be sure to hit Ryan’s gallery of photos at the link below. The first 200 to 250 photos are all taken and edited on his iPhone 4S.

Source: RJB Imagery

One of the new features of the iPhone 4S is an 8 megapixel camera equipped with a fast f/2.4 lens. Without question, this was the feature I was most excited about, and I almost immediately started snapping pics.

For sample photos and a summary of my thoughts, follow along after the break! (All photos are original; none have been edited in any way beyond being resized to fit the page.)

Landscapes

The iPhone 4S does a phenomenal job with landscapes. These have the potential of being tricky for cameras because of the broad range of lights and darks, but even with HDR turned off, the iPhone 4S produces great results. The two photos above were taken without use of HDR.

HDR

That leads us to HDR. HDR stands for High Dynamic Range and refers to the range between the darkest part of the photo and the brightest part of the photo. Camera sensors can only record so much of this range, so if a photo’s dynamic range is too big, darks will be too dark and brights will be too bright. With HDR enabled, however, the iPhone 4S will take two photos, one exposed for the darks, and one exposed for the brights, and merge them together as one photo.

The photos above, although not the most interesting of subjects, does a great job of demonstrating the capabilities of the iPhone 4S HDR. The first photo was exposing for the shade, and thus blew out the sky. With HDR turned on, both the shade and sky look good.

Movement

Since the iPhone 4S is equipped with an f/2.4 lens, it has the ability to let in more light and speed up the shutter speed. Theoretically, this would mean that the iPhone 4S should do a better job of freezing motion. Without having full control of the settings, however, this can be hard to achieve.

In the end, I’m impressed with how the iPhone 4S handles motion. The above pic does have a little motion blur, especially on my face, but it’s not too bad. Below is a picture of my daughter that I took while she was bouncing up and down. On the iPhone 4, it would have never come out that clear.

Face Detection

The iPhone 4S now has the ability detect faces and use them as the focus and exposure point. It works great! I was impressed with how it recognized my daughter’s face even when she was moving around or when I was taking a profile shot with only one eye visible.

Macro

The Macro capabilities of the iPhone 4S camera are very impressive – when it can lock a focus, that is. Unfortunately, I was continually disappointed with the iPhone 4S’s inability to focus. I understand for objects that are very tiny and blend in with the background, but the camera even struggled with focusing on larger items that stood out from the background, like in the following image.

Digital Zoom

First of all, it’s important to emphasize that the iPhone 4S is equipped with a 5x digital zoom, not optical zoom. The difference is that the lens is not capable of zooming, but the software is. So using the digital zoom on the iPhone 4S is equivalent to taking the photo without the zoom and cropping it. This greatly reduces the quality of the photo and there are very few situations where you would want to use the digital zoom.

However, since the iPhone 4S has been upgraded to an 8 megapixel camera, there is an improvement to the digital zoom over the iPhone 4. The first photo above was taken with 0x zoom and the second one was taken with 5x zoom. You can see obvious damage done to the quality of the image, but it is, admittedly, better than I was expecting. I also believe that this is an example of a situation where you might want to use the digital zoom if you wanted to, say, show your kids a picture of the duck you saw earlier in the day.

Low Light

The iPhone 4 has a great camera, but it was always lacking in low light situations. I was very excited to test out the iPhone 4S in low light since it’s equipped with an f/2.4 lens and better sensor. I am definitely impressed with the improvement. My living room has the worst lighting on the planet and I could never get a decent photo of my daughter with the iPhone 4 while indoors at night. But with the iPhone 4S, I was able to capture the above shot! It doesn’t take much movement to make your shots blurry, however, but that should be expected.

Here’s an example of a macro shot in low, bad light.

Flash

The last thing I tested was the flash and it worked well! Just as with the iPhone 4, it is very slow and your photos are guaranteed to show any small amount of motion blur. I tend to hate camera flashes, but if you’re trying to capture a memory in a dark environment, it’s often times your only choice. For those times, the flash on the iPhone 4S will get the job done.

Conclusion

The iPhone 4S is equipped with a very nice camera that takes beautiful photos. The macro lens has the potential to be incredible, but struggles with focus more than I was expecting. At 8 megapixels, the iPhone 4S has the ability to produce nice 8″x10″ prints that can be displayed in your home.

The camera was the feature of the iPhone 4S I was looking forward to the most, and it has delivered – it turned out to be my favorite feature of the iPhone 4S. Yes, I like it even more than Siri.

Have you been taking some amazing shots with your iPhone 4S? Head on over to our forums to show them off!

One of the new features of the iPhone 4S is a 1080p HD video camera. This new camera sports an f/2.4 lens and improved sensor to capture more light. It also has video stabilization to steady those shaky shots. To see me put this new camera to the test, check out the video above.

Extreme lighting

The first thing I tested was how well the camera deals with harsh lighting – meaning environments that have both dark, shaded areas and brightly lit, sunny areas. The iPhone 4S did a fantastic job of adjusting the exposure to bring in more light in the shade and less light in the sun. However, I did notice that if I was filming my daughter in an area that had bright backlighting, the video was a little underexposed even if I tapped to expose on my daughter’s face.

Video Stabilization

The next thing I tested was video stabilization. First I tried out a non-extreme situation that has a similar amount of movement that the average person may experience – walking backwards while my daughter runs towards me. There was definitely still some camera shake present in these shots, but it wasn’t too bad. My stomach tends to be pretty sensitive when it comes to bouncy film, but these clips didn’t affect me.

However, the next test I did was to run down the street, and this one was pretty bad. It was still very shaky and I couldn’t image watching an entire video like that, but I also couldn’t imagine filming an entire video like that. This was an extreme scenario that expect not too many people will find themselves in.

The video stabilization performed best when panning the camera around. I was particularly impressed by the clips of me panning around the camera to follow my daughter as she walked past me. These were nice and smooth.

Low light

Next up was low light. The quality of the video in the low light environments of my house were not the best, but they weren’t particularly horrible, either. Camera shake was a little more obvious and the clips were grainier, but overall, I was satisfied with its performance as a cellphone camera. I was particularly impressed with how the camera was able to compensate for the pink lighting in my daughters room and choose a good white balance setting. This was a huge improvement over the iPhone 4.

Macro

The macro lens on the iPhone 4S camera is incredibly sharp – when it’s able to actually lock focus. On larger items, like leaves, the iPhone 4S has no issue focusing, but with smaller, skinnier items like twigs and sticks, the camera really struggles with grabbing a focus and often times never does. I tried to focus on some berries hanging from a bush for several minutes with no luck. It doesn’t seem to make a difference between direct sunlight, shade, or overcast light, the iPhone 4S seems to frequently have issues with focussing. This is a huge disappointment.

Conclusion

Overall, I am very impressed with the iPhone 4S video camera. It handles the changes in harsh lighting, poor lighting, and movement quite well and also has great audio quality. The biggest disappointment is that the macro lens frequently has issues focusing. However, when the lens does focus, it looks amazing.

It’s time to retire my Flip Video camera for good.

Have you been recording some amazing video with your iPhone 4S? Head on over to our Photography and Video forum to show them off!

The Incipio DRX case for iPhone 4 is, in my opinion, one of Incipio’s best cases to date — and they’ve made some very good cases. Everything from the way it feels in your hand to how it adds virtually no bulk to your iPhone makes it a great investment. It also offers decent protection as well.

Click through for a complete review and some pictures!

The first thing you always notice when putting on a new case is how it feels in your hand. This case feels great. The material is slick but not slick enough that your phone is going to go flying out of your hand. It’s also extremely easy to put on and take off. I’ve had it on for a little over a week and it doesn’t seem to stretch out or lose its shape either.

Your buttons are all covered which means no dirt or dust can get in there. Covered buttons normally mean they are harder to press. That’s not the case with the DRX. The buttons are just as easy to push as they are when there is no case on the device. The case also produces a click feedback when pushing the buttons, which is nice.

The case comes all the way around and over the top of the antenna band which means you can set your phone face down for privacy and not have to worry about whether or not your iPhone screen is going to get scratched. The dock connector, headphone jack, and vibrate switch are easily accessible as well. I haven’t had any issues with any chargers, official or third party. They all fit perfectly. So do my Bose headphones.

The DRX provides a pretty substantial level of protection as well. It’ll protect you from moderate drops. If you plan on throwing your iPhone into a wall, I can’t promise any case would protect it except an Otterbox. Overall, if you are somewhat careful with your iPhone and just want a case that’ll protect you from moderate accidental drops, this case is perfect. You can find the Incipio DRX case in the TiPb accessory store. If you use this case or something else, let us know in the comments!

Pros

• Easy access to all ports and buttons
• Slim design means no added bulk
• The material is somewhat slick, slide it in your pocket and pull it back out just as easily (sans all that pocket lint!)
• Easy to take on and off without the case losing its shape over time
• The case curves around the screen edge, so setting your iPhone face down is a non-issue

Cons

• Not meant for heavy duty protection. Moderate, yes. But don’t throw your iPhone into a wall and expect it to come out unscathed
• Dust can sometimes accumulate around the edges of the screen by the corners of the case

This isn’t a review of a color. It’s a review of the ramifications of a color — the white iPhone 4′s 10 month delay, what caused it, whether or not those causes should be of any concern to potential buyers, and how competitive a device first introduced back in June 2010 can be in today’s market.

Since we’re going to focus primarily on what’s different here, anyone interested in a more general look at the device should check out our original AT&T/GSM iPhone 4 review first, and our follow up Verizon iPhone 4 review if you’re considering that network.

Once you’re done, read on for the white addenda.

So what took so long?

The white iPhone 4 was announced back at WWDC 2010 — held aloft by Steve Jobs during his keynote no less. And then… nothing. Or rather, delays. First in July:

White models of Apple’s new iPhone 4 have continued to be more challenging to manufacture than we originally expected, and as a result they will not be available until later this year. The availability of the more popular iPhone 4 black models is not affected.

Then again in October

We’re sorry to disappoint customers waiting for the white iPhone yet again, but we’ve decided to delay its release until this Spring.

Rumors blamed the delay on the color itself; that it resulted in light leaks, proximity sensor malfunctions (worse even then the black iPhone 4), camera trouble, consistency issues, and more. Apple SVP of Marketing, Phil Schiller offered a very general explanation last week.

“It was challenging. It’s not as simple as making something white. There’s a lot more that goes into both the material science of it–how it holds up over time…but also in how it all works with the sensors. We thought we were there a year ago, or less than that, when we launched the iPhone 4, and we weren’t.”

Schiller said that it turned out there were a lot of unexpected interactions between the color of the device and various internal components. Also, like fair-skinned humans, white iPhones need a little more UV protection from the sun.

So challenging, in fact, Apple only made the launch official one day in advance, finally releasing the white iPhone 4 on April 29, 2011.

Hardware

The result of the delays is that the white iPhone 4 hits the market some 10 months after the black iPhone 4. And that means where the iPhone 4 hardware, with its retina display, external stainless steel antenna band, double sided glass were state-of-the-art of smartphones, now faces competition that’s had almost a year to catchup… or move ahead.

First, a look at the April 2011 white iPhone 4 beside the June 2010 black iPhone 4.

Getting white right

The white iPhone 4 looks good. It looks like an iPhone 4 but not exactly like an iPhone 4 rendered white. There’s the noticeable difference with the proximity sensor (we’ll get to that later) but there’s a qualitative difference about the white glass overall as well. Where the black iPhone 4 looks like its made of black glass, the white iPhone 4 looks like its coated in white glass. It’s a subtle difference but it’s noticeable around the edges. It could be something to do with achieving opacity with the white color, a UV coating made necessary to protect the color, or something that’s just more apparent with the white iPhone 4, it’s there.

It’s consistent though. The white iPhone 4 is uniformly white, the same shade of white, from back to front, and from plate to home button. Apple nailed it.

In terms of shade, it looks remarkably similar to the white iPad 2. That should come as no surprise since Steve Jobs said in the above-linked interview that getting the white iPhone 4 right benefitted the rest of the Apple product line, including the iPad 2.

The shade does look subtly different than the 2009 iPhone 3GS, however. The iPhone 3GS had a plastic rather than glass blacking, and kept the black rather than white front plate.

And I like it, and so do many people who thought they wouldn’t but have now seen it in person. Given none of what we’ll cover below is a deal-breaker for you, whether you go white or black will be a matter of personal preference.

Competitive landscape

When Apple introduced the 960×640 IPS LED retina display, with pixels so small they arguably disappeared and allowed the viewer to forget they were looking at bitmaps, there was nothing else like it. As far as Blackberry, HP/Palm, Windows Phone and Nokia are concerned, there still isn’t. It’s almost as though time has stood still. Android is another story. Since June Google’s OEM partners have kept pace… almost. They’re now releasing slightly skinnier but just as good looking 960×540 qHD (quarter 1080p) screens.

When it comes to overall build quality, however, very little else has come close. Nokia’s ability to churn out pure metal phones like the Nokia N8 is one of the few exceptions. HP/Palm, RIM, and Windows and Android devices from HTC, Samsung, Motorola (with their fine Corellian freighter inspired design aesthetic), etc. have eschewed glass and steel and stuck with plastic. They’re beautifully crafted, mostly sturdy affairs but they’re closer to Hasbro in the hand than the singular solidity of the iPhone 4.

Android is kicking apps when it comes to processors, however. While the white iPhone 4 uses the April 2011 released ARM Cortex A8-based Apple A4 processor, several Android devices have now been released — or are about to be released with dual core ARM Cortex A9-based processors. (iPad 2 has matched that with the dual core Apple A5 System-on-a-Chip but that probably won’t be coming to the iPhone until this fall.)

Cameras are another area where the competition have been keeping up the pressure. Nokia has always had great lenses but now Android and Windows Phone devices are entering the megapixel war, and LG has even gone so far as to introduce a 3D camera (and screen to go with it!). Luckily megapixels aren’t everything and the sheer size and quality of the iPhone 4′s rear camera has kept its place as one of the best shooters in mobile. (More on that later.)

Several other hardware innovations have also made their way into the market since the original iPhone 4 launch, including Near Field Communications (NFC) in the Google/Samsung Nexus S. It’s fairly useless for average consumers at the moment but could be important in the future, allowing payments to be made via your phone the same way they’re currently made via a credit card. (Apple might also match this with iPhone 5 in the fall.)

LTE 4G, roughly Wi-Fi speeds come to mobile, is probably the biggest if you’re on Verizon in one of their LTE markets, or a few international cities. Battery life isn’t great yet and coverage is terrible, but if you have it in your area and you’re not adverse to plugging in your phone a lot, Android devices like the HTC Thunderbolt will blow your hair back. (Apple probably won’t be matching this until iPhone 6 in 2012.)

All this to say that, except for a few specific technologies, the white iPhone 4 released today, while not the revelation of the black iPhone 4 released last June, is still competitive with the latest and greatest from Android and more than competitive with everyone else.

And yes, that’s a little crazy.

Proximity sensor

The iPhone 4 proximity sensor has been a challenge for Apple, with iOS 4.1 addressing it with a bug fix but problems persisting for many users. The white iPhone 4 was rumored to have more trouble, the color interfering to the degree Apple initially had a series of perforations over the sensor, an almost silver-looking grid. The release version has switched that for a black patch, presumably to allow even better sensing.

My black iPhone 4 has misfired on several occasions, muting calls while I was on them. But I’ve had that phone for months. I’ve only been able to test the white iPhone 4 a few days now and haven’t had any problems with it, but will update this section if and when I do.

Camera

Another rumor surrounding the white iPhone 4 delay concerned light leakage with the camera and LED flash. If that was the case with prototypes, there’s no evidence of it in the release model. Pictures taken with the 5mp camera look just as good as those taken with the black iPhone 4. Here are some example, the first three with HDR, the second 3 with the LED flash.

Accessory compatibility

With the exception of cases, all existing iPhone 4 accessories — cables, chargers, headsets, and Bluetooth, should work the same with the new white iPhone 4 as they did with the previously released black iPhone 4.

However, the white iPhone 4 — at least the first batch released so far — seem to be 0.2mm thicker than the black iPhone 4. Because of that ever-so-slight difference in thickness, you’ll need to pay special attention to cases. In our tests, cases that were the least little bit roomy on the black iPhone 4 fit perfectly on the white iPhone 4 while cases that were snug on the black iPhone 4 were a little tight on the white iPhone 4. This won’t impact stickers or film protectors, bumpers or pouches, silicone or leather cases, but could impact molded plastic skin cases.

• Top 5 cases to show off your white iPhone 4 [sponsored]
• Top 10 accessories for your iPhone 4

Software

The white iPhone 4 shipped with iOS 4.3.1 (AT&T/GSM) or iOS 4.2.6 (Verizon). Since Apple installed, boxed, and shipped them, iOS 4.3.2 and iOS 4.2.7 have come out and iTunes will prompt you to update the first time you plug it in.

• iOS 4.3 update walkthough
• iOS 4 software walkthrough

But the real story here is that Apple released 3 feature updates to the current iOS version since the original iPhone 4 launched, and another point update between the time they shipped and sold the white iPhone 4.

Given that many competing devices, even those made by or with the platform owners themselves, wait weeks or months for any update, or simply never get them, this is notable. Heck, it’s astounding. (It took a disappointing amount of time for Google to update my Nexus One — a device they have complete control over — to the latest Gingerbread OS, and it seems like my Palm Pre Plus will not be getting webOS 2.x).

And this extends throughout the ecosystem. Where the black iPhone 4 launched as Apple’s first, and hence only, FaceTime capable device, the white iPhone 4 enters a world where iPod touch, iPad, and Mac have all been updated to support the easy, if wi-fi-only video calling standard. Again, added value and longevity.

Where every other vendor struggles or doesn’t bother to release updates, or prefers you to buy a new phone, Apple’s constant stream of updates, major and minor, are a revelation and add enormous value and longevity. The white iPhone 4 you get now will almost certainly be updated with iOS 5 this fall, and if history is an indicator, a year of 5.x updates after that.

App and game compatibility

Needless to say, the white iPhone 4 is an iPhone 4, and so it’s fully binary compatible with pretty much every app in the app store. That means everything from Facebook to Angry Birds, Twitter to Infinity Blade, Documents to Go to Netflix will work just as you expect.

• Top 10 apps for your iPhone 4
• Top 5 apps for BlackBerry and Android switchers, and more top 5′s
• iPhone apps and games forum

Jailbreak

Likewise, the white iPhone 4 running iOS 4.3.2 (AT&T/GSM) and iOS 4.2.7 (Verizon) and can be Jailbroken using the same Jailbreak methods as any other iOS 4.3.2 device, or the new Jailbreak for iOS 4.2.7. (No iPad 2 style boot-rom exploit difficulties here).

• iOS 4.3.2 Jailbreak guide
• iOS 4.2.7 Jailbreak guide
• Jailbreak starters guide
• Jailbreak help forums

Conclusion

So, some 10 months later, is the white iPhone 4 worth getting?

If you don’t need an iPhone now, or in the next few months, then you can consider waiting on the next-generation iPhone 5, which will likely launch this fall. It will likely have the new Apple A5 processor, like iPad 2, and perhaps other new features as well.

If you need a phone now, however, whether it’s an upgrade, replacement, or first time smartphone, and the white iPhone 4 tempts you, then it’s certainly worth your consideration. That the it remains not only competitive, but inarguably — and almost shockingly –still one of the best built, best equipped smartphones on the market is a testament to Apple’s attention to detail and design. If none of the very specific functions competitors offer, like LTE or 3D are must-haves for you, or if any of the iPhone 4′s still industry-leading hardware and continuously updated software features are more compelling — and if white is your preferred color — then get this phone and you’ll be happy.

The Dooney & Bourke Pouch for iPhone is a great case for the lady who is looking for something fashionable and practical to carry her iPhone in. This multifunctional pouch works as both a wallet and iPhone case.

This pouch is much larger than your average case and is designed to not only carry your iPhone, but replace your wallet. The inside flap has 3 card slots and there are pockets in the front and back of the pouch. The main compartment is big enough to hold additional items with your iPhone, such as make-up, cash, and earphones. Because the pouch is bigger than the iPhone, it is also possible to have another case, like a bumper or skin case, on your iPhone and it still fit inside the pouch. For some, the extra large pocket will be a welcomed feature, and for others, it will be a frustrating amount of empty space. The Dooney & Bourke Pouch is also equipped with a leather wrist strap, but it is easily removable if you prefer to toss the case into your purse without the strap.

The exterior of the Dooney & Bourke Pouch is made out of a durable nylon material with leather trim. The coffee color is dark brown and branded with large “Dooney & Bourke” lettering. The black and gray version is gray with Dooney & Bourke’s signature “DB” in black. The interior is lined with a material that isn’t exactly soft, but won’t scratch your iPhone either. The flap over the large pocket magnetically and securely snaps closed.

I find the Dooney & Bourke Pouch to be a great option when I’m looking to minimize the amount of items I’m carrying around. If I’m wearing an outfit without pockets and do not wish to carry around a purse, I grab this pouch, add my ID, credit card, random cash, and iPhone, and head out the door.

The Dooney & Bourke Pouch for iPhone is available in the TiPb Accessory Store.

Pros

• Extra pockets for ID, credit cards, receipts, etc.
• Big pouch has room for other items in addition to iPhone
• Compatible with thin cases
• Removable leather wrist strap
• Magnetic snap closure
• Fashionable

Cons

• Big pouch seems a bit awkward with only a (case-free) iPhone inside (too much extra space)
• Interior is not very soft

iPad 2 is simply the original iPad with a thinner design, a couple of cameras, and a faster chipset. Only it isn’t. Not any more than the original iPad was just a big iPhone. Device by device, year after year, Apple has slowly and now successfully changed the conversation from individual specs to unified experience, from reviewer and competitor driven checklists to mainstream consumer-centric usability. They’ve forced us to touch and feel our computing and not just click and think our way through it.

In that regard iPad 2 is the sequel to a smash hit that very few outside Apple ever saw coming. The only question is whether it’s Empire Strikes Back or Matrix Reloaded — whether it takes the same elements that made the original a success and builds on them and creates something even better, or if it adds unnecessary complexity, loses its focus, and kills the franchise. Apple has a great track record, arguably the best in the business these days, but they also have a habit of mixing a healthy dose of frustration into even their most fantastic products.

When Steve Jobs first introduced the first iPad in January 2010 (see our original iPad review) he showed it fitting somewhere between the laptop and the smartphone. He said it had to do better than both at browsing, email, photos, video, music, games, and eBooks. 15 million units and 9 months later it achieved those goals, though with varying degrees of success. Now it’s iPad 2′s turn. Does it make even more sense as a mid-position, mainstream computing appliance? Do the new atoms and bits make it better realize those 7 key features and do they add anything beyond them? Does iPad 2 build on iPad 1 and create something better or is it less than the sum of its new parts?

iPad 2 hardware

Apple claims iPad 2 is a complete redesign. Not really. It’s more of a partial redesign but only because of where Apple has placed so much of the external emphasis.

Same screen, different year

The part that arguably matters most — the window into apps and the web that Jonathan Ive was so careful not to distract us from — is essentially the same this generation as it was last. It’s still a 9.7-inches of LED IPS panel. It’s still 1024×768. It’s still 4:3. It’s still glossy. And none of that is a surprise. 9.7-inch is the size Apple brought to the dance, the size all their apps and all App Store apps are designed for (in terms of UI interactivity — how big a button has to be, for example) and the size they’re sticking with. At 9.7-inches 1024×768 is nowhere near Retina Display like iPhone 4 or iPod touch 4 gained last year, but until Apple can source panels that are cheap enough and plentiful enough at precisely double the density — 2048×1536 there’s really no other alternative. In terms of ratio, 4:3 is still the most logical choice for a multi-media device. 16:9 or 16:10 is great for precisely one thing, HDTV. For the same reason — compromise — it works for fixed landscape displays like on laptops or desktop screens. For a device that rotates like an iPad, however, it’s far too narrow in portrait for web or reading and still not narrow enough in landscape for most motion pictures.

There’s no such rational for keeping the same level of gloss. Sure it makes for really black blacks and looks great in stores but it also makes reading difficult in many common lighting situations. They don’t have to go matte — and I wouldn’t want them too because I like those black blacks for photos and video — but my eyes would appreciate their turning the reflectivity down just a notch.

The aluminum edge and the bezel surrounding the screen are ever-so-slightly smaller. (Two of our staff, Georgia and Leanna measured, likely with molecular telescopes). And this year the bezel comes in the same black as last year, but also comes in white. Yes, Apple managed to ship a white iOS device (insert your iPhone 4 jokes here). No LED flash and no proximity sensor might simply have made it an easier manufacturing process but whatever the reason it was announced as shipping from day one and ship from day one it did. Does a white bezel cause annoying reflections or create the illusion of lower contrast while watching videos or playing games? Not that Georgia, Leanna, or I noticed. Black is probably the color of choice for cinephiles and hard core gamers but I doubt any mainstream user will get too terribly offended by white.

Buttoned down, ported out

It turns out the one thing that does make a noticeable difference between the original iPad and iPad 2 is what surrounds the screen — the buttons. Aside from the home button, all the other controls — the sleep/wake button, mute/orientation lock switch, and volume rocker are all tucked away behind the newly (and highly) angled sides. That means you don’t see them when you’re looking at the screen and that window into apps and the web I mentioned earlier is more distraction-free than ever. It’s subtle but it’s appreciated.

The 30-pin dock connector is more of a mixed bag. It didn’t give me any problems because I’ve been trained by the just-as-steeply set iPod touch 4 dock but the curve can cause confusion when trying to figure out just what angle exactly to use when attaching the cable. (The answer is none, the cable goes in the same plane as the iPad, as if there were no curve.)

The 3.5mm headphone jack is the same story. The port is angled but the cable goes in and out the same as always. What has changed, vexingly, is the SIM-card tray. It’s angled to follow the curve but the SIM removal tool needs to be inserted perpendicular to that curve, not along the same plane like everything else.

The speaker is… the speaker. It’s got a new, larger surface covered with tiny perforations rather than the triple ovals of the previous iPad. But the sound is still mono. For a company that’s done so much to revolutionize music Apple might want to look into revolutionizing up some decent stereo speakers for iPad 3. (HP/Palm will be using Beats by Dr. Dre in their upcoming TouchPad tablet and while the brand is gimmicky the focus on audio quality is certainly not.)

And that’s it. Despite rumors, Apple didn’t provide a USB port or SD card slot. There’s a camera adapter dongle for that and like Jonathan Ive has said from the beginning, Apple is loathe to build in any feature most users won’t use most of the time. There’s also an HDMI dongle in-lieu of a port for the same reason (more on that later). And while Apple debuted the new 10GB ThunderBolt port on this year’s MacBook Pro family, it’s a PCI Express-based interconnect and that’s great for PCI Express-based architectures like Mac and other PCs, but meaningless to the non-PCI Express-based family of iOS devices, including iPad 2.

Cameras — in air quotes

Our editor-in-chief, Dieter, insists we render the iPad 2′s new lenses and sensors as “cameras” — with quotes — and I can’t say I blame him. To say they’re better than nothing is to damn them with exactly the level of faint praise they deserve. They’re the same lowest-end possible affair as the iPod touch 4. There’s a VGA FaceTime camera on the front and 720p HD video camera on the back (which equates to under 1 megapixel for stills).

Leanna, our resident photo enthusiast, took the iPad 2 cameras out for a test. She found that in well-lit situations, the HD camera produces excellent results and the VGA camera gives acceptable quality. Both cameras do an ok job in bad lighting situations, but do better than she was expecting and look better on the PC and YouTube than they did on-device.

Taking still photographs with the iPad 2 was not nearly as rewarding as video. Photo quality was mediocre even in excellent light conditions, though she was impressed with the close-ups. Digital zoom with the rear-facing camera, however, was awful.

• iPad 2 photo test gallery

iPad 2 also borrowed iPod touch 4′s placement for the cameras. The front camera is dead center, in line with and opposed to the home button. The rear camera is tucked in the corner directly beneath the sleep/wake button. That means you can easily cover it with your hand and waste a moment wondering why all your live-view is giving you is a blur of black and red. (Rotate the iPad 180 degrees to fix this.)

iPad 2 is too big to use as a regular camera anyway. There’s a reason no major manufacturer makes a consumer grade camera with a 9.7-inch screen. It’s just too loud and obnoxious to use as your daily shooter or tourist cam. Trust me, I tried.

However, many would argue that the iPad 2′s cameras aren’t for stills and are only nominally for video. They’re for Augmented Reality apps as exemplified by Apple’s own Photo Booth (see below). To those people I’d say — nonsense. iPhone 4 proved you can have a great rear facing camera in a thin device. Augmented Reality apps would likely look even better with a beefier sensor behind them. As we’ve repeatedly pointed out at TiPb, there’s thin and then there’s thin at the expense of functionality. I’d rather have a better camera than have an extra millimeter shaved off the iPad’s thickness. Here’s hoping Apple takes the iPad 2 and iPod touch 4′s rear facing 720p camera and puts that in the front of iPhone 5, iPod touch 5, and iPad 3 and gives the entire range of iOS mobile devices a better rear facing imagine sensor next time around.

Body by Venus

Georgia maintains the thinner, sleeker, dare-she-say-sexier casing means iPad 2 is from Venus while the original iPad 1 was from Mars. Her point is Apple didn’t only bring the cameras over from iPod touch 4 — it brought the curves. A slight bit shorter and skinnier than the original iPad, it’s also an unbelievable 33% thinner at only 0.34-inches. That’s thinner than iPhone 4 thin.

• Height: 9.50 inches (241.2 mm)
• Width: 7.31 inches (185.7 mm)
• Thinness: 0.34 inch (8.8 mm)

Apple accomplished this nearly fetishistic of thinness by flattening out the battery and reducing the depth of the glass used on front. That’s fine for the battery but unless the new glass is even more gorilla than the original I’m going to be even more paranoid about protecting it than I was about protecting the original. (Conveniently Apple provides a Smart Cover for that.)

Because of the reduced depth, instead of a flat side frame like the original iPad or like the antenna provides on iPhone 4, we have a curvaceous, completely unframed aluminum back like iPod touch 4. The result is that it sits flatter and feels even smaller when you hold it.

Thankfully it’s not chromed like iPod touch 4, it’s the same matte finish as the original iPad and even the original iPhone 2G. Not so thankfully it’s every bit as slick as those devices so if you’re at all clumsy (hi!) or worried about it sliding off armrests or car seats, you’ll have to look at soft-touch or silicon cases when they become available.

All this thinness contributes to a reduction in weight as well. It’s only 0.2-lbs lighter than the original iPad but on a 1.3-lbs device that’s appreciated. It by no means makes it a one-handed device but it makes it a tad less tiring to hold and whether it’s reading, surfing, or gaming, every little bit helps.

• Wi-Fi: 1.33 pounds (601 g)
• GSM/AT&T 3G: Weight: 1.35 pounds (613 g)
• Verizon 3G: Weight: 1.34 pounds (607 g)

New guts, new glory

In our review last year we said the original iPad’s specs weren’t interesting or even important — it was the experience. This year Apple clearly feels the same about iPad 2 only more so. However, while you can clearly throw specs at a device and fail to deliver an experience, a great experience requires good enough specs to deliver it. Enter the Apple A5 System-on-a-Chip (SoC) and 512MB of RAM.

According to benchmarks, Apple’s A5 is likely a dual-core ARM Cortex A9 CPU at 1GHz but dynamically clocked to 900MHz, alongside an Imagination PowerVR SGX 543MP2, souped up with 512MB of RAM. In CPU and JavaScript render tests iPad 2 was a little faster than iOS 4.3 on iPad 1 and Android 3.0 Honeycomb on the Xoom. In GPU tests it was devastatingly faster. Faster as in it digs a hole, stomps them into the mud, refills the whole, stomps it again, and repeats ten more times before the others even try to fight back. It’s fast.

What all these geekily benchmarked numbers mean in the real world is faster access to your web pages, especially JavaScript-heavy pages like Facebook, and far smoother, more detailed, and more high-performance graphics in everything from OS transitions to full 3D games. The extra RAM means you can keep more web pages in memory and apps and games in saved state longer. Maddeningly, the original iPad was so RAM-starved it would practically reload a web page every time you changed tabs. I’ve kept 5 or more — the entire Smartphone Experts Network in fact — live and instantly reachable in Safari tabs with nary a reload in sight. Same goes for apps and games. When before saved states would drop semi regularly I’ve barely ever seen that on iPad 2 even with several big games in the Fast App Switcher at once.

About the only internal spec that didn’t get a bump is storage. The options remain the same at 16GB, 32GB, and 64GB which is fine for almost all mainstream users but not the 128GB media aficionados have been clamoring for.

No other change from iPad to iPad 2 is more physically invisible but experientially meaningful than the new internals.

Smart magnets

iPad 2 has 10 magnets built into the frame. Currently they’re used to both attach Apple’s Smart Covers, and to sleep/wake-and-unlock the iPad 2 itself. Flick the Smart Cover and its 21 magnets anywhere near the left edge of iPad 2 and the magnets will grab it and align it near-perfectly. Lift them or close them over the right edge and the screen will go dark or light up instantaneously.

But the Smart Covers — despite the press they’re getting — aren’t the story. They’re just the introduction. Apple had first-party and hence first -mover advantage and will likely sell a ton of Smart Covers at launch. However, I’m more excited about what will come next, when every creative case maker and genius accessory company in the business starts to release succeeding generations of “smart” products.

Gryos and radios and batteries, oh my

Like iPhone 4 and iPod touch 4 before it, iPad 2 adds a gyroscope to its existing accelerometer which provides precise 3-axis rotation and control to games, Augmented Reality, and other motion-sensitive apps. (Real Racing fans, commence your celebrations.)

While Apple didn’t go LTE with their cellular radio, and didn’t even give us HSPA+, they did add a CDMA option for Verizon.

• GSM/AT&T: UMTS/HSDPA/HSUPA (850, 900, 1900, 2100 MHz); GSM/EDGE (850, 900, 1800, 1900 MHz)
• Verizon: CDMA EV-DO Rev. A (800, 1900 MHz)

The lack of LTE makes sense given its small footprint and Apple’s reluctance to even go 3G in the original iPhone. HSPA+ is a disappointment, however, considering it’s international deployment (though admittedly AT&T’s HSPA+ isn’t at the faster end of the spectrum…). With the Verizon iPhone launch earlier in the year, a CDMA iPad was almost a no-brainer. Coverage and competition will no doubt be welcome, though EVDO is slower than HSPA and there’s no voice network so no dropped calls to worry about.

iPad 2 has the same 802.11/a/b/g/n as last year, which is to say the latest and greatest still available. Bluetooth is also the same as last year, 2.1 + EDR. There is a Bluetooth 3.0 + HS spec, adopted in 2009, that boosts speeds by handing the connection over to Wi-Fi but Apple has shown no interest in that to date. Maybe they’re waiting on Wi-Fi direct…

Most impressively, even with all the new internals Apple to crammed into iPad 2, they managed to retain the same 10 hours of battery life (25-watt-hour). Whether that’s some black magic mix of highly efficient hardware and aggressive software I don’t know, but getting so much performance without giving up any battery life is a huge achievement.

Accessories and compatibility

Due to the very different form factor, original iPad cases (with the exception of pouches, which might be a bit roomy) aren’t compatible with iPad 2. Other accessories, especially those that connect via cable to the dock port or use Bluetooth should be just fine. Those that connect directly to the dock port, such as cradles and car kits may or may not work so keep that in mind if you’re upgrading.

Apple’s own Smart Covers come in pastel gray, blue, green, orange, and pink polyurethane for $39 or cream, tan, black, navy, or (PRODUCT) red for $69.

The Digital AV adapter (HDMI cable) is $39 and if you want to go wireless with AirPlay but no mirroring, an Apple TV is $100

Both the camera kit and VGA adapter from the original iPad continue to work with iPad 2, as do the component and composite cables and the 10w power adapter. There’s a new iPad 2-specific dock for $29 and while the original iPad dock and keyboard dock seem to still be available from Apple, I wouldn’t risk them. You can get a Bluetooth Keyboard for greater flexibility and compatibility.

The total package

Some say iPad 2 is an iPhone 3GS-style upgrade. They’re wrong. It’s not iPhone 3G (no next-generation radio) or iPhone 3GS (which didn’t get any extra cameras). As should be apparent by now, it’s an iPod touch 3 (2009) to iPod touch 4 (2010)-style upgrade. Thinner and sleeker, the glass and aluminum of iPad 2 still feels every bit as solid as the first iPad. It remains heavy but until Apple creates some liquid metal-unubtainium hybrid that’s just the reality of a 9.7-inch device. So it still needs a lap or a table or an armrest or something to lean on for extended use. It’s better than the original iPad but only slightly in that regard.

Likewise it’s even less cluttered and more completely that window into apps and the web, but only slightly so. It equals the screen and betters the original iPad hardware in almost every way, especially the A5 processor. It unbelievably fast and even more unbelievably — the iPad 2 stays cool to the touch even when pushing ridiculous amounts of video and hardcore gaming. (Enough to make me wonder what an ARM-powered MacBook Air could one day be like — the Intel chipset running Adobe Flash can serve double duty as a griddle.)

iPad Software

The original iPad shipped with iOS 3.2, which was new and exciting at the time. It got its first taste of iOS 4 — including fast app switching, multitasking API, folders, and more — with iOS 4.2 last November and again it felt like a huge update. iPad 2 ships with iOS 4.3 and it’s relatively conservative by comparison. We’ve done a complete iOS 4.3 walkthrough already but here I’d like to focus on those features designed to complement iPad 2-specific hardware, and those features that benefit the most from iPad 2-specific hardware improvements.

We’ll start with Steve Jobs’ 7 better features.

Safari and web browsing

As Andrew shows in the video above, the combination of iOS 4.3′s new Nitro JavaScript engine (ported over from the Mac), the new Apple A5 SoC, and most especially the boost to 512MB of RAM turns Safari from an excellent if frustrating experience on the original iPad to an excellent and now mostly fantastic experience on iPad 2.

Where the original iPad tended to “kill” background tabs whenever it ran out of available memory — which was pretty much every time you switched pages and an incredibly annoying quality in a web browser — iPad 2 can keep a ton of tabs “alive” That means it doesn’t have to re-load them after each switch and you can stop waiting and start reading immediately. Also, the dreaded “checkerboard effect” — where significant lag would occur before Safari could render the web page content — is minimal. If waiting for a complex page like Facebook to render used to make you tear your hair out, iPad 2 will make certain you get to keep what you have left.

If your primary iPad use is web browsing, this by itself might make iPad 2 a worthy upgrade. As we’ll see in a moment with apps and gaming, it’s like going from dial-up to broadband. Combined with their industry leading HTML 5 and CSS 3 support, iPad 2 Safari is an incredible browser and an unparalleled platform for mobile web development (web apps).

And yes, due to complacency on the part of Adobe and intransigence on the part of Apple, iPad 2 Safari still doesn’t support Flash. If Flash is critical to you and App Store apps like SkyFire or iSwifter (which transcode Flash to H.264 video on the fly) aren’t solution enough, iPad 2 may be a non-starter.

Email, Photos, Video, Music, and eBooks

Thanks to iPad 2′s Apple A5 processor the apps launch faster. Thanks to the “cameras”, Photos now has a real Camera Roll. Thanks to iOS 4.3 Home Sharing and AirPlay the media is more transportable than ever (streaming from your Mac or Windows PC to your iPad and from your iPad to your Apple TV). Thanks to a steady stream of iBooks updates and publisher additions, eBooks are better looking and less embarrassing when compared to Amazon’s Kindle catalog.

Most of these are incidental improvements, however. The Mail app hasn’t been redesigned to provide flags/stars, mark as spam, or mark all as read functionality. Photos hasn’t gotten any form of cloud-based sync. Videos and Music still haven’t gotten iTunes Extras or iTunes LP support (anyone remember those?!). And Apple’s new subscription service is controversial to say the least and hasn’t done anything to provide for a unified marketplace for periodicals — iMags, iNews, iComics are still in iLimbo.

Perhaps iOS 5 will address these issues and more (see below).

Gaming

Apple touted 9x graphics performance on iPad 2 and also introduced a gyroscope for 3-axis positioning. It’s safe to say they’re taking gaming very seriously. How does it all come together? According to Chad — awesomely well. They launch faster and play more fluidly with little or no slow down or skipping. The level of texture and detail is also much higher and because iPad 2 is thinner and a little lighter, it is much more comfortable to hold.

Of course developers need to update their games to take advantage of the better processing and graphics. Some have already and with spectacular results. Real Racing HD 2, Infinity Blade, and Dead Space HD are all incredible examples of what’s possible on iPad 2 — before the device even shipped. It will be interesting to see what developers can get out of it now that they have it in their hands, and in the months to follow.

• Top 5 apps and games to show off your new iPad 2

Apps

While not part of Steve Jobs’ original 7 key features, Apple spent a considerable amount of time during the iPad 2 introduction on iMovie and GarageBand. Both were no doubt created with three different but complementary goals in mind — to delight and astonish users with an incredibly immersive content creation experience, to raise the bar for developers and challenge them to make mobile software of the same caliber, and to programmatically walk up to the competition, pull out a Bugs Bunny glove, fill it with a brick, and smack them back to the drawing board.

They represent the next generation of tablet software, once again redefining perceptions and expectations on what can and can’t be done with multitouch and 9.7-inches of glass and aluminum. And interestingly, unlike last year’s suite of Pages, Numbers, and Keynote, this year Apple switched from iWork to iLife and with much better results. While it was fun to finger paint with productivity, I still found myself going back to my Mac when I needed to get work done. iMovie and GarageBand better fit the iPad vision, or at least Apple is getting better at articulating their vision with these apps.

But that’s big picture stuff. Mainstream users, when they’re laying down up to 8-tracks, tapping away on virtual drums, strumming virtual strings, tickling virtual ivory, and laying down some smoking hot vocals to top it off, you won’t care about any of that. They’ll be rocking out to GarageBand.

Both are $4.99 on the App Store and will hopefully be joined by a real iPhoto or Aperture app at some point soon.

• iMovie hands-on

FaceTime

FaceTime on iPad 2 is built-in and functions in the same manner as iPod touch 4. Enter and Apple ID, associate it with an email address you want to serve as the FaceTime “call number”, and you’re good to go. Because iPad 2 has the same cameras as iPod touch 4 the quality is similar but due to the large size of iPad 2′s screen, it feels better. It’s like doing FaceTime on Mac or Skype on Pac but without the annoying keyboard getting in your way. Dieter described it as the optimal shared experience. iPhones and iPods touch are great for a single user but if you want to have family moments — grandparents sitting on the sofa, parents with their children on their laps the iPad is better. Even classes and coworkers huddled together will benefit from iPad’s implementation of FaceTime.

It’s a question of scale really. iPad doesn’t show FaceTime in real size but it shows FaceTime closer to real size and it makes a difference, even if you’re just one person reclining on the sofa…

Unfortunately, Apple didn’t (yet?) choose to take advantage of the big iPad screen by giving us FaceTime conference calls so three long-distance family members or friends can share a video call. Maybe iOS 5 will also address that.

Also, while Apple uses open standards for FaceTime they don’t seem to have pushed out FaceTime itself as an easy to implement open standard so iOS users can easily video chat with Android, webOS, and Windows users. Until that happens, cross-platform solutions like Skype remain more appealing. (Especially because they work over 3G, unlike FaceTime — unless you tether to a mobile/personal hotspot, which makes the kind of sense that doesn’t.)

Photo Booth

Leanna took a look at Photo Booth, also built-in on iPad 2, and found it to be fun if silly, similar to Photo Booth on the Mac, and entertaining for kids and adults alike. Photo Booth is equipped with 8 different effects: Thermal Camera, Mirror, X-Ray, Kaleidoscope, Light Tunnel, Squeeze, Twirl, and Stretch. You can edit the effect before snapping the picture by pinching and dragging on the screen. As you take photos (from either front or rear camera) with Photo Booth, they are saved to your Camera Roll and you can see thumbnails of the images at the bottom of the screen. From here, you can easily email, copy, and delete multiple photos. Be careful though, deleting a photo from Photo Booth also deletes it from your Camera Roll.

Again, the quality of the photos taken with the VGA front-facing camera are not by any means outstanding, but given the nature of these shots – fun, quirky, and silly – it isn’t too big of a deal.

While kids might go back to Photo Booth again and again, and it might be fun to demo for friends and family, my guess is Apple included it on iPad 2 as more of a tech demo — to show how the Apple A5 SoC can handle 9 simultaneous camera live views, all with different, real-time reflections — and as a great in-store demo. Kids playing on Photo Booth for Mac has been a staple of Apple Store activity for ages. Now those kids will be playing on Photo Booth for iPad.

Video mirroring

With iPad 2 you can finally duplicate the iOS display onto an external monitor or HDTV via Apple’s Digital AV Adapter (which I’ll more sanely call the HDMI adapter from now on). That means anything on your iPad 2 from the home screen to videos to games to presentations can be shared with larger groups on a bigger screen. For video, AirPlay is probably better because it’s wireless but it requires an Apple TV on the receiving end. Because the adapter goes straight into the HDMI port it can handle up to 1080p and unlike AirPlay, it can show apps. (Hopefully AirPlay will gain that ability in the future.)

Since iPad is 1024×768 it shows up as letter- and pillar-boxed on a 1080p (1920×1080) display. That means it’s not as big as it could possibly be but it also means the pixels are mapped 1-to-1 and aren’t stretched and blurred to fill the screen. (You can use your HDTV’s zoom feature to fill the screen if you don’t care about pixel perfection and just want it BIG.)

Georgia and I tried it out on her wall mounted HDTV and while she had to maintain focus on the iPad to play Infinity Blade and Angry Birds, her family and I got to enjoy watching along. For group games it could be a lot of fun. For use in a classroom or conference room it could be game changing.

That Post-PC thing

Apple has taken to calling the iPad a post-PC device, and retconned iPod and iPhone into the same category. I don’t recall a PC being called a post-mainframe, but that’s neither here nor there. Dieter recently ranted on the iPad Live! podcast that iPad still needs to be plugged into iTunes to activate and that makes the post-PC rather PC-dependent. Apple Stores will do this for you but Apple won’t ship the device already activated, and any time you update iOS you need to re-tether to iTunes to re-activate. Apple may think that transfers over iTunes DRM authentication and promotes regular backups but in 2011 it’s also a bit of a pain.

Most Android devices and all webOS devices require a Gmail or Palm ID to activate them, which I’d argue means they’re still dependent on a PC, just one in the cloud. It would be nice if iPad 2 — if all mobile devices — tore down that dependance, local and cloud both, and made it optional. Then they could stop being post-PC, stop being transitional, and become a thing unto themselves.

Waiting on June

Beyond activation, iPad software in general is hamstrung by the fact that major new iOS releases are historically timed to coincide with major iPhone releases. That means any new iPad, the first one notwithstanding, is currently destined to wait 3 months for a really meaningful update. At least that’s the case this year. A couple of new built-in apps aside, iPad 2 is running a 9-month old, thrice point-bumped OS at the moment. While iOS 4, and in this specific case iOS 4.3 is impressive on iPad 2, I can’t help but imagine what iOS 5 will bring.

Settings restored from the cloud, Syngergy-style contact and status aggregation, App and game sync across iOS devices, a unified file repository, system-wide voice control, elegant notifications, a Theme Store, and any number of other improvements will no doubt be as big a deal for iPad 2 as iOS 4.2 was for the original iPad. That’s an exciting prospect.

Pricing and availability

iPad 2 launched on March 11 in the US and is currently scheduled to launch on March 25 in Australia, Austria, Belgium, Canada, Czech Republic, Denmark, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Japan, Luxembourg, Mexico, Netherlands, New Zealand, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland and the UK. Additional countries, including the rest of Asia will follow but no dates have yet been announced.

In the US iPad 2 is available online and in stores at AT&T, Best Buy, Target, Verizon Wireless, Walmart and select Apple Authorized Resellers.

Pricing remains the same: $499 for 16GB Wi-Fi, $599 for 32GB Wi-Fi, and $699 for 64GB Wi-Fi. AT&T GSM/HSPA and separate Verizon CDMA/EVDO rev A models are available for $130 more or $629 for 16GB 3G, $729 for 32GB 3G, and $829 for 64GB 3G.

All those models come in both white and black for a grand total of 18 SKUs for US shoppers to choose from, a dizzying 10 more than last year. (International shoppers will only have 12 SKUs to choose from — no Verizon models.)

Conclusion

iPad 2 is an evolutionary improvement to the original iPad, but that’s true of almost every iOS device update. Taken year by year each generation seems only slightly better than the last. It’s like children you see every day as opposed to just on holidays. The incremental growth escapes you. When looking back from the original iPhone 2G to the latest iPhone 4, however, the improvements are staggering. And that creates a bit of a challenge for consumers.

If you’re still not sure whether you’d even use a tablet device, whether you need something between your smartphone and laptop, head on over to your local Apple Store, big box retailer, or carrier store and try out an iPad 2. Read and watch a lot of TiPb to be sure but iPad is really something that you need to feel and experience before you can make an informed choice. For some it will be the easy-to-use PC alternative they’ve always dreamed of. For others it will be tertiary at best and something they just have no place for in their lives.

If you’re trying to decide between iPad 2 and a competing tablet running Android, BlackBerry Tablet OS (QNX), the webOS TouchPad, or anything else, frankly iPad 2 should be your default choice. Most competing tablets haven’t even shipped yet (almost all lack even a solid release date) and none of them have the apps, accessories, fit, finish or ecosystem of iPad 2. While things can and probably will change over the course of the next year, at the time of this review the tablet space is for all intents and purposes a one horse race. Unless there’s a feature a competing tablet has at the time you want to buy it, a feature compelling enough to make everything else take a back seat — like a 7-inch form factor, Flash support, not being made by Apple, etc. — it’s hard to recommend anything other than iPad 2 right now.

If you’re wondering whether or not you should upgrade, there are always only a few reasons to consider the next current year’s model over the last. Either you’re a gadget lover who simply has to have the latest and greatest, or there’s one or more features important enough to make the upgrade worth while. For those considering the short step from iPad to iPad 2 this year, those features include video mirroring (especially if you’re in education or business), the speed improvements (if Safari and apps performance was slow and RAM-starved enough to bother you previously), the gyroscope and 9x graphics improvements for hardcore gamers, the magnets for those who want in on Smart Covers and the other accessories that will no doubt follow them, the cameras if FaceTime is meaningful to you and your loved ones, and the Verizon 3G models if you need mobile connectivity and that’s the best network in your area.

(For more on whether you should get an iPad 2 and which model might best suit you, see our iPad buyers guide.)

I used my original iPad a lot… until iPhone 4 was released. I still kept most of my apps and games on iPad but because iPhone 4 was so much faster I just picked it up far more often. iPad 2 has changed that paradigm again. The combination of the big screen and Apple A5 processor has made it my go-to device once more (when I’m not in feet-down mobile, of course.) It’s by no means perfect, and we’ve listed many of the most glaring and frustrating imperfections above, but iPad 2 looks better, it feels better, and it just works better.

Neither Empire nor Reloaded, iPad 2 is closer akin to The Two Towers — a solid second part in the iPad’s ongoing story.

The Verizon iPhone is one of the most anticipated smartphones in recent memory, made even more so by the endless rumors and years of waiting those who wanted it had to endure. Now it’s here and while the radio has changed it’s still pretty much the same iPhone 4 Apple shipped on AT&T back in June 2010. A 7 month old phone on a brand new network is not something iPhone users have had to consider in the past. Is it worth the wait? Is Verizon really a better network? Does CDMA have important shortcomings you need to be aware of? Will the entire thing be rendered moot when Apple announces an iPhone 5 in June?

Figuring out the answers to these questions and more have kept all of us at TiPb extremely busy over the past couple of weeks. So hit the jump and on for our full Verizon iPhone review!

Since the Verizon iPhone 4 is still an iPhone 4 we’re only going to look at and compare the differences between the Verizon model and the AT&T/GSM model here. If you haven’t already, check out our original iPhone 4 review to see all the features that are similar including FaceTime video calls, Retina Display screen, 5mp camera and HD video recording, etc.

In the box

You’ll get the standard Apple headphones, the wall adapter, a sync cable, and your manuals. The only difference is really the phone and the back of the box.

The back of the box simply specifies the carrier. Other than that, everything should be the same. Oh let’s not forget that you won’t get a handy dandy micro-SIM removal tool, since CDMA phones don’t use them.

Hardware differences

The Verizon iPhone has different breaks in the antenna band than its AT&T/GSM sibling. Even though the antenna band was redesigned for CDMA, I don’t see any improvement when it comes to the “death grip” issue (see our explanation of “death touch” vs. “death grip” for more on this). If anything, I experience it more than I do on my AT&T iPhone 4. I’m not sure if attenuation on the Verizon version is worse because of a difference between CDMA and GSM or if it’s something else. I experience the issue on my AT&T iPhone but it seems that the signal doesn’t drop as quick and when it does, it goes up quicker when I’m not touching the break in the band. The Verizon version seems to lose bars a lot quicker and it takes a bit longer for them to come back.

As most people have already figured out, putting a bumper or a case on your phone will solve the death grip problem.

Other than the breaks in the antenna bands, the mute switch and volume buttons are moved down about 2mm on the Verizon iPhone 4. This is because of the break in the antenna at the top left of the phone. For users coming from an AT&T iPhone 4, this can be annoying as many current iPhone 4 cases will not work as the silent switch and volume buttons are positioned differently.

The only other difference I have found is that the Verizon iPhone 4 doesn’t have the FCC and other clearance marks on the back the way the AT&T/GSM version does.

Software differences

The AT&T/GSM iPhone 4 is currently running iOS 4.2.1. The Verizon iPhone 4 launched with iOS 4.2.6. The only major feature 4.2.6 adds is personal hotspot capabilities (called mobile hotspot on other devices). AT&T has announced that they will offer mobile hotspot as well but no dates have been given yet, and it will require an iOS 4.3 update. Currently AT&T offers internet tethering for iPhone users but you are limited to Bluetooth and USB tethering.

The Verizon version supports wifi tethering for up to 5 devices. This is extremely nice if you’re somewhere without wifi and need to access the internet from a wifi only device (like a wifi iPad). You can simply enable the mobile hotspot feature and it’ll show up as a wireless network on your other device. You can also choose to add a password if you’d like. We’ll cover that below.

Syncing data

If your’e coming from an AT&T iPhone, you’ll feel right at home. Actually, if you’ve ever used an iPod of any kind or an iPad, you’ll already know what to do. The Verizon iPhone is no different than its AT&T brother. Plug into iTunes, sync your content, and you’re good to go. Verizon also offers a contact transfer app for current customers that’ll easily bring down all your contacts wirelessly for you (given you use Verizon’s contact backup service). If you need more help:

• How to transfer data from your old AT&T iPhone to your new Verizon iPhone
• How to transfer data from your old Blackberry or Droid/Android to your new Verizon iPhone

There’s really nothing new here, both iPhones will sync and store data in the same manner.

Apps

All the apps that run on the current AT&T/GSM iPhone also run on the Verizon iPhone (with the sole exception of carrier branded apps, like AT&T Navigator.) Apple has hundreds of thousands of apps and games available for the iPhone and Verizon will be releasing some carrier-specific ones as well, hopefully something to tie into their NFL deal. Here are some good starting points:

• Top 10 best iPhone 4 apps
• Top 5 iPhone apps for Droid/Android switchers
• Top 5 iPhone apps for BlackBerry switchers

Call Clarity

CDMA is long known to handle calls better than GSM. But is that really true? When it comes to clarity, sure. But you do lose some features when using a CDMA iPhone. Conference calls are only good for up to 3 people, including yourself. The way calls are handled can differ too. On AT&T, if you initiate a conference call, you can merge the calls, split them off, and hang up separately. On Verizon, hanging up on one will hang up on both. This is also a downside of the current version of CDMA Verizon is utilizing.

In most of our Verizon voice tests, call clarity was always on par with AT&T or better.

Personal Hotspot

Personal hotspot is definitely a welcome feature to iOS. It’s also only available for Verizon customers at the moment. AT&T has stated they have plans to release it, presumably with the launch of iOS 4.3, but no date has been given yet.

This feature allows you to turn your phone into a wireless hotspot. Up to 5 devices at a time can connect and use your iPhone 4′s internet connection. We tested this pretty thoroughly and found that it works as promised. I was pretty impressed with the speeds and reliability.

Data Speeds

Verizon is offering their customers unlimited (though potentially throttled) data, while AT&T only offers 250MB and 2GB data tiers. This is a huge selling point for them. But can their network handle the traffic? From our experience, yet it can. Quite well actually. Leanna and I both conducted speed tests. Mine in the Chicago area and hers in the Denver area. While AT&T was much faster for me, in real world situations (even tethering), neither of us had issues with Verizon and it always loaded pages within seconds of our AT&T iPhones. Sometimes it even loaded them quicker.

Data speeds and network reliability will, of course, heavily rely on coverage in your particular area. AT&T typically handles well in larger populated areas while Verizon has been known to have a strong network in rural areas as well. We conducted several Verizon iPhone 4 speed tests and the results were more than respectable.

Verizon iPhone or AT&T iPhone?

That’s really a decision each individual person is going to have to make. As always, you should base it on what the coverage is like where you live. For some, AT&T and Verizon may both be strong players in your area. If you’re in that situation, take a look at each carrier and what benefits GSM has over CDMA and vice versa. We also did a Verizon iPhone 4 vs AT&T iPhone 4 comparison. We pitted them against each other, and both held their own. You’ll really have to weigh out what options are more important to you. Do you need simultaneous voice and data or are you more concerned with call clarity? The little differences can end up being annoying over time so it may be worth it to weigh your options and choose the carrier that’ll best fit your individual needs.

State of the Verizon Jailbreak

A lot of potential Verizon switchers have been asking if they’re able to jailbreak if they switch. The answer to that is a big fat yes! greepois0n supports the Verizon iPhone as well. I jailbroke mine on launch day without a hitch. We’ve also got a complete guide up on how to jailbreak the Verizon iPhone 4. So if you’re a jailbreaker (or want to be), make sure to give that a look.

Wrap Up

We had quite a week playing with the Verizon iPhone 4. We came away feeling that Verizon is definitely capable of delivering a great customer experience. I’d have no qualms about using the Verizon iPhone 4 if you don’t need simultaneous voice and data or don’t mind some of the little annoyances that come along with CDMA. The plans on both carriers are roughly similar with the exception of Verizon offering unlimited data while AT&T only offers tiered.

Now that Verizon finally has the iPhone, both businesses are going to have to compete for our business. For almost 4 years, AT&T hasn’t had to compete for iPhone revenue. If you wanted an iPhone, you were going to play by their rules. Those days are long gone and we have a feeling it’s going to get pretty interesting from here on out. Let the carrier wars begin!

The Griffin AeroSport for iPod nano is an armband strap for those who are always on the go and want to take their music with them. It’s made of a lycra so it is very light, comfortable, and flexible and stays put on your arm whether you are jogging or playing sports. For more on the Griffin AeroSport for iPod nano stay with us after the break!

The Griffin AeroSport band is one piece. You just strap it on and then velcro the band in place. It was very secure and extremely comfortable when I tried it out. The nano just slips into the clip on the AerosSports faceplate and you have full access to all ports. You can change music easily while using the armband and it is great for those of you who are active and enjoy music to keep you moving. I really love this armband. I only wish they’d made it adjustable enough to wear as a watchband!

The Griffin AeroSport for iPod nano is available now from the TiPb iPhone and iPad Accessory Store. Let me know if you’ll be picking one up!

Pros

• Comfortable
• Easy to use
• Full access to ports
• Light
• Affordable

Cons

• Wish I could adjust it to be a watchband

TiPb review rating

Photos

When it comes to document editing and creation on the iPad, two solutions really stand out: Apple’s iWork Suite (Pages, Numbers, and Keynote) and DataViz’s Documents to Go app. Which is better? Well, I wish the decision was that easy.

Both apps (or set of apps in iWork’s case — you can buy each separately) allow you to edit and create documents, spreadsheets and presentations. iWork also has the advantage of using Apple’s iWork format and Office format as well and is beautifully designed. Documents to Go does a stellar job of rendering and editing Microsoft’s Office format. Let’s begin by looking at each app a little more in-depth. I will focus primarily on the differences of how each application handles their word processing since this is the number one reason people would use these apps and, you probably don’t want a mini-novel to read. There is an incredible amount to discuss with both iWork and Documents to Go, I cannot conceivably cover it all here. My goal is to give you a detailed enough overview to help you decided which app will work best for you.

iWork

Apple sells the iWork Suite of applications for $9.99 each. The individual apps are Pages (word processor), Numbers (spreadsheet) and Keynote (presentations). Pages looks amazing. Just the aesthetic alone let’s you know this isn’t “baby software”, but the real deal. When you start off by creating a new document, you are presented with several beautiful templates to get you started. For our purposes, we will look at a standard blank document. You have a standard document toolbar at the top of the screen. The Body button gives you a good set of default styles. To the right you have the traditional Bold, Italics and Underline buttons. Finally you have a tab-like icon that gives you the ability to enter a tab, line break, column or page break. Wow, that is some serious stuff there.

On the top of the screen you have an “i” button. This allows you to define a style, lists and indents, text alignment and line spacing. To the right is the picture icon that inserts pictures, tables, charts and shapes. Finally you have the wrench icon that essentially has your settings for Pages; Find, margins, watermarks and more can be found here.

Once you begin typing, you have a very familiar experience, it’s just like a desktop whether you have been using a Mac or a PC. Use the tab button to quickly indent. Use the ruler to adjust alignments or place tab stops. Regardless, the interface is simple yet powerful. Do you have a multiple page document? A new innovative feature uses the ability to tap and hold in the right margin. This will bring up a magnifying glass that shows you a thumbnail preview of your page. Drag your finger down and it will preview the other pages in your document. Release on the desired page and Pages will instantly open the previewed page for you; no clumsy flicking or endless scrolling needed.

When your document is done, you can email it, share via iWork.com, send it to iTunes, copy it to iDisk or copy it to WebDav. The most popular method is to email. It is important to note that Pages creates your document in the .pages format which is not compatible with any other word processing application other than iWork for Mac. So, when you email your document, you are given three choices: send it as a Pages, PDF or .Doc format. The .doc option is compatible with PCs and PDF is comparable with just about any computer platform, but is not natively editable. If you send in Pages and PDF formats you will be quite pleased with the results. If you create a complex document with graphics, columns, , etc. and send via .doc format, your results may differ. I typically only create boring APA (American Psychological Association) formatted documents, and when sent via .doc format, they render beautifully. The same goes with importing a document, from say, from email. Though Pages does a really good job of opening and editing .doc documents, it is not flawless and some formatting loss can happen. Apple has improved this process with each update, but it is still not perfect. However, this is one of Pages strong points, it actually supports more than one format. You can also easily upload and download documents from the “cloud” via the iDisk and WebDav options.

At the end of the day, iWork gives you a beautiful robust set of tools for not only word processing but for spreadsheet calculations and creating presentations as well. Many of the same features carry over such as sending in Microsoft-friendly formats and access your files from the cloud. Though these apps are not perfect, they offer advanced features, many of which have only been available on desktop applications, until now.

[Pages - $9.99 - iTunes link]

[Numbers - $9.99 - iTunes link]

[Keynote - $9.99 - iTunes link]

Documents to Go

I have used Documents to Go (Docs to Go) for years, ever since the Palm V days of old. These guys have been at it for a while and I was expecting big things from them on the iPad and for the most part, Docs to Go doesn’t disappoint. Docs to Go is a single app that supports a wide array of files for viewing and Office files for editing and sells for $16.99 or $9.99 in the App Store. The launch screen is divided into several sections; Local files, Desktop files, Online files, Recents, Search and Settings. Yes, Docs to Go has a very robust means to access your files and search them.

Once you open a file in the Word app, one feature I noticed immediately that I really liked is the ability to pinch and zoom the text to the appropritea size. The text wraps around in real-time which is cool. After deciding on the fone size you like, It’s off to write your text. You have the typical fanfare as iWork does with text formats, colors, paragraph alingments, etc. Docs to Go does not support more advanced features in it’s word processing app like real-time image arrangement as iWork does, but it gets the besics done well and cleanly. Two quibbles that I have is that Docs to Go was not developed with the iPad in mind, it is basically a big iPhone app, which is such a shame. Menus are designed for the iPhone, not the iPad. What do I mean? A good example is the placement of the formating buttons; they are along the bottom of the app. At first that may not sound like a bad idea, however, when you are typing, the keyboard appears and hides the buttons so you can’t format while you time. Is it a deal breaker? No, but annoying none-the-less.

For me, where Docs to Go really shines over the competition is its “Intact” technology. At work, I use Microsoft Word to create my documents. Admittedly, I sometimes use fancy formats, tables, images, etc. As I mentioned earlier, these may not render very well in Pages. With Docs to Go however, if the app doesn’t know what the object is on the document, it doesn’t even try to render it, instead it gives you a “?” placeholder that tells you “if you delete me, you will lose this feature when you sync back your document”. What a life saver! You can edit a document and not have to worry about loosing formating any more.

Other benefits of Docs to Go include the fact that it is a universal binary, so buy it once and you can use on the iPhone and iPad, not a bad deal at al. You can also sync via iTunes Sharing and Docs to Go’s own Wi-Fi sharing app for PC and Mac.

[Documents to Go Premium - $16.99 - iTunes link]

[Documents to Go - $9.99 - iTunes link

Conclusion

You can also find previous reviews of these apps, Here for Pages and Here for Docs to Go.

This week I got to try out the Griffin Elan Passport Case for iPad and I really like it! The Elan Passport is a leather flip case with a soft microsuede interior. When closed, the Elan Portfolio resembles a book. When you open it you have immediate access to the touchscreen on the right and the left has four slots for credit cards, business cards, etc. or other similarly shaped items and a sleeve to tuck additional paper into such as receipts and more.

The four slots on the left of the case easily accommodate a drivers license, credit card, Starbucks card, business cards or any other type of “card” you might want to place there. When a card is placed in the case sleeve, the card will stop with just enough room for you to remove it with your fingers. I always felt these items were very secure, and they would not easily fall out. The sleeve lies underneath the slots. It is roughly 4 inches deep and can accommodate some miscellaneous papers, but nothing the size of an 8.5 x 11 piece of paper unless it’s folded.

The iPad is protected on all sides as the device easily rests about a .25″ from each corner. The microsuede is a nice touch and breathes a quality finish. The iPad is held in place by four corner straps. On the right, the straps are sewn into the case. The two on the left are elastic and allows for easy placement and removal of the iPad. When the Elan Passport is closed, it is secured by a tab closure across the top. It does not lock, but it is securely held in place and is there to simply keep the cover from accidentally flipping open.

Overall I really like the Griffin Elan Passport Case for iPad. It’s light, looks good, low profile and does a good job of protecting iPad; a very professional case. It’s available now from the TiPb iPad Accessory Store.

Pros

• Compact
• Leather and microsuede
• A couple of pockets to stash receipts, etc.
• Good job protecting the deivce for accidental bumps

Cons

• Though secure, if dropped, the iPad could fly out and damage is possible
• Additional Card slots would nice, four is a bit limiting

Note & Share is a note taking app with support for iPhone and iPad. It is a universal binary so you won’t have to purchase them separately. Note & Share also offers integration with several different services. Dropbox, Twitter, Evernote, Google Docs, and Mail are a few popular ones that Note & Share easily integrates with.

Note & Share also supports markdown as well. I recently wrote a review on Markdown Mail, so I was eager to see how Note & Share stacked up against it. I’d say it fairs pretty well. Setting up your services is easy enough and sharing to them is even easier.

When you launch the app, you’ll be presented with a text entry box. You can simply start typing your content and then choose how you want to share it. Or you can optionally just save it as a note locally to your phone with a simple tap. You can also clear the entire text entry field with one tap, which is a nice feature.

Note & Share also supports image upload as well. You can choose your media and it will shorten the URL and insert it into your note.

When it comes to exporting to Evernote or any service that supports hashtags, it will recognize those as tags and import accordingly. Your first line of text will also be used as the note title, similar to the way Markdown Mail will title notes.

The interface is not as simple as Markdown Mail’s but its still extremely easy to use. I expected the interface to be a bit advanced considering it supports many more features than Markdown Mail does.

If you’re looking for a note taking app that allows synchronization and upload with several services, Note & Share is probably the way to go. If you’re just looking for an app that allows markdown conversion and offers a way to send HTML rich e-mail, you may want to give Markdown Mail a look. Both apps are extremely good at what they do and neither is a bad choice. As of right now, Markdown Mail is $1 more than Note & Share. I’d say for the extra features, spring for Note & Share.

The developers of Note & Share were also nice enough to give us some promo codes to give away to you guys. Wanna win one? Leave a comment below using a valid e-mail address. That’s it, you’re entered! We’ll pick 2 of you to win free copies of Note & Share! (Reminder: Promo codes only work in the US App Store — Apple’s rule, not ours!)

Pros

• Integrates seamlessly with several services
• One tap delete is a nice feature
• Hashtag support for tags in Evernote works great
• Markdown conversion is extremely simple

Cons

• Text entry field is small on iPhone version and scrolling can be daunting when working with long notes

Lego Harry Potter Years 1-4 for iPhone and iPad is definitely a game any Harry Potter fan should check out. From the very beginning you’ll be completely immersed in the magical world of Harry we’ve all come to know and love. You’ll start the game off playing as Harry. As you progress, you’ll unlock more characters to play as. The controls are easy to learn and before you know it you’ll be casting spells, brewing potions, and zooming around on a broomstick!

When you start the game you’ll start from the very beginning. There are cut scenes every so often as you progress through the actual story line. To skip cut scenes, you can simply double tap. I personally don’t typically skip them as I find them quite enjoyable. Most of the music in the game is music you find in all the movies, so if you enjoy the scores to the movies, you’ll love it. If you didn’t, well you can always turn the music off in settings.

After you hit your first save point in the game, you can quit to the lobby area. In the lobby, you’ll see four doors which represent the 4 books the game covers – Sorcerer’s (Philosopher’s) Stone, Chamber of Secrets, Prisoner of Azkaban, and Goblet of Fire. Once you complete one story line, you’ll gain access to the next. If you ever want to go back to a previous story, you can jump back to the lobby and go back. I find myself doing this whenever I get stuck. I’ll go back and find hidden secrets or items I didn’t find the first time around.

The lobby also contains an area to view your Lego models as you unlock them. This area is located off to the left. Down the stairs you’ll see an hour glass. When you stand in front of it, it will tell you how much game play time you’ve accumulated as well as the percentage of the game you’ve beaten. To the left from the bottom of the stairs, if you stand in front of the Weasley twins, you can browse the shop and buy items such as cut scenes, characters, and more with the Lego coins you’ve collected on your journey. The lobby is also where you’ll be able to customize your character (clothes, features, etc).

The overall gameplay experience is great. The difficulty level increases at an even pace as you learn new spells and play through mini quests. As you go on, the game can be a little difficult at times. To me, that just means it will keep me busy for longer. As much as I love games like Cut the Rope, it didn’t keep me occupied for very long.

I’m really enjoying playing through this game and I’d have to say I’m impressed with the quality. Sometimes moving your character around can be a little glitchy if you get stuck on the side of an object, but once you get the hang of it, it’s all cake after that. If any of you TiPb readers out there picked up this game, let us know what you think in the comments as well!

Pros

• Easy to learn controls
• Gameplay difficulty increases at a pretty steady pace
• Tons of secrets and items to unlock that will keep you busy
• Music and cut scenes are cute and fun to watch in Lego form
• Graphics are astounding, especially on iPhone 4 and iPad

Cons

• Moving your character around can sometimes be glitchy, not very often though
• Initially loading the game is somewhat annoying as there are about 8 banners before the actual click to begin game finally comes up
• Save points are rather far apart, if you quit before one, you lose your progress. Keeping the game multitasked is an easy way to solve this issue though

YouTube Link

Trainyard for iPhone combines simplistic graphics and design with puzzles that are not so simple. The concept of the game is to get all the trains into the correct stations without a collision. The first several levels will teach you the basics but after that, you’ll definitely be scratching your head.

[iTunes Link]

After learning a couple basics, you’ll quickly be sending trains into the correct stations. Then you’ll gradually learn more maneuvers and techniques as the courses get more difficult. One thing I really liked about Trainyard is the progression. You don’t feel bored but the levels don’t overwhelm you either. Before each new trick or maneuver, you’ll spend several levels getting to know techniques before adding another.

You’ll need to learn techniques such as crossing tracks and merging trains. In some stations, you’ll have two trains and a hub that’s a different color. For instance, if you have a station that will only accept a green train, you’ll need to combine a blue train with a yellow in order to make one green train. The game will only use primary color trains and if you make a bad mix, you’ll get an ugly brown train, which no station will accept.

As you get further into the game, you’ll have to combine several techniques to get the correct patterns. There isn’t only one right solution to many levels though. While you may solve a level one way, another user may solve it another way. Trainyard also lets you upload your solutions to help other users. If you get stuck on a level, you can always view how other users solved those levels on the Trainyard site.

Each level will have a star amount it’s worth. You’ll need to collect a certain amount of stars in order to unlock new cities. Once you collect all the stars, you’ll unlock expert mode which will give you access to even more levels.

Levels also give you the option to clone them. This will let you solve the puzzle more than once since there can literally be hundreds of possible combinations for each level. So if you want a new challenge, try and solve the puzzles in more than one way. The only addition I’d really like to see is GameCenter integration.

Pros

• Difficulty increases at a steady pace
• Graphics and sound effects are simplistic and refreshing
• Sharing solutions is not only a great idea, but incredibly easy
• Longer game play than most puzzle or strategy games

Cons

• No GameCenter integration
• A way to see solutions in app would be awesome

The iLuv Skin Case is definitely an extremely thin case. It is made of a soft rubber silicon material that feels extremely smooth to the touch. Some people may be willing to sacrifice a little bit of protection to have a thinner more portable case but in my opinion, this case was more than a little too thin.

If you want something extremely thin and don’t plan on transporting your iPad very far in this case, you should be okay. Other than that, this case is more for looks than anything else.

I wouldn’t say it’s durable by any means. And after taking the case off and putting it back on a few times, the material starts to lose its shape. This is the sacrifice you’ll make by using a case as thin as the iLuv skin case. In my honest opinion, I’d probably step up to a case that is a little thicker. Sure it may cost you a few more dollars but you’ll be buying another one of these pretty quickly since it’ll lose its shape. I’d even go as far as to say if you snag it on something, it will tear very easily.

iLuv makes several other great cases that don’t sacrifice protection when it comes to making a sleek case. I’m not quite sure why they compromised so much on this one.

The iLuv Skin Case is available in the TiPb iPad Accessory Store as well as several other cases. If you already have this case, let us know what you thought of it in the comments.

Pros

• Extremely thin and adds virtually no bulk

Cons

• While it may be thin, it adds next to no protection
• Material feels cheaply made and very flimsy
• No grip means your iPad may be more likely to slip out of your hands

If your looking for a fun, simple racer with awesome graphics, then Reckless Racing HD might be for you. Playing this game reminds of RC Pro Am Racing on the original Nintendo, or NES. The premise is simple; beat other racers to win the championship.

The game is played with an overhead isometric view. There are several different control options, but I enjoy the default which is gas and break on the far right and left and right turn arrow on the left, the control is spot on too.

Starting off with the game you get a brief tutorial which also allows you to try out the different controls in real-time. Just tap the one you want to try while playing and you are good to go. Next, you can complete in a championship and more. There are three different classes to choose from; bronze, silver and gold. I personally had no challenge at all on bronze, so I bumped it up right to gold and had a blast. As you race there are obstacles to avoid, but the biggest challenge is just staying on the road! The game has you racing laps on dirt, gravel and paved roads and each feels succinctly different.

There are a few obstacles to watch out for while you race like cans, barrels and boxes. But what is great is that if you are a slick enough driver, you can discover nice shortcuts to help you through the level. The 8 tracks had me wanting a little more levels, though if you place first in the track you unlock the reverse course. I did find the three game modes (race, hot lap and delivery) to be fun as well.

The bonus with this game is with the multiplayer. You get 4 player racing online with Reckless Racing and it adds a whole other level racing with real people. You have leader boards and can save ghosts too. The only real issue I had with the multiplayer aspect is that you don’t know if people are in the middle of a race till you enter their game. If they are racing, you have to wait till the race is over to join. I wish there was a way to see what games were already racing so you could find a game that much easier, or a quick match might work too.

Overall Reckless Racing HD is a blast to play, but is just shy of total greatness due to a few nicks here and there. However, I am sure EA will have new levels and cars with downloadable content soon.

[$4.99- iTunes Link]

Pros

• Fun, fun game
• A variety of levels
• Online multiplayer

Cons

• Additional levels would be nice, the variety is good, but I feel I race the same levels over and over
• A few quirks with multiplayer

ProOnGo Expense with receipt reader is a universal app for iPhone and iPad that will easily track your expenses for you. It uses image capture to import information from receipts or you can manually enter details. The app currently supports regular, time, and mileage expenses. You have several options when it comes time to export your receipts and reports – including Excel, CSV, Quickbooks, and more.

iTunes Link

The app will come with 10 receipt reads to start. From there you can purchase credits on your account. You can purchase 30 receipt reads for 2.99/month or 50 receipt reads for 4.99/month. The prices are reasonable but the pricing model to me is a little tedious. I’d like to eventually see ProOnGo implement a monthly and yearly model where you pay a set fee and get unlimited reads. This is the only thing I didn’t particularly care for as I think some people may prefer an unlimited option. (Update: As of writing this, ProOnGo was not advertising an unlimited plan, but there is now one being rolled out to businesses, so if you’re looking for that, it IS an option.)

When it comes to the main features of the app, it couldn’t be any simpler. Receipts can be entered manually or via image capture. If users prefer not to buy credits, they can always choose to manually enter expenses for free instead of using imager capture. As an accountant, I think the image capture is worth the money as you’ll always have proof of your expenses if you ever need it.

One feature I really like is credit card sync. You can enter and store credit card info (I prefer manually entering credit card info opposed to storing my info when I need to sync for extra security) and the app will bring down your purchases from that account. The app currently only supports sync with American Express. I’d really like to see support for other cards as well. Most large businesses may use AmEx but smaller businesses may not. I think this app could be invaluable for smaller businesses as it’s an extremely easy and non-expensive way to manage and track expenses. I know I use one of my personal cards right now for business expenses for our repair service and development company, but that card isn’t an AmEx.

Expense reports couldn’t be easier to compile either. The app simply does it for you and emails you the report. Just choose the format you prefer and click send. It supports almost every major report format. I’d like to see native PeachTree support added as several Sage users may prefer native file types as they are more import friendly. PeachTree will import some of the file types options. It may just need a bit of cleaning up.

You can also view graphs and charts on the go of your expense trends, which is a nice bonus. It’s nice to have a quick snapshot of how your expenses have fluctuated over a several month time period.

Overall, ProOnGo Expense is an extremely intuitive app and a great tool for users who don’t want to spend a ton to manage their expenses. If you’ve used this app or something similar, let us know your thoughts in the comments! Any features you’d like to see added?

Pros

• Several export formats supported (Excel, QB Pro, CSV, XML, & PayServ)
• Graphs show instant snapshots of report trends
• Reasonable prices for the amount of functionality offered

Cons

• Pricing model can be a bit tedious and confusing
• Credit card sync only supports AmEx
• No landscape mode on iPad version
• Syncing from device to device is manual, sometimes confusing

YouTube Link

If you are looking for a simple text editor with a clean, professional interface, PlainText might just be for you. Hog Bay Software has created a quaint little document app that goes out of it’s way to do simple editing. The main benefit this app has over the built-in Notes app is that you can define and create folders; the level of editing is the same.

The first thing you will notice about PlainText is its icon. It is the shape of a formatting mark on a typical word processor. Once you open Plain Text you see a list of documents on the left and the first available document open on the right. To begin typing, tap anywhere in the document to begin. If you want a full screen typing experience, there is a full screen icon in the lower right. Tap to make full screen, tap again to bring back the document list.

There are no formatting options in PlainText… it is just that, plain text. What does separate this app from say, the Notes app on iPad is the ability to add documents to folders. Tap the new folder icon and you can create as many folders as you would like. However, you should be aware that you can’t move a document from to a folder after the document it created; you must create the file in the folder you want. I am sure this will be an enhancement in an upcoming release.

The next question you are asking yourself is how do I get these notes to my iPhone, after all it’s a universal app. The easiest way to use Dropbox. You can set this up directly from Settings in the app and you are ready to rock. However, if you want to use another tool, try PadSync.

Overall I like the simple and great aesthetic nature of the application. There are just a couple of quibbles that are preventing it form stardom. One of the big ones for me is the inability to move files between folders. Perhaps it’s there and I am missing it, but I sure couldn’t find it. Additional features are planned (here is a list from the next beta as of this writing) and it has been submitted to the App Store. I would check the blog regularly for updates and suggestions.

[Free- iTunes Link]

Pros

• Free!
• Create folders
• Universal App

Cons

• Only syncs with DropBox (where is MobileMe?)
• Can use app PadSync http://ecamm.com/mac/padsync/ to get data from Mac to iPad
• Can’t move a document to an existing folder

Since Apple still hasn’t shipped a white iPhone 4 — much less a pink one — I decided try out a few, fun Incipio Ultra Light Feather Cases instead. Because really, why should I have to wait for style? They come in black, turquoise, metallic black, metallic white, pink, metallic orange, forest green, yellow green, metallic gray, coral, metallic purple, and bright purple (phew!), and are thin and unobtrusive enough you’ll barely notice the difference in your pocket or purse. They also come with a screen protector, so if you’re worried about scratches, they’ve got you covered.

Changing the color of my iPhone 4 to white or pink was as simple as snapping on the case. There are openings for all of your buttons and ports with the exception of the small micro sim slot opening on the side. I do not think this omission is a big deal. I have an officially unlocked iPhone 4 from Apple and it’s just something I rarely need to have access to in the first place.

Also noteworthy, the Incipio Ultra Light Feather Case should be compatible with most iPhone 4 chargers and sync cables. The wide cut around the 30-pin dock port meant everything from my slim Apple USB cable to my bulky car adapter worked just fine. I did have some problems with Apple’s own dock but that is to be expected as most Apple chargers are made to exacting measurements. (I did not have any trouble with the Seidio Inno Dock Jr. of course!)

Overall I liked the look and feel of the Incipio Ultra Light Feather Case, especially the matte finish which lessens the chance that I will drop it and damage my precious iPhone. Also, the case doesn’t come up over the iPhone screen which is one of my pet peeves. The white version is a little different, it feels more solid and less flexible, but that’s probably due to the more difficult nature of making a white product, something Apple no doubt understands!

So if, like me, you’re tired of waiting for a white iPhone (or any color iPhone really) give the Incipio Ultra Light Feather Case a try. It’s the perfect way to add a splash of fun and excitement to your iPhone 4.

The Case-Mate Walkabout Case for iPad is a great case if you’re looking for something low profile.  It’s also slim enough to slip into virtually any bag or briefcase.  The outside has more of a suede feel to it (despite it being tan leather) and doesn’t seem to collect dirt like some other lighter colored cases might.  So if you’re in the market for a new iPad case that has no bulk but provides decent protection, click on through for a hands-on video, review, and pics!

The first thing you’ll notice about this case is the feel. It’s definitely genuine leather, but it’s got a bit of a suede feel to it. I personally like it. I don’t feel like it’ll slip out of my hand. The inside of the case is smooth and the fit is just right. When sliding the iPad in the case, you don’t feel like you have to force it or that it’ll scratch the sides of the device. The closure is lined with magnets as well. There’s no buttons or clasps to worry about. The case will simply shut and stay that way. I attempted to hold the case upside down and shake the iPad a bit but the clasp never came undone. So if you’re worried about the iPad falling out, you won’t have to with this particular case.

I’ve been using this case for about 2 weeks now and I’ve had it in bags and sitting on random countertops and tables in the house. It doesn’t seem to collect dust or dirt. The case still looks brand new. One of my concerns with lighter colored cases is always that they will get dirty or dingy over time. So far, it’s stayed perfectly clean.

On a protection level, the Walkabout will typically protect the iPad from normal wear and tear. It’ll prevent from things in your bookbag or briefcase hitting the iPad or scratching it, but I wouldn’t go as far to say it would protect you from a serious drop. I’d still be concerned that dropping the iPad on a hard enough surface would still cause some damage (denting, cracking, etc..). It should protect you against moderate to mild drops but I wouldn’t expect it to be the equivalent of an Otterbox type case. This case seems to be more geared towards being trendy and sleek than protective.

So if you’re looking for something super-trendy and sleek, you can find the Case-Mate Walkabout case for iPad at our TiPb iPad accessory store.

Pros

• Low profile
• Magnet enclosures are extremely secure and easier to use than clasps or buttons
• Stays clean despite the lighter color
• Perfect amount of give – not too tight or too loose

Cons

• Won’t provide protection against serious drops
• It’s a little pricey for not providing optimum protection

iPod nano (2010), the sixth generation iPod nano, is a complete redesign from form factor to interface. Gone is the click-wheel, gone is the camera, gone is the video. What’s left is a beautiful, polished square running something that looks like iOS, complete with multitouch, gestures, and little nano apps. How does that compare to an iPod touch or iPhone? Read on after the break for our review.

Hardware

The 2010 iPod nano is cooler and sleeker, and definitely smaller than last year’s model — 46 percent smaller to be exact and 42 percent lighter. That works out to a tiny 1.48 inches (37.5 mm) high, 1.61 inches (40.9 mm) wide, 0.35 inch (8.78 mm) deep with the clip, and a weight of just 0.74 ounce (21.1 grams). That makes it extremely portable.

The nano also picks up the iPod shuffle’s clip. Located on the it’s easy to use and can be worn almost anywhere — believe me, I’ve tried!

You may have heard that it’s hip to be square and the nano proves it. The anodized aluminum outer shell comes in 7 different colors, silver, grey, yellow, green, blue, pink and red.

As for ports, the new nano has the same old 30 pin connector so you can use it with your computer, car, and any other iPod accessories that you may already have, and the standard 3.5mm headset jack.

There are also buttons, which are round and metal and similar to iPhone 4, including volume up and down and sleep/wake. Unfortunately there’s no home button like iPhone, something I’ll gripe about later.

The bright 1.54-inch display packs 240-by-240 pixel, 220ppi resolution. The multi touch screen allows you to tap to launch apps or make selections, drag apps around to re-arrange them, put two fingers down and twist to rotate the display, double tap (Zombieland ftw), and press-hold an icon to star/stop jiggly mode, or in the middle of the screen to go back to the main home page.

Apple rates the battery life at 24-hours for music with a fast change time of an hour and half to get to 80% and 3 hours to get to full.

And yes, no more video camera. The iPod touch stole it.

Software

Music is where the iPod nano is at. You can select your music from a multitude of different icons (I can’t really call them apps, they just launch different views of the iPod app). Songs, albums, artists, playlists, genres, and composers are all here.

The Genius app will take music you already like and choose other songs which you may find appealing. You use the genius application in iTunes and then just sync over any songs you want.

The FM radio works very well on the iPod nano, just plug in your earphones (they double as the antenna) and let the tuner do the rest. You also have the ability to live pause your music, this way you can listen to a song on the radio and then pause the song and come back to the song just where you left off.

If you like to run with your iPod Nano then the pedometer is perfect. It will track how many steps you have taken, how many calories you have burned, and any when you have reached your target goal. If you use Nike+, it’s there and waiting for you as well.

One of my favorite applications is the clock, which looks like a snazzy watch. You can choose to have the black or white watch background, I think the black looks nicer.

Apple continues to lead the pack when it comes to accessibility and he new nano is no different. You can turn on the VoiceOver feature which will then give you a description of what is under your finger.

There’s a photo app so you can swipe through any photographs you’ve synced over, but there’s no video player any more. I synced over a few video podcasts just to see what would happen and all I got was the audio. Maybe Apple doesn’t think people want to watch video on a 1.5-inch square, or maybe Apple just wants them to buy an iPod touch instead.

Conclusion

The 2010 iPod nano is small and lightweight and offers great battery life. The clip also makes it wearable for athletes, hipsters, and pretty much anyone on the go.

It’s easy to use and immediately familiar to anyone coming from an iOS device like iPod touch or iPhone. That said, the “tap and hold center” as home button is not very intuitive and sometimes conflicts with other interface actions. Could they have fit in a real, physical home button, or somehow added the functionality to the sleep/wake button? As it is, it’s a klutzy deviation from iOS and not for the better.

It’s also an iPod in the more traditional sense, not in the iPod touch sense. You’re limited to music, music, music, and a few nano apps (napps?). There’s no more video playback, and there’s not even a contact book or calculator. (Sure it would have been hard at that size, but if anyone could do it it’s Apple).

Taken as a whole, which is how Apple products simply must be taken, the iPod nano (2010) won’t appeal to those who can afford a iPhone or a iPod touch but might just be the best nano yet for those who want to bring something lightweight with them on the go.

I spent the past week using the PixelSkin Case for iPhone 4. Speck has a lot of great accessory lines from iPhone cases and skins to everything iPad and iPod as well, but I was a little hesitant at first as I’m not a fan of cases that add bulk and most pattern or etched cases do.  I was pleasantly surprised with this one and still have it on my iPhone. 

I’ve never been a huge fan of textured cases, but this one is deceiving. It isn’t really “textured”. Most of the square pattern you see is actually smooth on the outside of the case. It feels nice in the hand and slides in and out of pockets incredibly easily. Part of the reason I have always preferred smooth cases is I’m not a purse girl by any means. I prefer keeping my phone in my pocket. I carry about a messenger type bag with me for all intensive “purse purposes”. Throwing my phone in there, it would take me 20 minutes to find it when I needed it. Pockets are quicker and easier. So I’ve always looked for cases that don’t fight me when trying to slip it back into my pocket. Finding smooth, thin cases and not sacrificing any protection is always a tough battle.

This particular case not only feels good in the hand, but protects the sides of the phone and allows the screen to be a bit recessed without adding extra bulk. I’m the master at dropping my phone and I dropped it once with this case on it. It landed face down on hard wood floor with no damage to be seen. Since the case comes up over the edges, it helps for those times when you’d like to set your phone screen down, or Jobs forbid it, you’re like me and just have the clumsy gene. Either way – if you’re looking for a case that provides a decent amount of protection without adding “too” much bulk, check out the Speck PixelSkin case for iPhone 4 in the TiPb Accessory Store. It’s available in purple, pink, and black. If you already have it, let us know your thoughts on it in the comments as well! Still not the case for you, browse the rest of our case selection in the TiPb iPhone 4 Accessory Store!

Pros

• Doesn’t collect dust or pocket lint

• Extremely smooth despite being silicone

• Rugged look but smooth in your hand

• Doesn’t add bulk

• Doesn’t get dirty quickly like many silicone-based cases

Cons

• Stretches out a bit after being taken on and off

• Some 3rd party chargers and accessories may not fit into the dock connector with the skin on

This week I am looking at the Case-Mate Hybrid Tough case for iPad. This is actually a good case considering its goal; solid protection while staying reasonably thin.

The case is unique in that it has two layers. The first layer is a silicone skin that covers the iPad and all of its buttons. It also covers the lip on top of the glass screen. The other layer is a hard plastic shell that snaps on place on the bottom of the iPad, on top of the silicone. The concept here is that it provides dust free protection while giving you a little cushion for bumps. The combination of the bottom shell and silicone protect the bottom and sides of iPad.

The only exposed areas (besides the glass, of course) are the speaker and 30-pin connector on the bottom and the rotation lock switch on the right side of iPad. There is minimal but reasonable thickness added to the device between the two layers, but I feel it is acceptable based on what the case is doing to protect your investment.

The only real issue I had with this case was removing it when I needed to attach an accessory like the dock or the keyboard dock. You have to remove it very carefully as the case is meant to fit very, very securely in order t prevent any lint build up. If you never have a need to attach iPad to these types of accessories, then there is no concern.

The Case-Mate Hybrid Tough case for iPad is what it says in the name; two layers of protective goodness and tough. It’s available now for $47.95 from the TiPb iPad accessory store.

Pros

• Solid protection
• Access to all ports
• Dust-proof protection of the iPad controls
• Two available colors- gray and lime green

Cons

• Can be a challenge to remove
• Does not fit in Apple Dock
• Top and bottom of case are still “loose”

If you don’t like the mostly drab black and bumpers and cases Apple is giving away, the Talon Hard Shell Case for iPhone 4 is a great way to add a little color and fun for under $10. It isn’t anything fancy — you can’t throw your phone into a wall and expect it not to break (I would never try that anyways) — but when it comes down to a nice colorful case without shelling out over $30, this is it.

Read on for more detail!

The overall appearance of the Talon Hard Case is pretty slick. It’s clean and simple. It doesn’t stick to the inside of your pocket or add too much bulk to your phone. But on the flip side, since it doesn’t have much grip, it may make you more susceptible to drop your phone or for it to simply slip out of your hand. Mine almost did at work the other day. This is where a compromise between silicon and hard cases are nice. They add grip but not enough to where you have to have someone help you rip your phone from the inside of your pocket.

Another nice thing about the Talon Hard Case is the fact that it comes completely around the top of the phone (refer to pictures). I like this because if you set your phone face down, or Steve Jobs forbid it, drop your phone face down, it’s less likely you’ll do damage. Just setting it down, you’ll be just fine.  This case also allows easy access to all ports and controls on the phone without a fuss, which is nice.  I know some cases are a little too thick or narrow and I’ve had a few where when I’d go to charge my phone, the charger would fall out easily because it wouldn’t go in all the way.  This isn’t the case with the Talon, the charger fits in the port nicely.

The only thing I’ve noticed about this case that I really don’t care for is how difficult it is to pull it off. The easiest way I’ve found was to put wedge a fingernail in between the top left corner of the case, once you get that loose, work your finger carefully to the right on the top of the phone, then you should be able to pull it off. I always have a tendency to do this over a bed or soft surface so if your phone comes flying out of the case, you don’t damage it. I made the mistake of removing a Speck hard shell case over our granite kitchen floor once. I was extremely lucky my trusty 3GS sustained no damage when it tumbled from the case, but I can’t say the same about my heart, as I’m pretty sure it stopped for a brief second.

Overall, if you’re waiting for the perfect case, or just can’t decide where to put your money at but want something to put your mind at ease, it’s a $10 bill well spent. Talon Hard Shell Case for iPhone 4 are available in 3 colors (based on stock and availability of course); pink, blue, black, and purple and you can pick them up now in the TiPb iPhone 4 accessory store.

If you’ve already picked this up, let us know your thoughts as well!

(As a side note, a day after writing this, I dropped my iPhone 4, with my Talon Hard Shell case on it. Not on carpet my friends, but on a granite kitchen floor.  I was attempting to let both the dogs out, had the little one in my hands while trying to grab the big dog’s collar, all while opening the door.  Well the iPhone 4 got dropped.  It made a pretty loud smash on the floor. I was terrified to take the case off.  Well, once I worked up the courage, I was pleased to see there was not even the tiniest blemish on my phone.  For $10, that’s a deal!)

Pros

• Creates an edge around the screen to protect the screen from damage
• Cheap — under $10!
• Comes in several colors
• Stays on well and doesn’t lose form
• Doesn’t add bulk and fits in a pocket easily
• Easy access to all ports and controls on the phone

Cons

• Unusually hard to get back off the phone
• A little “too” slippery, a little grip would have been nice

Your fingers glide effortlessly along the expansive, glass-but-not-quite-glass-feeling surface. The cursor flies from edge to edge. You pause, press down, feel and hear a satisfying click, and then glide on. A double swipe sends the gallery hurtling down until it stops under the weight of its own virtualized momentum. A double twist rotates a photo. A click in the right corner brings up the contextual menu, a click in the left selects copy. A triple touch grabs the window and moves it aside, a quadruple swipe switches you to email and then another right click, another left, and the photo is pasted into the message. Your fingers pull clear of the Apple Magic Trackpad and you smile. Computing is fun again.

Apple went all-in on multitouch for the iOS-based iPhone, iPod touch, and now iPad, and they’ve been slowly extending that back to their Mac platform as well, first with MacBook trackpads, then the Magic Mouse, and now the Magic Pad.

“Wait, this is an iPhone and iPad blog, why are you talking about a Mac peripheral?” Because. That’s why. iOS comes from Mac OS and if Apple has shown us anything over the years it’s that they’re the best in the business at leveraging advances back and forth between the two. With rumors of Apple TV going iOS and my persistent fantasy that Apple will replace DashBoard and Front Row with an iOS layer, what they do with multitouch for Mac is definitely something I want to keep an eye on. Two actually, as often as I can spare them. So if this isn’t something you’re personally interested in, no worries, hit up the next post. If it is, if you think like I do that nothing Apple releases exists in a vacuum, then hang on to your pinches and swipes; the review starts after the break.

Unboxed. Literally.

Magic Trackpad doesn’t come in a fancy glass container like its magic mouse cousin. It comes in a box akin to what Apple uses for their software packages. The front shows the Magic Trackpad itself, the back describes the multitouch gestures you can do with it. Inside is the same as out, you get the trackpad and a the plain paper pamphlet that tells you about it. Yes, it includes batteries, and they’re already installed.

Hardware

Clearly designed to sit side by side with the Apple Aluminum Keyboard — especially the newer, numeric-keypad-less version — the Magic Trackpad has the same look, the same angulation, the same round battery housing. “Look” being the key word because the surface of the Magic Trackpad isn’t aluminum at all, it’s glass like the MacBook Trackpad. It’s mixed and coated — according to what Apple has previously said about said MacBook Trackpad — to provide just the perfect feel and friction. That’s hyperbole, of course, and I find both to be usable enough if strangely desensitizing over time. Perhaps that’s just the result of to much Stoneloops on the iPhone, however…

What’s interesting is that Magic Trackpad feels cooler than my MacBook Pro trackpad, no doubt because it’s not sitting on top of a furnace-hot Intel chipset.

As with most things Apple, the fit and finish is spectacular. Every edge is clean and crisp, every line straight and every curve precise. The power button on the right clicks perfectly, the battery door on the left screws smoothly and securely.

And yes, the little rubber feet are the buttons. Push down on the Magic Trackpad and just like the MacBook trackpad (and the BlackBerry Storm, of course), you get an audible, tangible, click.

So it looks great, it feels great, but how does it work?

Setup

Setup is simple. You need the latest version of Mac OS X, 10.6.4, and the Magic Trackpad software update if you don’t have it already (MacBook and MacBook Pro users might — so don’t worry if you don’t see it available). Once you have those, just hit “Bluetooth set up device”, detect the Magic Trackpad, and it just works.

Preferences

If you’re familiar with current generation MacBook trackpad preferences, then you’ll feel right at home with the Magic Trackpad. If not, Apple makes it very easy. Go to Settings, chose Trackpad, and you’ll be presented with a series of speed sliders, feature checkboxes, and movie to show you what those features do.

Tracking speed, double-click speed, and scrolling speed can all be adjusted from slow to fast. Between work and home, desktop and laptop, I use enough machines that I’ve just found it simpler to stick with the defaults. They work fine to me. If you like to tweak, though, you have the option.

One finger gestures include tap to click, dragging, drag lock, and secondary click (assignable to either bottom right or bottom left corner). Two fingers let you scroll (with inertia — I heart inertia), rotate, pinch to open and close, screen zoom (with toggle key, move preferences, and image smoothing checkbox), and secondary click. Three fingers let you swipe to navigate (think going from one picture to another in Photos) or dragging (moving windows around). Four fingers let you swipe up/down for Exposé and left/right to tab-switch between apps.

##Usage

I’ve been using an iPhone and Macbook since 2007, I currently use a 2009 Magic Mouse and a 2010 iPad and MacBook Pro. I spend 12 to 18 hours a day using some form of Apple multitouch. So, needless to say, I had zero learning curve with the Magic Trackpad. (I’m using it to write this review, right now). That’s one of the huge advantages you get if you’ve sold your soul to Apple hardware — they’ve brought you along, trained you, and made you accustomed to their technology step-by-step, year after year.

I tried to capture the feeling of using Magic Trackpad at the beginning of the review. If I grant that I’m an anomaly, a freak, or a fanboy, however, then let me break it down into the tangibles.

The Bluetooth connection is good. I’ve experienced no lag, no loss of signal, no interruption in interactivity. The throw is excellent. A swipe from side to side sends the cursor flying from edge to edge. Gestures are quick and precise. I can tell nary a difference between my MacBook Pro’s built-in trackpad and this Bluetooth one.

The gestures, while not intuitive, work well once you get used to them. If you have an iPhone but have never used a MacBook trackpad, it will be mixed bag of hurt. Some things are similar and others different. That creates a level of mental overhead you don’t experience with the very different mouse. One finger will move you around but not select or swipe. Two fingers will scroll (like the iPhone does in frames) but everywhere. Three and four fingers you’ll just have to learn.

In my Magic Mouse review I complained Apple left a lot of gestures out. Obviously, those gestures are all here for Magic Trackpad.

Rechargeable-ish

Apple is also selling a re-charger along with a pack of 6 NiCad batteries that you can use with Magic Trackpad, Magic Mouse, Apple Aluminum Keyboard, or pretty much anything else that takes AAs.

That’s great. I’d still like a real, rechargeable peripheral from Apple. Shove a LiOn battery inside and have the door open into a micro USB port and let me plug it in when I need and want to. That way if the battery goes dead in the middle of podcast, I’m not scrambling, I’m just plugging it in like an old fashioned peripheral.

Magic Pad vs. iOS apps, Magic Mouse, and Wacom

Does it invalidate iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad trackpad apps? Not at $69. If you already have one of those devices, and one of the trackpad simulating apps, as long as you don’t find it too cumbersome or battery draining to keep launching and using the app, you’d be trading functionality and flexibility, convergence and coolness for the convenience and independence of a dedicated device.

Does is supersede the Magic Mouse? For anyone but die-hard mousers, for anyone who doesn’t need to grip and move a physical object around, yes it does. It requires less desk space and offers more gesture support. While I was initially worried, trained perhaps by iPhone fingers, that there was no way the Magic Trackpad could be as precise, as pixel perfect, I haven’t had the slightest problem so far. (And I live in Photoshop).

Should Wacom be afraid? Yes and no. While newer Wacom devices offer multitouch support their history and tradition is in pen-based, sensitivity-based, angle-based input. If you need that pen, if you need to produce that kind of art or design, you need to stay with Wacom, much as if you need the feel of that mouse you need to stay with the mouse. If iPhone and iPad have made your fingers do the working, however, then you can safely say goodbye to Wacom and hello to Magic Trackpad. (Bamboo touch users, you have a choice — Apple matches look and feel, Wacom offers a stylistic alternative).

Conclusion

Magic Trackpad has just launched. I’m really, truly loving it so far but like any launch-timed review I’ve only used it for a short time. For now, it’s replacing my Magic Mouse and it’s replacing my iOS apps for controlling my Mac from the couch. I think it’s going to stay that way but I’ll come back after a week, and again after a month and update to let you know.

For now Apple has done with Magic Trackpad what Apple does best — pushed technology further and faster by wrapping it up in gorgeous form and simple-enough function.

Ngmoco has just brought out the ultimate game/tech-demo (to show your friends) for the iPhone 4 – Eliminate GunRange. It’s a virtual gun range game where you use real weapons to shoot targets. The concept is not entirely engrossing as there are plenty of other top-notch shooting games out there (ngmoco’s own Eliminate comes to mind). What makes this game fun and special is that it is the first game to take full use of the new iPhone 4 gyroscope. How does it work? Continue reading to find out!

The game starts out simple enough; you are presented with a single weapon, an M60. There are numerous other weapons to choose from, but you have to score well to unlock additional weapons with credits. After you select your weapon, you then can begin the ” Challenges” for your selected weapon. When the level begins you have a pre- determined set of targets to destroy. That is where the fun begins.

The enjoyment factor of GunRange does not stem from the fact that you are destroying targets, it comes form the amazing control offered by the iPhone 4 gyroscope. It literally “feels” like you are holding the weapon in your hands and where ever you aim your iPhone, the cursor hovers over the target. This level of control is unprecedented in previous iPhone efforts till now. It is simply a tease of what is to come.

What could be hum-drum central, ngmoco has attempted to make levels as interesting as possible, however there are only three ranges. For example, the first level is a basic shooting range. As you progress you being to shoot targets outside in a different locale. What makes the level and challenge enticing is that targets appear “off screen” and you have to use the gyroscope to quickly turn left and right. Speaking of turning left and right, you don’t have to rotate your whole body like Steve Jobs did in his WWDC 2010 keynote. Rather, I was able to successfully turn by simply lowering one side or the other to turn. This is also effective in racing games too, I have found.

For $.99 this is an easy pick up title. Will it keep you engaged for months to come, unlikely. But is it fun and cool to show off? Definitely.

[$0.99- iTunes Link]

Pros

• Awesome use of the iPhone 4 gyroscope Graphics are sharp and look good on the retina display
• Multiple guns and shooting ranges

Cons

• A bit repetitive
• Only three gun ranges, more variety would have been nice

Yes, we’re really reviewing the iPhone 3GS 8GB, Apple’s other huge smartphone release for 2010. It went on sale the same day as iPhone 4, in many more countries around the world than iPhone 4 did, and importantly — in the US it’s now $99 on AT&T contract.

Let that sink in for a moment. A couple weeks ago iPhone 3GS was still one of the best smartphones on the market. Since making it’s debut in June 2009 (when we reviewed the original), it’s stood the test of time against the Palm Pre, BlackBerry Storm 2, Motorola Droid, Google Nexus One, Palm Pre Plus, HTC Droid Incredible, and Evo 4G. Sure, other phones began pulling ahead in terms of raw specs and feature sets, but iPhone 3GS maintained its edge through a combination of overall elegance, usability, and ecosystem.

The only other thing that’s changed between then and now — aside from the price drop and reduction of storage that came with it is — the arrival of iPhone 4.

For many people who want an iPhone, iPhone 4 will be the easy choice. But just like last year when Apple dropped the iPhone 3G to $99, it’s not the only choice.

Total cost of ownership (TCO — what you pay including the phone and the carrier contract) be damned, some people want a budget smartphone. Some people want to walk into the store, drop not a penny more than $99, and walk out with an iPhone. This year, those people can do just that and what they’re leaving with is not only an iPhone 3GS, but an iPhone 3GS running iOS 4.

And that’s worth a review.

UPDATE: As of October, 2011, the iPhone 3GS 8GB is now free on contract.

iPhone 3GS hardware

In almost every way the 2010 iPhone 3GS is identical to the original 2009 iPhone 3GS. The only difference is that, while the original iPhone 3GS came in 16GB and 32GB, and in black and white models, the 2010 iPhone 3GS comes only in 8GB and only in black. (And it no longer indicates the size on the back of the device).

We did a complete iPhone 3GS hardware review when it debuted last year. Regular readers can skip ahead right now. New readers, here are the basics.

Screen

iPhone 3GS has an oleophobic coating that won’t make it harder to smudge your screen but will make it easier to wipe those smudges off. At 480×320 it’s not as big as some of the new Android phones. Likewise, it’s not as sharp as the quadruple density Retina Display on iPhone 4, but it’s still plenty sharp enough to run those hundreds of thousands of apps in the iTunes App Store and browse the countless pages of the Internet on Safari.

Performance

A snappy ARM Cortex A8 CPU and PowerVR SGX GPU power iPhone 3GS. This is essentially the same guts as iPhone 4 but not wrapped up in Apple’s special speed-boosting, power-sipping A4 system-on-a-chip.

What that means is performance is still very good. It’s not quite as fluid as the latest, greatest iPhone, and it doesn’t get quite as much battery life, but it’ll get you through a day of light to moderate use, and there are tons of battery packs and chargers on the market to handle even hardcore road warriors.

RAM is 256MB, half what’s in iPhone 4, but aside from the number of web pages and apps it can keep in memory at one time, you’d be hard pressed to tell the difference in daily use.

Where you might notice some speed differential is data. iPhone 3GS has the same HSPDA 7.2Mbps 3G downloads but no HSUPA highspeed upload, so sending your pics to friends or the cloud will take longer. Likewise, it has 802.11 B/G Wi-Fi but no N. If you have an N router, that means you don’t get to take advantage of the extra range and speeds.

Camera and video

A 3 megapixel camera with VGA-quality video recording tops out iPhone 3GS. That’s the bad news. No 5 megapixel, big, back-illuminated sensor with 720p HD recording like iPhone 4. The good news is, iPhone 3GS still takes better pictures and records better video than it has any right to.

For internet use, it’s just fine. For well-lit still, it’s downright serviceable. Tap-to-focus and the rest of the software has a lot to do with that, however.

Form factor

Outside iPhone 3GS still has the same look as last year as well, which was also the same look as 2008′s iPhone 3G, but if you’re in the market for a budget smartphone you’re no doubt aware that having the same form factor means you can use all the same accessories everyone has been making, buying, and reselling for the last 2 years. That’s a huge market and a cheap aftermarket right there.

As to the design itself, it might seem a tad dated compared to the double glass and stainless steel slab of iPhone 4, a little chrome around the edges and rounded along the back, but it’s still nicer looking than many more modern competitors. It’s got that Apple aesthetic while others are looking more like our old 1980s Hasbro toys but with little of the transforming fun.

It still feels solid, it still feels slippery. It’s still got just the right heft and just the right feel in the hand.

You get the idea. The hardware here isn’t the story. (Other than how much you get for $99.)

iOS 4 software

The 2009 iPhone 3GS shipped with iPhone 3.0 software. the 2010 iPhone 3GS ships with iOS 4. On the surface, that difference might just seem like a new name and a few new features, but as is often the case with Apple updates, it ends up being more than the sum of its parts.

We’ve done a massive iOS 4 walkthrough on the iPhone 3GS and aside from hardware specific features like FaceTime, Retina Display, and gyroscope support, the bottom line is iPhone 3GS users are getting the same software that makes iPhone 4 great.

Again, frequent readers can skip ahead. New readers, here are your highlights.

Everything you need to know about iOS 4 on iPhone 3GS in 10 minutes

YouTube link

Multitasking

Multitasking is the big new feature here. Apps have to add support for it, but when they do you get fast app switching so you can leave a game, answer an SMS, then go back and keep playing right where you left off. You get task completion so you can start uploading your pictures to Facebook or Flickr, go check your Twitter feed, and they’ll just keep going while you’re gone. You get background audio to listen to Pandora while you surf the web, background location to get TomTom directions while you take a call, and background VoIp to answer a Skype-like call even when you’re not in the app. You get local notifications for alarms. And you get widget-like controls for orientation lock and background audio playback.

It’s not full on desktop class multitasking, but it’s a good compromise between what most users want to do, and preserving battery life and performance while doing it.

Folders

Folders let you organize your apps into groups of up to twelve. That means app fanatics are no longer constrained by the 180 available slots on the 11 home screens. 2160 is now the limit. Drag and drop folder creation and addition and smart folder naming (using App Store categories as the foundation), make it super simple to use, even if it will ultimately prove too simplistic for power users.

Apple will probably have to abandon their app launcher-centric interface eventually, but they’re doing a good job preserving user orientation and context, and expanding it step by step in the meantime.

Wallpaper

iOS 4 takes a baby step towards customization with separate wallpapers that can be set for either the lock screen, home screen, or both. Yes, you can finally have your iPhone background, your way. (Or Apple’s way if you prefer, they include a bunch of new wallpapers that look good without clashing with the icons you’ll invariably have on top of them.)

Mail

Multiple ActiveSync accounts let you have your work Exchange and your home Google accounts pushed effortlessly to you at the same time. It just works.

A unified inbox lets you look at all your new mail, all at once, if you so choose. Threaded messaging lets you keep track of an entire conversation, even if its possible to lose track of where what message is in what conversation at the same time.

And more…

Expanded data detectors that recognize package tracking numbers, spell check and correct, Bluetooth keyboard support, Spotlight search now includes Google and Wikipedia, tap-to-focus for video recording, search suggestions and increased HTML5 support in Safari, and the list goes on and on.

And Apple’s not stopping. Coming later this year, Game Center is supposed to be Xbox Live! for iOS with leader boards, achievements, and a social network tying you together with all your friends.

Most importantly, iOS 4 on iPhone 3GS performs well. We’ve had almost no lag, almost no freeze. Everything from transitions to typing, app launch to game performance has been smooth and snappy.

It may not seem like it if it’s your first iOS device, or once you get used to iOS 4, but if you ever switch back to iPhone 3.0, you quickly appreciate just how much of a “new phone” iOS 4 makes the iPhone 3GS.

Where the $99 iPhone 3GS fits

At $99 iPhone 3GS 8GB isn’t competing against other high-end smartphones. It’s not going up against whatever’s the best Android phone of the week or taking on BlackBerry‘s flagship in the Enterprise.

It’s competing against low end Windows Phones, BlackBerry Pearl and older Curves, past-their-prime Androids like Hero, some of which better serve niche requirements but none of which really match iPhone 3GS in terms of the whole package. Still capable hardware running iOS 4 is a tough combination to beat, especially at $99.

About the only other interesting phones at that price point are the currently deeply-discounted Palm Pre (Plus) and Palm Pixi (Plus). They’re pretty much last year’s hardware with this year’s OS, like iPhone 3GS, and they’re excellent products but they don’t have the ecosystem iPhone and iPod has. They don’t have iTunes media or the huge App Store. If you’re on Sprint or Verizon, they’re a great alternative. If you’re on AT&T, they’re a carefully considered choice.

(Note, we had a whole paragraph here about the value of iPhone 3GS vs. Micosoft’s new KIN platform at the budget price point, but Microsoft went and canceled it already. The only take away from that sometimes it pays to invest in a device and ecosystem you can reasonably expect to be around for a while.)

If you had an older iPhone, however, or you’ve been using an iPod touch or iPad and want to get in on the iPhone, a lot of the accessories (cables, headsets) and likely all the apps and media you’ve already bought will just work with iPhone 3GS. That’s a huge savings on ecosystem.

So, if AT&T is a good carrier for you, $99 for an iPhone 3GS is almost too good a deal to pass up. About the only thing you need to consider is that pesky total cost of ownership (TCO) we mentioned at the beginning. Unlike cheapy messenger phones, iPhone 3GS requires a real data plan. Even with AT&T’s new capped, tiered plans, a 2 year contract on both data and voice, with SMS and other options will run you a couple grand. $99 up front sounds great, but the difference between $99 iPhone 3GS and $199 or $299 iPhone 4 over those two years is tiny.

If the plan isn’t a problem but the up front cost really is, iPhone 3GS 8GB ($99) is half the price of iPhone 4 16GB ($199), and a third the cost of iPhone 4 32GB ($299).

If you want a second or third (or even fourth) phone for the family, if your tween wants to move up from the iPod touch, if you just want another iPhone as backup or for development, the up front savings could well be worth it.

One more thing…

You can also get the iPhone 3GS 8GB SIM-free and unlocked directly from Apple around the world, even in countries where iPhone 4 won’t be available until the end of July or September.

Since an officially unlocked iPhone can be updated or used without any of the concerns associated with a Jailbroken and unofficially unlocked iPhone, if the higher price (around US$600 but prices vary by region) doesn’t dissuade you, it’s great for travelers or for those who want to use an iPhone in areas where none is yet sold.

Conclusion

If you’re getting an iPhone and up-front cost isn’t an issue, get an iPhone 4. The small difference in price is more than made up for by the step up in hardware, and features like FaceTime. If you’re not convinced, read our iPhone 4 review and talk about it in our iPhone Forum before you decide.

If $99 is really the limit for you, iPhone 3GS with iOS 4 is an amazing budget smartphone, arguably the best on the market when you take hardware, software, and ecosystem together.

Reviewing iPhone 4 is a challenge. It has been hailed by Apple as the greatest leap forward since the original iPhone 2G and dismissed by critics as just another iterative rehash. iPhone 4 has a new look. Polished stainless steel bound by sleekly laminated layers of glass, it harkens back to the heydays of Leica and Braun and might just be the iPhone Apple has always dreamed of making. Yet having glass front and back and the antenna array banded along the side could end up being as much functional loss as it is form win.

iPhone 4 also ships with Apple’s latest software, iOS 4. It brings features such as multitasking and folders, unified inbox and threaded email, and FaceTime video calling. Each of these come with limitations however, that while making them nearly effortless for new users to pick up, ensure power users will retain a level of frustration with the platform.

Like every one of Apple’s iOS products before it, iPhone 4 is going to be as divisive and controversial as it is popular and passionately embraced. Some of you will be looking at it, iPhone 3GS, 3G, or even 2G still in hand, wondering if its worth the upgrade. Others may be looking across from Android or BlackBerry, webOS or Windows Phones, trying to figure out if its finally time to make the switch (or come back).

So is it? Read on as TiPb goes hands-on with Apple’s latest hardware and software to help you decide.

Addenda:

• Verizon iPhone Review
• White iPhone 4 review

iPhone 4 hardware

Where previous iPhones have become iconified as singular slabs, iPhone 4 takes it to the next level – flat, curved but with an edge, and — of course — obsessively thin.

That’s 0.37 inches (9.3 mm) thin for the spec fans among us, at 4.5 inches (115.2 mm) high and 2.31 inches (58.6 mm) wide and weighing in at the same 4.8 ounces (137 grams) as the iPhone 3GS. It looks flat out sexy and it feels fine to hold even if Apple has once again made no concessions towards grip — as we said it’s all stainless steel and glass.

Along the sides you’ll find the few, familiar buttons and ports — 3.5mm headset (still flush), noice-canceling mic, sleep/wake button, microSIM card slot (along the side now), speaker, 30-pin dock connector, phone mic, volume up and down buttons (separate now, not a rocker), and the ring/silent switch. On the front, below the screen (which we’ll get to in a moment) is the home button. Above the screen is the ear speaker and the new front-facing, VGA (640×480) camera. On the back is the new 5 megapixel still, 720p video camera and LED flash.

Retina Display

Beneath the front layer of that glass is what Apple is calling Retina Display, a ridiculously dense 960×640 screen resolution. That’s four times as many pixels packed into the same 3.5 inch (88.9 mm) diagonal space as the iPhone 3GS (and every previous iPhone). At 326 ppi (pixels per inch), it’s higher than the print quality of many color publications and while scientists will debate the exactitude of Apple’s branding to our eyes the only thing that matters is — no more pixels.

We’re not going to get into the debate about whether or not 326 ppi is a truly a retina-exceeding display — Georgia has covered that debate — but here’s an attempt to simulate the difference strictly for the purpose of this review.

We took similar screenshots with both the iPhone 3GS and the iPhone 4 and then scaled up the the iPhone 3GS to 200% using “nearest neighbor” to keep the edges from smoothing. On a 72/96 ppi computer screen the difference will look far more dramatic than it really is but for small details like the icons in a folder or tiny text on a web page, the difference is noticeable.

Much like Apple’s design trend has been to minimize the machine and leave only the display as a window into the web and apps, Retina Display takes that even further, it turns the display into a window. The grid is gone and you see only the content. It’s both subtle and profound and you might not notice the difference until the next time you see tiny text on a lesser display. iPhone 4 is simply more like looking at a glossy magazine or analog movie screen that piece of electronics.

Like with the recent iMac and the iPad, Apple is using LED with IPS, which are a couple of acronyms that net out to rich colors, deep blacks, and a very wide viewing angle. You can watch movies or read text even if you’re looking at it almost sideways. Most impressive.

Previous generations of iPhone held on to the 480×320 display while competing devices went to 800×480 (or 854×480 in the case of the newly announced Droid X), iPhone 4 leapfrogs to the top again. And by making the new 960×640 resolution precisely quadruple the old one, they’ve ensured legacy apps will look exactly the same as on an iPhone 3GS (no iPad style jaggies) and new apps specifically design for iPhone 4 will look significantly sharper.

It’s a huge step up from previous iPhones and from any other display currently on the market.

The downside to all that glass is that it could scratch, chip, or even break. Dieter’s iPhone 4 somehow suffered a hairline scratch on the first weekend. Since it’s glass on both sides, it also increases the odds that, if you drop it, glass will take the impact.

With the display now laminated to the screen, you’ll have to replace the whole assembly if that ever happens. Consider extra insurance or a case or body skin if you’re at all worried. However, the benefit of that lamination is that there is no space at all between the LCD and the outer glass, which makes the display look better and should completely eliminate dust appearing in that space.

We should also note there were initial reports of yellow splotches on some screens. This could be the result of the laminate glue not having had time to properly cure. Running the display on high brightness and waiting a couple days is supposed to render it clear. That seems to be the case but we’re going to wait a while before scratching it off our watch list.

Cameras

While the iPhone has always had a very popular camera, it would be polite to say it hasn’t always had a very high quality camera. The iPhone 3GS took a step forward with 3 megapixels, tap-to-focus, and much better auto white-balance and imaging software. It was good enough to outperform other camera phone with higher pixel counts but was starting to show its age as Nokia and Android hit the 8mp mark.

iPhone 4 shows that Apple is not only making an effort to keep up now, but is actively working to take their camera to another level.

Rather than chopping up their sensor even more to join the aforementioned megapixel race, Apple went with a more modest increase to 5mp but increased the size and quality of the sensor, and added back illumination at the same time. That means each pixel is bigger and better at absorbing light which translates into higher quality images, especially at low light. (And they even threw in an LED flash for good measure.)

Here are some photos taken by Dieter and Leanna.

• See more of Dieter’s photos
• See more of Leanna’s photos

It’s not perfect — whites are sometimes blown out, the 5x digital zoom is still a digital zoom, and it won’t match a high quality point-and-shoot, much less DSLR — but it’s still amongst the best cameras we’ve seen on a phone to date. That, combined with what seems like even better software and the convenience of convergence means many people will be leaving their point-and-shoot camera at home.

Another product that doesn’t look like it’s long for this world is the Flip Mino HD. iPhone 4′s 720p, 30fps video looks good enough, thanks to the same tap-to-focus and white-balancing software, that anything under a proper 1080p prosumer video camera can mostly be left at home. (Mostly because video recording drains battery and eats up storage, so if you’re planning to shoot a lot on the go you’ll need a way to recharge and to transfer old video off to make room for new.)

Here’s some video Leanna recorded (crushed by YouTube compression, of course, but hit the 720p button for best-we-can-get quality).

And here’s some in low-light with the LED. (It can be turned on and left on for video work).

iPhone 4 also features a front-facing camera. It is considerably smaller than the beast of a lens on the rear, the front-facing camera is intended mainly for VGA quality self-portraits (hello new profile pics!) and video, like for Apple’s new FaceTime feature. (More on that below.)

Stainless steel antenna band

When the first leaked images of iPhone 4 appeared many people doubted they were the real-thing since the black gaps in the otherwise polished steel band around the outside looked so decidedly un-Apple. At WWDC 2010 Steve Jobs revealed that the band was actually the main structural element of the phone — and an external antenna array. The black gaps were the separations between the Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, and GPS antenna and the GSM/UTMS cellular radio antenna.

While Apple often says great form is functional, seldom do they let functionality trump form to this extent, so we figured it must be important. And it is. Many people report better reception with the iPhone 4… unless they touch it on the lower left side, making a connection between two of those antennas with their hand.

It’s not happening to everyone (at TiPb we’re split — for example Dieter can reproduce it at will, Jeremy doesn’t have it at all) and we don’t yet know how widespread it is or whether it can be fixed by a software update, but — for a lot of people if you hold iPhone four in your left hand or otherwise create a connection between the two antennas on the left side, the network (voice and/or data) can drop from full bars to none almost immediately.

Areas with strong signal, especially outside, seem to have fewer problems than areas with weak signals, especially inside. Apple has, incomprehensibly, suggested users learn to “hold different” or use a case that insulates the area.

Suffice it to say those aren’t acceptable answers, so we’ll just have to wait and see what happens next.

Call quality overall is quite good. If you’re not bridging those antennas, reception is markedly better than previous iPhones and dropped calls slightly better.

Apple lists the radios as UMTS/HSDPA/HSUPA (850, 900, 1900, 2100 MHz), GSM/EDGE (850, 900, 1800, 1900 MHz), 802.11b/g/n Wi-Fi (802.11n 2.4GHz only), and Bluetooth 2.1 + EDR wireless technology.

Pentaband cellular is a great addition. Unfortunately, it doesn’t include T-Mobile US 3G, but the extra bands will certainly be appreciated by networks in the Asia-Pacific areas that use them.

Likewise, fast, far reaching 802.11n is an appreciable upgrade somewhat crippled by being restricted to the more congested 2.4GHz frequency. Most 802.11n routers give the roomier 5GHz range as an option. It’s too bad Apple didn’t do the same.

Speaker and mics

For a company whose heritage is the iPod, the iPhone has never blown us away with its speakers. They’ve lacked loudness to the degree that some users took needles to previous models in desperate attempt to get the sound out. (We didn’t recommend it, still don’t.)

We’re glad to report that iPhone 4 sounds better and louder to us. The speaker phone, while still not booming, is far more usable than any of its predecessors. The ear speaker also seems louder and make stereo gaming a noticeably more enjoyable experience.

It is worth noting that the speaker is still recessed on the bottom and so holding the iPhone in a natural position for games – which is to say horizontally – can cause the speaker to be almost entirely muffled by your hand.

Noise cancellation is very, very impressive, the best we’ve heard on any phone or Bluetooth headset. Even with very loud music in the background, callers report that they can hear us loud and clear.

Unfortunately, performance with Bluetooth headsets and Bluetooth car stereos lags behind other phones — sound quality is slightly robotic.

Internals

Apple has considerably beefed up iPhone 4′s internal specs, most notably by including the ARM Cortex A8 and PowerVR SGX-based Apple A4 system-on-a-chip that debuted in the iPad. It’s unclear whether or not the iPhone 4′s A4 is clocked at the same 1GHz as the iPad’s, whether its under-clocked to save on power and reduce thermal output, or whether it can dynamically adjust its speed to strike a balance between demands and constraints.

Apple’s not saying and for most of us none of that really matters. It feels snappy and transitions with a silky smoothness that trumps the already impressive iPhone 3GS and gives the much larger iPad a run for its money — both in performance and battery life.

Using both the A4 and the smaller microSIM standard, Apple has made the battery 14% bigger and made some aggressive claims as to just how long and how hard you can push your iPhone 4: up to 7 hours talk time on 3G, 14 hours on 2G, and 300 hours on standby. Internet is rated at 6 hours on 3G and 10 hours on Wi-Fi. Video playback is said to match the iPad’s 10 hours (!) while audio reaches 40 hours.

We’ve only had the iPhone 4 in our power hungry hands for a couple of days now and battery life can fluctuate especially when you’re dealing with a new device. That said, in our decidedly unscientific tests it lasted longer than our iPhone 3GS and we’ll be putting it through its paces to see just how well it holds up over the days, weeks, and months ahead. (And we’ll update with our findings).

Something Apple didn’t mention but tear downs have subsequently and joyously revealed are 512MB of RAM. That’s double the iPhone 3GS and double the iPad, and something that should really pay off in terms of the new display and most importantly, the new multitasking.

Recent Android and Windows Phone devices have had 1GHz Snapdragon chips in them for a while now, and 512MB of RAM has become the new high-end standard. It’s nice to see Apple matching those on spec and it will be interesting to see what if any advantage composing their own Systen-on-a-Chip gives them moving forward.

There’s also a new sensor in the mix this year. A gyroscope — the first in a phone as far as we’re aware — hooks into the accelerometer and allows for incredibly precise 3-axis motion control and rotation around gravity. That translates into better games, better augmented reality.

Not a lot of apps are making use of the gyroscope yet but in the couple we tried it took the kinda-sorta feeling of the accelerometer and made it the yes-exactly feeling of real control.

Accessory compatibility

While iPhone 3G and iPhone 3GS shared the same casing, meaning accessory manufacturers had an incredible 2 year run using the same basic templates for their designs, iPhone 4 is a different beast.

If you have accessories from a previous iPhone, and those accessories were molded (typically cases, some chargers, and docks) chances are they won’t fit properly on or with iPhone 4. You’ll have to look into the new ones that are already coming to market.

If they’re designed to fit in the 30-pin Dock connector, iPhone 4 should pop up a warning if it thinks they aren’t compatible. The warning isn’t always a show-stopper — our car charger said it was incompatible but charged just fine — but it’s something to consider. If you’re uncertain, proceed with caution.

And if you’re wondering — no, Apple iPad camera kit isn’t currently supported by iPhone 4. It would sure be nice if Apple added that little bit of functionality.

The total package

Taken as a whole Apple has produced what can only be described as a stunningly beautiful piece of industrial design that may or may not be tragically flawed by what first seemed a very clever part of that design. An even more singular experience than previous iPhones, we’ll likewise have to wait and see just how much Apple’s penchant for the minimalism of glass and metal costs iPhone 4 when it comes to durability.

Software

iPhone 4 ships with iOS 4, the fourth — and freshly renamed — annual update to Apple’s mobile operating system. Aside from FaceTime and iPhone 4-specific functionality like LED flash control, Retina Display, and gyroscope support, we’ve documented the features extensively already in our iOS 4 walkthrough.

So we’re going to focus here not so much on the facts but on the feeling — what are the key new iOS 4 software features like to use on iPhone 4?

For comparative context, here’s what it looks like on iPhone 3GS.

YouTube link

UPDATE: Apple has now released iOS 4.1 for iPhone, see our walkthrough.

UPDATE 2: Apple has now released iOS 4.2 for iPhone, see our walkthrough.

FaceTime

Apple didn’t invent video calls to be sure. Nokia has been doing it for a while and HTC’s recently released, Android-powered Sprint Evo 4G does it by means of third party software like Qik. FaceTime, by contrast, is typically Apple in that it’s a first party, end-to-end solution. That makes it both easier to use than previous attempts but also far more limited.

You place a call or pick a contact, hit the FaceTime button, and you’re video calling… provided the other person in also on an iPhone 4 and on Wi-Fi. (Apple thinks they may get carrier support for cell data FaceTime next year.)

Frustratingly, if the person you want to FaceTime isn’t on an iPhone 4, isn’t on Wi-Fi, or just isn’t ready for you, FaceTime won’t indicate this in advance, it will just try to connect… and try to connect… until it fails.

When it works, though, it works great. Your own picture sits in the corner but can be moved with the flick of a finger, and a single tap can switch it from front-facing to rear-facing camera so the person you’re talking to can share not only the conversation, but the action.

If you want to put the call on hold, tap and hold the mute button. If you want to temporarily stop the video but keep the audio going, tap the home button to put FaceTim into the background.

Here’s Chad and Leanna trying it out. If you want to try it out as well and don’t have another iPhone 4 wielding, Wi-Fi connected friend handy, Apple has customer support specialists available to try it with you at 1-888-FACETIME.

Apple built FaceTime on open protocols like the H.264 video codec, AAC audio codec, SIP signaling protocol, STUN and ICE for NAT traversal, TURN for TCP/UDP data receipt, RTP and SRTP for audio and video packet delivery. Interestingly they’ve released their implementation back as an open protocol so that others can use it as well. Hopefully some, like Apple’s own iChat on Mac, and Skype on pretty much every platform will adopt it.

Yes, in the not-so-distant future we might just be able to pick up FaceTime on iPhone 4 and talk to our fellow editors at Android Central and Nokia Experts on their devices.

It remains to be seen if video calling can be made mainstream, but given their record lately, we won’t bet against Apple.

Multitasking

The iPhone has always multitasked and multitasked well, it’s just been limited to Apple’s own apps like iPod and Mail. They haven’t allowed 3rd party App Store apps to run in the background until now. Sort of.

We’ve written quite a bit already about iOS 4′s implementation of multitasking from a how-it-works perspective, and at WWDC we heard from many developers who sounded really impressed by it in theory. Now we’ve had a chance to feel it in action and… it’s a mixed bag.

It’s not as well visualized as Palm webOS’ Cards metaphor or as open as Windows Mobile 6.5′s run-until-you-get-killed system. It’s actually closer to but more limited than Android’s model. If you’re not hip to how Apple is providing background access — and why should an end user be? — some things working and others not could come off as confusing.

Here’s the gist — if an app is running and you hit the home button, it no longer quits but is allowed to register a thread to complete a task (like uploading a photo to YouTube) or leave a VoIp connection (like Skype), music stream (like Pandora), or location-based service (like TomTom or FourSquare). Apps can also register local notifications, like push notifications but without requiring an internet server to send them (so your clock could sleep but your alarm would still go off).

The rest of the app then saves its state and closes down to conserve resources like memory and battery power. Users can then double-tap the home button to get a new, fast app switcher UI to quickly move around, and when they come back to the original app they were running, it reloads the saved state and they can continue from exactly where they left off.

Developers, however, have to implement things like saved state and the background music API, and while Apple is listing iOS 4 compatible apps in the App Store, those simply indicate apps that have been tested and don’t crash under iOS 4, not apps that properly implement multitasking.

This means a user could have one app, like the excellent Real Racing, which does save state, and another app, like Eliminate: Gun Range, which currently supports Retina Display and the gyroscope but does not save state (at least in our tests), creating a confusing experience and the perception that iOS 4 multitasking is buggy at best and broken at worst.

Apple should really save the Awesome iOS 4 Apps badge for apps that awesomely implement iOS 4 features, not just pass the crash test.

The background API for streaming music is solid. We’ve streamed iTunes podcasts, switched to other streams, done hard reboots twice, and the stream has still picked up right where we left off. TomTom is currently the only big name supporting background location for turn-by-turn but we’ve seen beta versions of some of the others and they all worked well — clear directions even while out of the app or on a call, and quick resumption when back in the app. Skype is still looking into background support and since it took them 3 months to get 3G support out the door, we’re not holding our breath for a quick update. (Prove us wrong. Please.)

Beyond background VoIP, streaming music, and location, however, other useful background API aren’t currently supported. Time-line updates specifically is something Apple said they’re supporting via notifications rather than background. That means you’ll know if you get a new tweet, IM, or RSS article because of a badge, sound, or alert box, but the app will still have to load that new content when you re-launch it (unlike iPhone’s Mail app which gets your email in the background and has the subject and preview ready and waiting when you tap into it.)

Persistent internet connections for things like SSH tunnels and VNC sessions aren’t supported. You can complete tasks after you exit but they’ll have to reconnect when you go back to them later.

For the sake of communication junkies and network administrators both, here’s hoping Apple expands background support to include them in the future.

In terms of the fast-app switcher interface, this is the part that most of us will simply consider the new “multitasking” since it’s the most visible element. While again not as slick as Palm’s Cards (which, to be fair, is similar to Apple’s interface for switching pages in mobile Safari), it does stick closely to the overall app and dock-centric metaphor Apple’s been training us on since iOS 1.0.

A lot of work has been done to preserve our orientation. When you double click the home button the screen looks to split open and reveal the new interface “in the background”. Apps are sorted by most recent use, eliminating the previously annoying need to page through up to 11 home screen pages just to switch back and forth between two apps.

When you change apps via the multitasking UI, you get a new animation, like a carousel, that shows the new app coming in on top and pushing the old app into the background. (If you exit to the home screen first you get the traditional, iconic, fly-in/fly-out animation).

Since apps are supposed to save state now, and you come back right where you left off, the overall experience really is quick and clean — and perceptively multitasking.

The multitasking dock also has a few other features. You can force-quit an app here by going into jiggly mode and tapping the minus icon. If you swipe left on the multitasking UI you get a set of pseudo widget-like controls. The first locks orientation, a software version of the iPad’s hardware switch. Strangely, it’s portrait-only at the moment but for those who like to read in bed, half a solution is better than none. The next three controls are for streaming music — skip back/rewind, play/pause, and skip ahead/fast forward. The last icon is for the app that’s currently playing music, either iPod for local music, iTunes for streaming podcasts from the store, or Pandora, Slacker, etc. for internet radio.

Nifty as that is, there’s still no lock screen or home screen widgets to provide glance-able data (aside from Calendar, whose icon carries the current date — something it’s done since iPhone 1.0 but no other icon has been updated to do since).

Overall, iOS 4′s fast app switcher is familiar enough and contextual enough that the added complexity isn’t overwhelming. It feels like it works the way it should, just not quite yet the way the power users among us wish it would.

Ultimately, while it’s easy to nit, it’s hard to argue with Apple’s results here — there’s a system that does most of what we think multitasking should do with minimal impact on battery life or performance.

That’s a huge win.

Folders

You could previously store 180 apps on your iPhone. Thanks to iOS 4 you can now create an app “folder” that contains up to 12 other apps, bringing the theoretical total to 2160. The folder icon itself will display tiny versions of the apps inside it, which are surprisingly recognizable on iPhone 4′s Retina Display.

However, folder icons only show 9 app icons (3×3) out of twelve, meaning apps 10 through 12 are effectively hidden, destroying the entire purpose of icons. Then again, some folks are already saying 12 apps per folder isn’t enough so limiting it to 9 probably would have come with complaints as many if not more complaints.

Visually the folder UI is similar to the fast app switcher in that it splits the screen and “opens” up to reveal the apps contained inside (orientation and context).

You create or add to a folder by dragging one app icon onto another, you remove apps or folders by dragging apps out, and when no apps are left the folder automatically deletes itself.

Folders are named “intelligently” according to Apple, which means they check the app category and sub-category and try to match whichever is both most specific and most applicable to the group. “Social” would show up for Twitter, Facebook, and LinkedIn apps. A bunch of FPS would get “Action Games”, etc. Given most of us will group similar apps together, it usually works fairly well and when it doesn’t it’s easy to edit.

Again, it’s nothing like a hierarchical file system like you’d find in older PalmOS or Windows Phone devices, and it provides no functionality beyond simple grouping. For many of us, that’ll be enough.

Mail

There are two big changes to mail, support for multiple ActiveSync accounts (so you can push both your work Exchange and home Gmail/Google Sync at the same time), and unified inbox with threaded email view.

Multiple ActiveSync works well to the point that you don’t realize it’s there — just set it up and you’re good to go. Pushing MobileMe, Exchange, and Google Sync didn’t cause an appreciable hit on our battery life either.

The unified inbox and threaded email work well enough, though sometimes we had to dig through threads to find new mail. (That could have been the result of Google’s mail service performing very poorly in general during the period we were testing).

When multiple messages are in a thread a small gray square containing the number of messages is displayed beside a small gray arrow to the right hand side. Tapping a message takes you to the thread view, tapping it again shows you the message. This does mean Apple has doubled the amount of taps needed to get to an email, but if that bothers you, you can hop into Settings, Mail, Contacts, and Calendar, and flip the Organize by Thread toggle to “off”.

Not as well oriented or contextualized an interface as the fast app switcher or folders, it’s none-the-less one more tiny little step on Apple’s journey towards serious communications device.

Next steps will hopefully include adding the ability to mark (and mark all) as read/un-read, and flag/star messages.

iBooks and iMovie

Apple announced two apps alongside iPhone 4. The first was iBooks for iPhone, the second was iMovie for iPhone 4.

These aren’t built in, however, but made available via the iTunes App Store. (Which hopefully means Apple can update them at their own pace and not be forced to tie their updates to iOS releases like the built in apps — a considerably longer cycle).

Here’s Chad’s video on iBooks for iPhone 4.

Here’s Leanna’s video on iMovie for iPhone 4. For more, check out her iMovie for iPhone 4 hands-on.

iBooks is free and works on all iPhones and iPod touches. iMovie is $4.99 and currently only works on iPhone 4 with its faster processor and higher RAM.

Is that legacy or first-party fragmentation? We tend to define legacy as lack of support for older generation devices and fragmentation as lack of support for current generation devices (due to different hardware specs or operating system availabilities).

Things like the Retina Display being exactly 4x the size of previous displays, and API like CoreMotion and CoreLocation abstracting away the lack of gyroscopes and GPS on older devices, Apple is falling victim to legacy but doing a lot o avoid fragmentation.

We’ll see how long they can keep that up, and how widely they can spread iOS to devices like iPad before it becomes a problem to developers and users.

Hundreds of thousands of other apps

As we mentioned in the Retina Display section, existing iPhone apps and games will look the same on the iPhone 4 as they do on the iPhone 3GS and previous models. That means there’s already 225,000 apps and games (and likely more by the time we finish writing this) ready to go on your iPhone, a percentage of which are good and a number of which are great.

New apps and games that include x2 artwork will look four times as good. Those are growing in number daily and hopefully we’ll see others that start to work with the gyroscope and even FaceTime protocols.

Ally is posting roundups of some of our favorite iOS 4 and iPhone 4 games and apps as they go live in the App Store and Apple is maintaining a list of iOS 4 apps they find awesome [iTunes list].

WebOS is making strides in 3D gaming and the Android Market is growing by leaps and bounds. With App Stores in 100 countries, roughly 100 million broadly compatible iOS devices sold to date, and 1 billion paid out to developers, however, Apple maintains a strong lead when it comes to apps and games. That’s good for them, developers, and iPhone users — due to the large number of apps, there’s a better chance you’ll find the few that are great for you and your needs. That’s the advantage of popularity and scale.

Heading into its third year in operation, however, the problem of opaque and inconsistent App Store curation remains. Steve Jobs has said 95% of apps get approved in 7 days, and the 3 top reasons for rejection are apps that don’t do what they say they do, apps that crash on launch, and apps that use private API (that could break in the next OS update).

The price of exerting editorial control, though, is editorial responsibility. Jobs chose to point out app reviewers (and Apple) were just people, and they make mistakes, and can’t foresee everything in advance — like a rule against defamation conflicting with apps making fair parody of public figures. It’s not that Apple is making mistakes (they are), its not that Apple is learning and improving (they are), it’s that they continue to do so in a black box using editorial ambiguity to shield them from the responsibility mandated by their control.

Accessibility

We’re going to quote this from our iOS 4 walkthrough verbatim because it bears repeating. Apple really doesn’t get enough credit for the outstanding accessibility features they build into their OS, both desktop and mobile. iOS 4 continues to lead the industry. VoiceOver supports 21 languages to read out loud whatever your finger touches on the screen, and a Rotor gesture lets you temporarily change languages now on the fly.

Bluetooth support has been extended to more than 30 braille devices with tables for more than 25 languages.

Touch Typing lets you run your finger across the keyboard, hear the letter you’re currently over, and release your finger to type it.

The basic rotor has been made visible so sighted users can see it in action, and you can now add custom settings to move through content.

It’s outstanding. We hope other OS choose this as an area to focus their competitive innovations on, and we hope Apple keeps on improving it at the same time.

Maturing platform

Apple has gotten to the point with iOS where updates are increasingly about filling out the feature set, which is a good sign of the platforms growing maturity. They’ll have to be careful, however, that with things like fast app switching and folders they’re not increasing complexityor stretching their app launcher-centric UI model too far.

The line they’ve successfully walked in the past was to make simple, mainstream features obvious or easily discoverable — like tapping an icon or swiping a page. For more advanced or niche features Apple didn’t even explain them, just buried them in tech notes or left users to find out about them on sites such as TiPb — like taking a screenshot or force quitting apps.

Fast app switching and folders could fall into the same model, there for those who want to use them, ignorable for those who don’t. It’s closer to the line but we don’t think they’ve crossed it yet, at least not for most users.

Pricing and Availability

iPhone 4 became available in the US, France, Germany, the UK, and Japan on June 24, 2010. It’s scheduled to become available Australia, Austria, Belgium, Canada (!), Denmark, Finland, Hong Kong, Ireland, Italy, Luxembourg, Netherlands, Norway, New Zealand, Singapore, South Korea, Sweden, and Switzerland in July, though recent Apple website updates have replaced that with the more nebulous “soon”. All told, Apple plans to ship iPhone 4 to 88 countries this year, a fairly impressive international rollout.

True to form, Apple hasn’t reduced the price of the iPhone but gives you more for the same price as last year. Subsidized on AT&T, iPhone 4 will set you back $199 for the 16GB model and $299 for 32GB. ( iPhone 3GS has a new 8GB model and is now occupying the $99 spot).

Outside the US iPhone 4 is or will be available SIM-free (unlocked) if you’re willing to pay full price for it (full price varies by region but should be somewhere north of $600 for 16GB and $700 for 32GB).

iPhone comes in black and white (which this year includes a full white face-plate), but as of this writing the white model has been delayed, something Apple ascribes to a more difficult manufacturing processes.

Conclusion

Apple says iPhone 4 is the biggest update since the original iPhone. But it’s a very different market now. Back then the iPhone 2G was a wake up call to an arrogant, complacent establishment that had forgotten the innovation that created their industry. Now the giants have all awakened and new giants have joined them and it will be difficult for anyone to shake things up again the way Apple did in 2007. Apple included.

It’s not that Apple isn’t moving quickly any more, it’s that the initial acceleration is done and everyone else isn’t stationary around them any more — they’re racing just as fast.

Last year we said the iPhone 3GS was more of a step forward than a leap. This year they took a giant hop approaching a skip, and still in the right direction. There’s a lot we still don’t have, like Wi-Fi sync/sharing, and an elegant, non-interuptive notification system. But that list continues to grow shorter and shorter. (And hey, the iOS 5 sneak preview event is only 8 or so months away…)

An impressive new design, amazing new display, key features like multitasking, and an attempt to mainstream video calls, along with hundreds of other little improvements combine together to make this a substantial upgrade and clearly the best iPhone ever. (Given the success of previous iPhones, that’s no faint praise).

Our usual Smartphone Experts advice still holds true — pick your network first. If AT&T is the best carrier in your area it’s almost a no brainer. Unless you’re allergic to apples, this is the phone to get. Internationally, iPhone 4 will be on multiple carriers in most countries so the odds are good you’ll find it on your carrier of choice (and be able to get it SIM-free, unlocked directly from Apple). Then it comes down to device.

iPhone 4 is still limited in ways that frustrate power users, and may be flawed to the point of having serious issues (we’re waiting to see about that), so that’s something you’ll want to consider before buying.

If you currently have an iPhone it’s certainly more compelling an upgrade from the iPhone 3GS than the iPhone 3GS was from the iPhone 3G, and a great cross-grade for anyone on another platform whose willing to sacrifice control to gain usability. If you have an iPhone 3G or iPhone 2G, and you can afford the upgrade, do it. You’ll find the difference is night and day.

Phoenix Wright is Capcom’s latest game for the iPhone. It’s a port of a port (GameBoy to Nintendo DS to iOS) that still retains it’s fun factor through the years and is a great addition to any iOS gamer. The concept behind Phoenix Wright is simple; you are a new a attorney and you have taken on your first criminal case as a defense attorney for your best friend from high school, Larry Butz, and he is accused of murder!

The main game play takes place in the court room. Just like any court case, you are given evidence that you can reference at any time from the court record. And you WILL need to reference it as your clients future depends on it.

Your first case deals with Larry’s girlfriend’s murder. The witness pins Larry as the killer… but is he? This is where the fun begins. It is up to you to prove his innocence. In the courtroom you listen to the witness testimony and try to find holes in it based on the evidence you have in your possession. Regretfully, I can’t give away too much more without spoiling the story… There are additional levels though and each one gets more and more challenging, you even move out of the courtroom to gather evidence yourself.

As fun as the game is, the writing is geared towards a younger audience. Even though the subject matter is adult, it often uses “childish humor” to get points across at times. Though I shrug this off, it may bother some adult gamers, kids will love it. But I do admit, I chuckled from time to time. It is important to note that this game is not 3D but instead kind of like one of those old Choose Your Own Adventure books. The game is based primarily on reading and critical thinking skills and lends itself as a quick pick up and play game, but you will be spending some quality time with it. The good news is that you can save anytime and it usually places you right at the spot you were last at in the story.

In the end I found Phoenix Wright Ace Attorney very enjoyable and fun. Was it challenging? Yes. Was the crude humor at times? Yes. Will I play it again? Most definitely.

[$4.99- iTunes Link]

Pros

• Great story design
• Deep level of interaction
• Critical thinking skills are needed!

Cons

• Childish humor at times
• Simple graphics
• Can be too hard depending on audience

Dashboard for iPad is a Jailbreak app that will appeal to anyone who likes having widgets — like that little tiger puzzle — on their desktop computer.

Since Apple won’t allow widget apps on the official App Store, it’s Jailbreak only. You can get it free through Cydia and is a decent tweak for being in it’s beginning stages.  As of now, you’re stuck with whatever default widgets are at the bottom. Actually, a user in our comments section brought to my attention you CAN install new widgets through SSH.  If you plan to SSH, as always, approach with caution.  Not recommended for beginning jailbreakers! I’d assume we will see some start popping up in Cydia and Rock soon.  Video after the jump!

YouTube link

If you have been in search of a tough case that offers dual layer protection while keeping a slim profile the Case-Mate Hybrid Case for iPhone 3GS and iPhone 3G [TiPb Store Link - $29.95] may just be the case you have been looking for. For the full review follow us after the break!

Getting your iPhone snug and secure in the Hybrid case is a pretty simple process once you get the hang of it. It’s just a matter of two steps 1) put the silicon skin on, and 2) attach the outer hard shell. It may take you a few tries to get the volume rocker seated properly but once that is done you are good to go. My only real gripe with using the silicon skin is that it attracts dust so be prepared to clean it quite often if you are a neat freak like myself. At the end of the day, however, I am happy to trade a cleaning or two for top of the line protection.

The Case-Mate Hybrid feels absolutely great in the hand with it’s textured outer shell. It gives you just the right amount of grip to make sure your iPhone won’t easily go flying out of your hand. And in the worst-case scenario, if you happen to have one of those moments where a drop is out of your control, rest be assured your device is very well cushioned by the the 2 layers of protection the Hybrid is constructed of.

Along with two layers of protection Case-Mate also delivers one sweet look with the grey outer hard shell in combination with the black form-fitting soft silicone skin. The case wraps completely around the device leaving the screen, camera, headphone jack, vibrate switch, and 30-pin charging/sync port open. Meanwhile, the power button and volume buttons are covered and very well protected. It would have been nice if Case-Mate tossed in a cover for the 30-pin port but that is something I can get over with the over all quality of the case.

With a few minor annoyances aside, Case-Mate has done a fantastic job with this Hybrid Case for iPhone 3GS and iPhone 3G, which you can purchase the TiPb store for $29.95. It has a little something for everyone. If you are a hard shell case guy/gal or a silicon skin guy/gal this is perfect combination giving you the best of both worlds and you should definitely consider picking one up. As picky as I am with my cases, I promise you this one is a winner.

Here we have Babo Crash [$0.99 - iTunes Link], a fun new gem-switching game for the iPhone and iPod touch from Playbrains. In this game you have to match similar coloured gems with adjacent gems in sets of three or more, in a similar fashion to Bejeweled. The difference in Babo Crash is that if you match up more than 4 gems you unleash specialized hero gems. These hero gems, when matched, have specialized gem-busting powers.

Babo Crash has over 21 levels of gem smashing fun that gets faster as you go along. It also uses the OpenFeint system so you also have access to leaderboards and achievements online.

If you want to see screenshots of the game in action (and find out how you can get yourself a free promo code for the game!), stay with us after the break.

How can you get your hands on this game for free? Sweet and easy — just leave a comment below telling me why you would enjoy the game and you are entered. We’ll pick the winner at random (though saying something cute or funny never hurts!) Make sure to use a real e-address or we will not be able to contact you. Give-away starts now and ends Thursday, April 1st, 2010.

(Note: Unfortunately, Promo Codes only work in the US App Store, so if you don’t have access, you won’t be able to claim a prize.)

April 3rd is fast approaching so it’s only fitting that Apple is rumored to begin shipping iPad review units to select reviewers this Thursday (either that or they’ll be arriving Thursday, like many rumors it’s not exactly clear).

Also not clear is whether the lucky reviewers will receive Wi-Fi only, WiFi+3G, or both iPads, and exactly who is getting them (other than Mossberg from The Wall Street Journal and Pogue from The New York Times, of course).

We here at TiPb aren’t holding our collective breaths, but we have pre-ordered (and Rene’s making the long drive down to the US) so you’ll get to hear our thoughts soon enough.

Until then, however, let us know how many of you are waiting to hear some reviews before you bite the bullet and lay down your hard earned cash for an iPad?

[Via Silicon Alley Insider]

If you enjoy the outdoor activities such as hiking and you don’t feel like spending a lot of money on a heavy duty case then the rugged Nite Ize Sideways Clip Case for iPhone 3G and iPhone 3GS [$16.95 - TiPb Store Link] is definitely worth a look. For the full review follow us after the break!

The Nite Ize Sideways Clip Case is very well constructed with leather and ballistic nylon accented with weather-resistant hypalon. Your phone’s top flap secures firmly with velcro. Those of you who favor magnetic closing may come away disappointed, but if you are using this case for some sort of outdoor activity you are better off with velcro. On the back of the case you will find a super strong “flex-clip” that will fit belts, waistbands or straps up to 2 3/16” (5.5cm) and features an easy on, easy off design. To remove the case you simply pull it away from your hip and then pull up. With that being said, it will not accidentally come off during your hiking or mountain biking trip.

The interior of the Nite Ize is sure to protect your iPhone with its very soft lining. There is no need to worry about the actual case doing any damage to the phone like we’ve seen in the past with other cases. A really nice touch with the interior is a pocket to store your credit cards, identification, money or whatever else you can get to fit. This especially came in handy while going on some hikes where I did not want to carry my wallet. The interior pocket is a very welcomed addition to this style of case.

The more hiking I do with the Nite Ize Sideways Clip Case [TiPb Store Link - $16.95] the more I like it. Is this a case I would use on a daily basis? No. However, those of you who are looking for a well built, rugged case – give it a try. You should not come away disappointed.

The Griffin PowerJolt Reserve Backup Battery [$34.95 - TiPb Store Link] is one nifty little iPhone/iPod touch accessory, One of the biggest gripes people have with Apple’s iPhone is the lack of a removable battery. Sure you have some other battery charging options but if you don’t wish to be bothered carrying around cords or bulky cases then the PowerJolt Reserve just may be for you. Get the full rundown after the break!

I’ve been using the Griffin PowerJolt Reserve for iPhone & iPod for a little over a month now and it has turned into one of those things I need to carry around with me whenever I leave the house. You simply plug it into your vehicle’s cigarette lighter or 12 volt power outlet which then allows you to plug in your standard iPhone USB charging cord to charge your device while on the road.

A simple car charger alone would be on the boring side, what makes this accessory so special is that it also happens to have a built in rechargeable battery attached to it which you can carry with you in your pocket for backup power wherever you go. While it takes only a short time to fully charge, the backup battery will provide you with a 50% charge on your device. I was hoping to get a bit more but beggars can’t be choosers and I’ve learned that it’s usually all I need. Some more great features are as follows:

• Charges any iPhone and iPod touch.
• Charge your device the same time you are charging the backup battery.
• The battery connects to the charger magnetically so it is a breeze to attach and detach.

The Griffin PowerJolt Reserve Backup Battery for your iPhone or iPod touch [$34.95 - TiPb Store Link] is a must have accessory for any road warrior who needs that extra juice to make it through the day. With the PowerJolt you will never have to worry about battery life again and even better there will not be any need to carry your charger with you everywhere you go as it provides instant power on demand.

You just got your new iPhone for Christmas and you may have been wondering what case you should purchase to protect your new gift. I’m here to tell you if you are in the market for a slider case the Case-Mate Smooth for iPhone 3G and iPhone 3GS [TiPb Store Link - $27.95] is one to consider. For the full review follow me after the break!

Inside the package you obviously get the case itself but you also get a crystal clear screen protector along with a small microfiber cleaning cloth. I personally choose not to use them but it’s a nice gesture that I’m sure some of you can take advantage of them. The Case-Mate Smooth feels as it’s name describes – smooth. With it’s soft to the touch matte finish and with very minimal bulk added, it feels great in the hand. Even better is that offers a decent amount of grip without the sticky finish. You don’t have to worry about a ton of dust or having a hard time removing your iPhone from you pocket or purse.

Like a majority of other sliders the Case-Mate Smooth comes in two separate pieces that easily slide on your iPhone and lock securely together. The major difference I noticed was that this particular case is the installation, it is much easier to slide on and off than most other cases. In more or less words, it fits perfectly. It slides on easy enough that you do not have to worry about scratching the back of the phone or the chrome bezel.

On the negative front, some may feel the case simply does not cover enough area of the phone as the complete top of your phone is unprotected. I’m sure Case-Mate feels some would like access to the sim card tray but I am not one of them. All of the other ports you would expect to be accessible are. Things like the volume control, power button, and headphone jack are all can easily accessed.

Admittedly slider cases generally are my least favorite to use out of all of the various types on the market today. This really held true until I was given the chance to test out the Case-Mate Sooth case [TiPb Store Link] and then my opinion changed. Sure there are a few minor annoyances but it’s a very solid effort. All other slider case manufactures need to take note here follow Case-Mate’s lead.

The past few weeks I’ve been lucky enough to test out the latest and greatest Plantronics Discovery 975 Bluetooth headset for the iPhone [TiPb Store Link - $119.95]. I’ve tested a lot of Bluetooth headsets since I’ve been here at TiPb and while some have been all around impressive, others have left me scratching my head. Is the Discovery 975 a definite keeper, or just a dud?

See for yourself after the break!

First thing you need to do is pair your headset with your iPhone and with the Discovery 975 and Plantronics QuickPair technology, it’s a breeze. Simply turn on your iPhone’s Bluetooth feature and follow the commands of your earpiece. That’s all there is to it. And if you are like me and have more than one phone, activate the Multipoint technology to pair your earpiece with a second device, so you can stay connected with one headset for home and at the office.

Right off the bat if you look at Discovery 975 you can clearly see it is a little larger than most other recently released headsets, but looks can be deceiving as it weighs in at only .28 oz. It’s a very simple headset with just a single button along with answer call/end call/power button. This is a very good thing if you are a minimalist. A concern you may have, looking a the headset, is how well does it fit in your ear? While I will admit I am not a huge fan of headsets that do not come with an ear loop, the 975 does a decent job with the provided gel ear tips. Of course, this will vary completely depending on your ears and it may just be a deal breaker for some.

When it comes down to it, the Discovery 975 has a very clean design that just works.

Let’s get to the good stuff — call quality and battery life. I am happy to report with Plantronics Dual-mic AudioIQ² technology, the call quality is spectacular. The only time I had the slightest of call quality issues was when I was in a noisy area. Now that’s not to say the person on the other end of the call could not hear me but there was background noise that could be heard on the receiver’s end. So is the noise cancellation as good as a Jawbone? No, but it makes up for that in the other big area I mentioned — battery life.

Battery life is really where the Discovery shines. Plantronics claims you can get 5 hours of actual talk time and 168 hours of stand by time. Now that may seem very common amongst other headsets. Where the Discovery has the upper hand, however, is with the supplied carrying case that recharges the headset and triples talk and standby time. As far as I know this is the only current headset available on the market with such a case included with the device.

The Plantronics Discovery 975 is one of those headsets that either you will love or you will hate. The only concern I have is the lack of the ear loop as at times I had issues with the fit. Again, that will vary among users and you may love how it fits. Other that one negative, this is a excellent headset that is worth every penny and it can be purchased at TiPb’s very own store for $119.95.

Disclaimer: The TiPb iPhone Accessory Store provided the headset for this review.

Marware’s C.E.O. Premiere for iPhone 3G and iPhone 3GS. [$34.95 - TiPb Store Link] is a horizontal case with a belt clip and top flap. Either you love that style or you hate it, but there is no denying their popularity among iPhone owners. Marware has been making iPhone cases since day one and some pretty good ones at that. What did we think of the Marware C.E.O. Premiere?

Follow us after the break!

The Marware C.E.O Premiere has the classic horizontal holster case design that covers your iPhone in a textured, soft leather with quality stitching and an ultra-slim non-removable belt clip. The interior of the case is made up of microfiber cloth which is a welcomed addition that promises not to scratch your device while it is in use.

The flap that encloses your iPhone stays closed with the help of Velcro. Though I would have preferred Marware to use magnets, the Velcro does it’s job. However, when I am in a quiet room and need to get to my phone I’d like to get it out in silence rather than hearing the sound of Velcro tearing open.

The C.E.O. Premiere is designed only to provide access to the headphone port while your phone is inside. This design allows you to listen to music or take calls with the iPhones headset while you are out and about, but like all other cases of this style, no other controls can be accessed when the it’s is closed. Keep that in mind if it’s a deciding factor when you’re looking for a new case.

Marware was kind enough to include a decent screen protector in the package as well.

If you prefer the horizontal case and can get past some of the Marware’s minor shortcomings, the C.E.O Premiere as it’s truly a quality case.

Learn more at TiPb’s iPhone Store >>>

Apple TV 3.0 (or Apple TV 3, or Apple TV Take 3) is the just-released third version of Apple’s and Steve Jobs’ “hobby”. And, for good or for ill, its latest feature-set seems designed to keep iTunes’ living room gateway as niche as ever. That’s not to say it isn’t good, because it is (though it does have problems we’ll get into below), but it’s certainly not great. Not yet. And we’re beginning to wonder if Apple (now or ever) even wants it to be?

Preamble 1

Yes, this is an iPhone blog, but just as other SPE Network sites like WMExperts will touch on the big Microsoft picture and Android Central will keep its electric eyes on Google, TiPb tries to include everything Apple that connects to the iPhone ecosystem. So you won’t find a review of the latest Mac Pro, you will find one of the pocketable iPhone’s big screen cousin, the Apple TV. If your interests lie elsewhere, just skip on to the next post. If you are interested, however, follow on after the jump for more!

Preamble 2

I’ve had an Apple TV since version 1.x and I use it every day. For me it’s part of the Apple/iPhone ecosystem and it “just works” to let me use the same music and video on my iPhone and on my TV (and in iTunes on my PC). My living room setup is a 1080p LCD with 7.1 surround (which I put together as cheaply as possible — check out this forum post for more), which I use Apple’s Remote app to control the Apple TV with my iPhone or iPod touch.

Long ago, I ripped every DVD I owned to iTunes format, and whenever I find a movie or TV series I love on sale at Amazon or elsewhere, I buy it, rip it to a Drobo, and box ye old physical media as backup. I also buy via iTunes, especially when they have their sales. I’m exploring going all in on PVR’ing content as well, but I’ll save the rant on how Canada has no consumer protection when it comes to telecommunications, and Canadians have no access to CableCard, mandated unencrypted OTA broadcast signals, etc.

All this by way of saying I have a lot of content and I watch it via my Apple TV a lot, and so the Apple TV 3.0 update is something I take seriously. Apple… well, we’ll see…

Software not Hardware

Apple TV 3.0 is, sadly, a software only update. There’s no new Apple TV gear to go buy. No better chips, no bigger capacity, no added features like TV tuners or 1080p out. If you haven’t bought one before, it’s cheaper than it was a few months ago, but it’s not better. That’s a far bigger problem at this point than the software.

New Look, Tweaked Feel

The user interface for Apple TV 3.0 has been refreshed — at least on the top level. Now, instead of just two vertical menus, a horizontal menu cuts across the top showing off poster/album art for your content. The spots on the left are, refreshingly, reserved for your own media — your most recently added movies, TV shows, music, podcasts, etc. I count 5 spots on mine. The spots on the right show stuff Apple would like you to buy from the iTunes Store. Yeah, it’s like that — Apple TV remains a hard-sell for purchases and rentals. It’s not as bad as it used to be — they’ve even moved your content above store content in the menus, but it’s still the overall purpose of the device. Then again, online rentals seem to be the future of the set-top box, so fair enough…

LP and Extras

One of the major reasons cited for the Apple TV 3.0 update was to add compatibility for iTunes LP and iTunes Extras. If you already have either or both, iTunes will download new versions of the content (?!), but once done, they look great. Extras present similarly to DVD extras, however the interface for the one we tested — Wall-E — was very un-Apple. It wasn’t clear where to click or when. Choosing one option left that option highlighted when, in order to actually use it, we had to navigate over to the artwork, and then notice the dots beneath the artwork denoting a number of different elements to that content. Apple usually nails this stuff, but we’ll test a few more and hope very hard it was an isolated accident.

Note: there aren’t very many iTunes LP and iTunes Extra offerings yet, barely a dozen of each, but expanding it to the Apple TV is a good sign Apple is making at least another “hobby” out of it. We’ll see how well it plays out.

Also note: Are we waiting on iPhone 3.2 so we can get those extras on the mobile screen as well? Sure would be nice to have them if we got them…

Final Thoughts

Apple TV Take 3 it certainly isn’t. Only its elegance, simplicity, and seamless integration for iTunes users makes it a valid alternative against Windows 7 Media Center or competing set-top boxes that offer Netflix (for those in the US) or XVID/DIVX/MKV (for those who get their content… elsewhere).

That, however, is exactly how Apple has positioned it. Want a DVD option? get a Mac Mini. Want portability, get the AV cables with an iPhone or iPod touch. Want to take iTunes content and splash it on your big screen, there’s an Apple TV for that. For now. But “hobbies” only last for so long. If Apple doesn’t make a serious run at “business” with a proper 3.0 (or 4.0 we guess) and updated hardware, we’re guessing it will dwindle into “canceled” before long. And that would be a shame.

Gallery

The BlueAnt Q1 voice controlled Bluetooth headset for iPhone [$109.95 - TiPb Store] is the higher end version of the BlueAnt V1 I tested last month, and came away impressed with. How impressed? It’s a piece of hardware I would recommend it to anyone in the market for a new bluetooth headset. Now that the good folks over at BlueAnt were nice enough to send me the Q1, will I make the switch? For all of the juicy details follow us after the break!

Similar to the BlueAnt V1, this new and improved Q1 boasts many accessories in the package. Along with the sleek gunmetal voice-controled headset you get large and small earbuds, ear hook, USB cable, AC adapter, and a quick start guide.

In my V1 review I mentioned that the Q1′s improvements may not warrant the higher price to upgrade. I can now honestly say I was wrong. From a first glance, the Q1 looks much more visually appealing to the eye but it does not stop there. The Q1 measures 2.16 inches long while weighing in at .30 oz without the optional ear hook attached and .38 oz with it attached. These specifications help make this headset, hands-down, the most comfortable headset I have ever used. Even with the ear hook attached I can easily go a full day wearing it and not feel any discomfort. With the different sized ear buds and the ear hook you are bound to find a great comfortable fit. The controls are kept simple, you have the volume up/down buttons and the BlueAnt button which acts as power on/off, answer/end calls, and enables voice command.

Now lets get to the good stuff – performance. The BlueAnt Q1 simply out shines all of the competition I’ve tested in the performance category in every way except for battery life. My biggest complaint is that the headset gets 4 hours of talk time and 100 hours of standby. Sure that does not sound bad but when the Q1′s older sibling, the V1, gets one more hour talk time and 100 hours more of standby time… it makes me wonder how BlueAnt dropped the ball on that one. Moving on let’s break down the key features.

• Voice Control with the BlueGenie™ Voice User interface
• Multipoint technology allowing you to connect two handsets at once
• Voice Isolation Technology
• Revolutionary Noise Suppression and Echo Cancellation
• Custom internal wind-shields reduce wind noise to whisper

The first thing I noticed with the improved voice control present on the Q1 was speed dialing. On the V1 I found voice speed dialing worked a bit less than perfectly. I’m happy to report that on the Q1 it works flawlessly. You simply go by your favorite contacts stored within your iPhone. A simple tap of the BlueAnt button and a voice command of “Speed dial 1″ will call the first contact stored within your favorites. Not only can you use voice commands for speed dialing but other things such as checking your battery life, answering/ending phone calls, calling back the last incoming call, redialing your last outgoing call, etc… A great feature that 99% of the time understood what I was saying and completed the task.

Another feature, called multipoint technology, is one that some of you out there can appreciate while others will have no use for. Multipoint technology simply means that you can connect two phones to the Q1 at the same time and answer whichever one happens to be ringing. A nice feature for those of you dual-wielding 2 phones such as your beloved iPhone and say your Blackberry. I know with my previous headsets it would be a pain to have to repair the headset to another one of my phones so this is a welcomed feature.

The biggest improvement I have noticed coming from the V1 to this Q1 is all of the voice isolation technologies that are being implemented within the headset have been improved. When I was in a room with complete silence the person on the other end of the line would hear me crystal clear. The big test was how would it perform in a noisy situation. I am happy to report it faired pretty well. While the BlueAnt Q1 does not use a similar technology to the Jawbone’s noise assassin, the DSP technology in the Q1 does it’s job extremely well. The headset places all ambient noises and makes them sound very distant while raising the sound level of the users voice. Not a single caller complained about not being able to understand me or hear me loud and clear. The biggest improvement over the V1 was made in the wind-sheilds. Living in Chicago I had a great environment to test this out. While all wind noise was not erased, the caller on the other end always was able to hear with me clarity, even with a strong city wind smacking me in the face. Job well done.

Overall the BlueAnt Q1 voice controlled Bluetooth headset for iPhone 3G and iPhone 3GS is a excellent, top quality headset that should not be passed up if you are in the market for a top of the line piece of technology. Buy it now!

Learn more and purchase @TiPb’s Store >>>

The XGear Nitrous Oxide case for iPhone 3G and iPhone 3GS [$37.95 - TiPb Store Link] is a carbon fiber bottom loading hard case that gives you triple layer protection along with a few extra goodies. For the full scoop, follow us after the break!

When it comes to cases, the amount of protection the case provides is the first thing that comes to mind. The Nitrous Oxide is constructed in 3 individual layers that provides phenomenal protection. You get a super soft interior lining surrounded by hard shell case that is wrapped in a layer of carbon fiber. That carbon fiber not only acts as good protection but also provides you with a pretty solid grip while holding your phone. As an extra little bonus, XGear also tosses in a clear screen protector along with a small microfiber cleaning cloth.

As some of you already know, I am not a big fan of hard cases for the simple fact that many, not all, have a tendency to scratch the bezel of your iPhone and sometimes even the phones backing. With the soft interior lining provided you are guaranteed to not scratch your phone. Why all makers of hard cases do not regularly include a soft lining is beyond me.

While the Nitrous Oxide is on your iPhone you have easy access to all of you buttons and ports. Some of you may even feel like it’s too much open space, especially on the bottom, but in my testing I had zero problems with it. The only worry I had before testing was since the case is bottom loading, I was afraid that the phone would slip out if it happened to suffer a drop. However once the case was on, I was comfortable with the fact that my phone would not easily come out. So that’s something that you should not be concerned about. Also, some of you may prefer the open bottom for an easy docking solution.

Overall the XGear Nitrous Oxide Case for iPhone and iPhone 3GS is what it is, a hard case that offers good protection that does not add much size to your iPhone. While some of you may be turned off by the carbon fiber look and feel, others are sure to enjoy it and the Nitrous Oxide will most likely meet your requirements.

Learn more and purchase @TiPb Store>>>

The iSkin solo for iPhone 3G and iPhone 3GS [$29.95 - TiPb Store Link] has quickly become one of the most popular slim-fitting skin cases available today. To find out why, follow us after the break!

The iSkin solo comes in 4 vibrant high-gloss colors: blue, red, black, and white. At first glance it appears the solo is just another hard plastic shell, and some might worry that it has a higher probability of scratching your phone than protecting it. But have no fear, it’s actually a very soft plastic with the interior being an even softer matte rubber finish that will not scratch your iPhone.

Another perk of this soft plastic is that it’s not tacky like most silicone cases out there. The biggest complaint I hear about silicone cases is the amount of dust and lint they attract. This is not the case with the iSkin solo. So, while it does provide you with a material that will ensure that your iPhone will not go slipping out of your hands, it’s also great news for those of you who put your iPhone into your pocket or purse and want to be able to remove it easily and — lint free.

On the protection front, the solo has you pretty well covered. You get decent protection without sacrificing any functionality. Your screen, docking port, headphone jack, and camera access are readily accessible while your volume and power buttons remain safely protected. As a added bonus, iSkin includes a nice crystal clear screen protector that is equivalent in quality to the ones you can purchase separately. Will the solo save your screen from cracking if you drop it on concrete? Of course not, but it will protect your device from your typical bumps and scratches.

Overall I am a fan of what the iSkin solo brings to the table. If you are seeking a case that provides heavy duty protection, I suggest you look elsewhere but if you want a case that will provide casual protection for every day use along with a a nice sleek look, this would be an excellent choice.

Learn more and purchase @ TiPb Store >>>

The BlueAnt V1 Bluetooth Headset for iPhone 3G/3GS [$68.92 - TiPb Store Link] has been a pleasant surprise as I did not think I’d find another Bluetooth headset that I would prefer over the highly regarded Jawbone PRIME.

For the full scoop follow us after the break!

The first thing you will notice is the amount of goodies that BlueAnt has given you in the package. Along with the actual headset you get a rubberized metal ear hook, translucent ear hook, small and large rubber ear gels, small and large foam tips, gooseneck USB cable, USB adapter, USB car charger, AC power adapter, and last but not least the manual/quicks start guide.

With all of that said, lets get into the fit and performance of the V1. The V1 weighs in at a light .35 oz and is 1.5-inches long. Some headsets can just be flat out annoying after a long period of use, not the V1. It is honestly the most comfortable headset I have tried to this very day. It is so comfortable you may just forget you are even wearing it! BlueAnt claims you will get 5 hours of talk time along with 200 hours of standby. I’ve found that those times are pretty accurate but If you find that 5 hours of talk time is to low for what you need, you can always take advantage of all of the charging options you are supplied with. One thing I did notice was that when my headset was running low on battery, alerted by an audible tone, the person on the other end would claim they could not hear me anywhere near as clearly. It was an odd occurrence that would only happen with the battery drained.

Minus that particular issue, the V1′s dual microphones offer superb voice clarity. While it does not have that amazing background noise cancelation feature of the Jawbone headsets, the V1 does have DSP (Digital Signal Processing) that BlueAnt calls Voice Isolation Technology and it works well. The V1 provides outstanding noise suppression, wind noise reduction and echo cancellation. There are two modes available while you are on a call – Voice Isolation Standard and Voice Isolation Max.

The feature that really makes this headset stand out from the rest is it’s voice user interface which allows you to control most of the V1′s functions with your voice. Pushing one button activates the voice recognition technology and gives you control of all the functions of the V1. If you need assistance, just say “What Can I Say?” and the headset will tell you the commands you can use. When you have an incoming call you will be alerted by the V1 telling you who is calling via telephone number. Unfortunately it can not access your phones contacts to read back names but beggars can’t be choosers.

Overall, I found the BlueAnt V1 to be a high quality headset that is worth every penny of it’s low price. Sure you can spend $100 plus on other headsets such as the V1′s younger brother, the BlueAnt Q1, but why bother when they share almost the exact same features?

My Jawbone is now collecting dust as the BlueAnt V1 is now my new daily driver.

Learn more and purchase @TiPb’s Store >>>

The RexRegina Hamilton Case [$44.95 - TiPb Store link] is hands down one of the finest crafted leather pouches I have used to date. While this particular type of case may only appeal to a certain crowd, I can not recommend it highly enough for those of you who are fans of the pouch case. For the full run-down read on after the break!

This RexRegina Hamilton case is a perfect fit for any business man or woman out there that is looking for a classy yet simple case to keep an iPhone protected. It is made from the finest leather available directly from the Tuscany region in Italy. And once you get the case in your hands you can instantly feel it’s high build quality.

With it’s slim profile you can slide the case into a computer bag, briefcase, purse or pocket with ease. Within the first couple days of use the fit may feel a bit too snug for your liking but give it time, the leather will break in but not so much that the phone would easily fall out of the case. You can rest easy knowing that the fit is secure. Another nice feature is one that not many pouch cases actually have – access to the volume control and the ring/silent switch. The side height is designed to allow easy access to the controls, which is a welcome addition to a pouch case.

Like I mentioned early, these types of cases are not for everybody, but if you are someone who prefers high quality pouch cases it may be worth your while to give this case a try.

Learn more and purchase @TiPb’s iPhone Store >>>

The Plantronics Voyager PRO Bluetooth headset [$89.95 - TiPb Store link] sounds great, fits fantastically, and makes you look like something in between a SWAT team member and a Battlestar comms officer.

I’ve said many times before that I have trouble finding a Bluetooth headset that stays in my ear. Admittedly, my ears have been ground-down by years of punches, kicks, and grappling, but even those that came with various types of loops have left me hanging, or just plain left by falling out.

The Plantronics Voyager PRO, which I’ve been using it as my daily driver (literally — it’s the law where I live) for just over a month now, hasn’t let me down yet. It’s larger than some competing devices, but that size is put to good use wrapping over and behind the ear to house the guts of the device, while the slender boom extends down across the cheek. The look is hardcore sci-fi, the sound is crisp and clear, with noise-reduction and a host of control features (and with the upcoming iPhone 3.1, Voice Control will work over Bluetooth as well). Plus, the battery just seems to keep going and going, with 6 hours talk time, 120 hours stand-by.

For complete tech specs and purchasing details, check out TiPb’s iPhone Accessory Store. For more pictures, look below the fold…

The Jabra SP200 Speakerphone for iPhone 3G/3GS [$59-95 - TiPb Store link] is a great Bluetooth headset alternative that you really have to try yourself to fully appreciate. I can not recommend it enough.

I’ve been using the Jabra SP200 for about a month now and I can honestly say that I’ve stopped using every single Bluetooth headset I own while driving my car. Simply connect the SP200 to your cars visor, flip the power switch and you are good to go. And go you will – Jabra claims the battery life comes in at 10 hours of talk time and 23 days of standby time. I am happy to report that these claims are dead on accurate.

Now to get to the most important part of a Bluetooth device, sound quality. I was pleasantly surprised on how well not only the person I would speak to sounded, but how well I came across to them as well. Volume is definitely not an issue with the SP200 as not once have I had to turn it up to it’s full capability.

As for controls it’s pretty simple. You have a volume dial, power switch, and a answer/hang up button that also doubles as an redial button. A great feature that I enjoyed greatly was the ability to leave my car without turning the device off. If I was gone for less than 15 minutes, as soon as I got into my car the device would automatically detect my iPhone and connect instantly. After the 15 minutes if you do not get back into your car, it will automatically power itself down. A simple touch of the answer button will make the re-connection. Need more specs?

• In-car speakerphone for hands-free calls
• Easy to use with no installation
• Noise reduction and echo cancellation (DSP)

The Jabra SP200 Bluetooth Speakerphone can be purchased for $59.95 from the TiPb iPhone Store.

• Learn More, See More Images, and Purchase @ TiPb iPhone Store >>

You purchased a new iPhone 3GS or 3G recently but you are still searching for that perfect case to protect your investment? There are so many options out there in the marketplace that choosing the perfect case can be a tough decision. Today I want to introduce yet another case that you may want to consider, the Belkin Slim-Fit Case for iPhone 3G/3GS. You can purchase the Belkin Slim Fit right here in TiPb store for the low price of $24.95. Follow us after the break to see if this case is the one for you!

Desgin

The Belkin Slim-Fit is a well designed holster case that serves one single purpose, to protect your investment while it is not in use. The case is made up of high quality leather and stitching, with fabric sides and a soft lining that will not scratch your phone. To secure your phone there is a velcro flap that assures you your phone will not accidentally fall out. A nice touch that Belkin added was leaving the bottom of the case open so you can not only attach your charging/sync cable but your speaker volume will not be muffled.

Overall, the case really lives up to its name, as it doesn’t add much bulk to your iPhone, even with a belt clip on the back. Kudos to Belkin.

Daily Use

I am a big fan of holster/pouch cases, and the Belkin Slim-Fit did not disappoint. Your iPhone 3G/3GS will fit perfectly into the case but not so tight to the point where you can not get the phone out quickly if you have to answer a call. The first few times you use it, it may seem like it is tighter than you’d like but rest be assured, the leather does loosen up a bit after a few uses.

The option to use a non-removable belt clip is a nice feature. And the clip itself is very low profile so if you don’t wish to use it, the case still fits comfortably in your pocket.

If there are any downsides to the case, it would be that, as a slide-in holster, the Slim-Fit doesn’t allow you use your iPhone while it’s in the case. Yes, that should be considered a given when purchasing a holster case but it would be a nice bonus to have none-the-less.

Conclusion

Like most holster-type cases, the Slim-Fit only offers protection to your iPhone when it is holstered, which can be a good thing or a bad thing. It all depends on what your preferences are in a case. If you are a fan of similar cases, this one is a great deal. In the end, I can’t help but like this case for what it is – the slimmest belt-clip case I’ve used – ever.

Pros

• Slimmest holster case money can buy
• Offers good protection while your iPhone 3G/3GS is not in use
• High quality materials

Cons

• Can not access your screen when your phone is in the case
• Not dockable

The Griffin Streamline is available from The iPhone Blog Store for $19.95. If you are looking for a running/workout case that is lean and comfortable, then look no further than the Griffin Streamline! Let’s see how it measure up after the break!

Design

The Griffin Streamline is made of a plastic outer rim, a neoprene “sleeve” that holds the iPhone/iPod Touch and an elastic armband; simple. There is a clear plastic cover in the front of the device to protect the screen. This clear cover still gives you the ability to touch and interact with your Apple device.

Daily Use

I have been using the “Couch to 5K” app [iTunes Link] for a while now. for the most part I have been holding my device while I walked/ran. However this case has changed that! Not only is it comfortable and lightweight, but it protects the iPhone (even if you dropped it) and adjusts to just about any arm.

I typically walk/run 3-4 days a week in the early morning. I can’t express what a pleasure it is to run with this case. It does not slip on the arm (really it should lie at almost your elbow and the bend in your arm prevents it from falling off, at least that is my experience. if you try to tighten this or any armband higher up on your arm, my arm will go numb:-) and allows access to the screen while running or resting between intervals. if you need to clean the case (if for nothing else, the build-up of sweat over time) simply wash by hand in cold water with some soap. Another feature that this case has is a reflective trim around the inside edge of the case. The trim is very thin and can only be seen from the front of the case, not the sides. I think it is novel that Griffin added this, but in real life, I don’t think a car is going to see me because of it.

Conclusion

This is bare-bones case with no extra pouches for keys or cash; it is just a well made case that looks good, fits well and does what it is supposed to do; securely hold your iPhone while you workout while keeping it safe and remaining comfortable. At $19.95, this case is a steal and a practical give-me if you exercise with and iPhone/iPod Touch. This case has earned a really high rating.

Pros

• Lightweight
• Holds the iPhone securely
• Neoprene is easily washable
• Armband is adjustable
• Clear screen cover still allows input

Cons

• Basic case, no storage for money or keys
• Reflective trim could encompass more of the case

TiPb’s Rating

One of the biggest gripes a lot of iPhone 3G/3GS readers have is battery life. Now this is mainly due to not being able to put the iPhone down to give it a rest, but we now have another solution to your iPhone addiction. Enter Case-Mate’s Fuel Case for iPhone 3G/3GS, which is available in TiPb’s store for $74.95. For a full review, follow us after the break!

Design & Usability

The Case-Mate Fuel Case for iPhone 3G/3GS is integrated with a 2300mA Lithium Polymer battery, Case-Mate says it will add up to nine hours of additional talk-time, up to seven hours of internet browsing, up to eight hours of video, 24 hours of audio, and 250 hours of extra standby time.

The times that Case-Mate claims are pretty much dead on. If you have trouble putting your iPhone down and typically end up with a dead battery sometime during the day, Fuel is the right case for you.

Usually when I get into my car after a full day at work I would have 20%-30% of my battery left. With the Fuel I’ve been leaving with anything from 80% to being topped off and that’s still with some juice left in the case itself. Not too shabby. I think it’s also important to note that you do not need to remove the phone from the case to use the iPhone in any way, including phone calls.

On the bottom front of the case you will find 3 built-in LEDs that allow you to see exactly how much “Fuel” you have left and a power button that allows you to turn the charger on or off as you see fit. Both of these are nice little bonus features.

To charge the case you only have one option — you must use a standard 5-pin USB cord. One is included but it would be nice to have the option to charge the case without using my laptop. On the plus side, Fuel fully supports syncing while iPhone 3G is docked into the case.

One nice features Fuel has that other iPhone charging cases lack is a belt clip that rotates 180-degrees. This sounds great but unfortunately Case-Mate dropped the ball on this one. I found myself worrying about the lack of protection on the upper half of my iPhone and the screen. Since you have to place the iPhone face-out, the screen is left completely unprotected. This means you have to be careful not to bump into anything or you will damage your device.

So, the next possibility would be to place the phone in your pocket. There’s only one thing wrong with that — the belt clip is not removable. Granted it still would be a tight fit without the clip due to the added size it gives the iPhone, but the option would still be better.

As to the belt clip itself, it does it’s job well. Rest assured, your iPhone is locked in place and will not fall out on you.

Conclusion

Even with the complaints about the belt clip, I still like this case. The pros outweigh the cons by far. I found myself using the case at work around my desk and at home when I was lounging around. Even though the size adds to the iPhone it still feels good in the hand while using it.

Overall the Case-Mate Fuel Case for iPhone 3G/3GS does it’s job and it does it very well. Since Apple chooses not to make the iPhones battery replaceable companies like Case-Mate have stepped up and offered us some solutions. For $74.95 you can’t go wrong with this one, Fuel will give your iPhone the boost it needs to easily make it through your entire day and, in some cases, days.

Pros

• Battery life as advertises.
• Feels good in the hand
• Reasonable price
• Ability to sync while your iPhone is in the case
• Works with the new iPhone 3GS

Cons

• Lack of screen protection
• Belt clip is not removable
• Case only chargeable via micro USB cable

iPhone 3GS review: it’s the same as last year. There. Done.

What? That’s what everyone’s saying, isn’t it? With the iPhone 3GS, Apple didn’t give the fashionistas their glowing status fix, didn’t once again jump high enough over the bar they themselves set way back in ought seven… The iPhone 3GS is evolutionary, not revolutionary, right?

Maybe there’s a point to the technorati’s collective malaise of mobile-dernity. We’ve already done our iPhone 3.0 Software Walkthrough, so now it’s time for TiPb to weigh in the hardware, and on whether or not it deserves the 2,1 designation Apple is seemingly so keen to slap on it.

iPhone 3GS complete review, after the break!

Outs and Ins. Or, Don’t Judge an iPhone by its Casing

The original iPhone 2G (1,1) established the iconic “black slab” look that still dominates a large portion of the smartphone landscape. iPhone 3G (1,2) replaced the composite metal and plastic backing with a full, un-blendable plastic that curved more to make it feel like less.

The iPhone 3GS (2,2) is almost identical in form factor — screen, bezel, and casing — to last year’s model. The lettering on the back is as shiny as the Apple brand this time, and according to the tech specs, the new model ever so slightly outweighs the old, but not in any way that really matters.

This is nothing new with Apple, of course. Typically a year of revolutionary design, like the aluminum iMac or G5 tower, are followed by a few years of internal evolution. A few missteps like the “fatty” nano aside, the iPod has followed a similar path.

This may be tragic for those who view handsets and fashion items and want everyone to see they have the latest and greatest, it comes as a blessing to accessory owners and accessory makers alike. Why so? Because unlike the shift from iPhone 2G, this time the accessories you bought last year for the iPhone 3G will, in all likelihood, work again this year for the iPhone 3GS.

Everyone saves money, and the economy thanks us.

• TiPb Video: White 32GB IPhone 3GS Unboxing and Quick Look

Oleophobia

Remember when I said “almost identical”. Here’s the biggest reason for that caveat: the new iPhone’s screen is “oleophobic”. This means that, while it doesn’t keep your iPhone from getting smudged, its coating repels oils making it much easier to wipe clean. Much.

After waiting in line at the Apple Store on launch day, eager to get my greasy, Tim Horton’s breakfast-biscuit’ed hands on one, I liberally transferred as much smearing as possible to the screen and then went to wipe and — presto! — a very impressive amount of clarity was restored.

While not a feature anyone was really expecting, and certainly not the most glamorous bullet point of the bunch, it’s none-the-less my dark horse pick for feature many people will grow to really appreciate. (Especially the more grease handed ones).

New Guts are Glorious

In stark contrast to the lack of visible changes for the iPhone 3GS, Apple has given it the internals the equivalent of complete makeover. The “S”, as we were told, stands for “speed”.

First and foremost the iPhone 3GS not only boasts a faster processor (now clocked at 600mhz rather than the previous 412), but a new processor architecture from ARM called the Cortex A8. I forget who said it, but the analogy of going from a 486 to a Pentium isn’t far off.

Further upping the ante is the new Power VR SGX GPU with support for OpenGL ES 2.0. Sticking with our previous metaphor, Apple just put a better graphics card in your PC — Crysis will look slicker. Hopefully OpenCL (where GPUs can function as CPUs) will one day mean everything will look — and work — slicker as well.

Topping it off is a reported doubling of the RAM from the previous generations’ skimpy 128MB to beefy 256MB. This explains itself. Take your PC from 1GB to 2GB and see what happens.

Oh, and the the upper level storage now available? 32GB.

Even the cell networking got a boost, going from 3G to 3.5G/HSPA 7.2. Most users, unfortunately, don’t have those networks in place yet — or won’t see any huge real-world difference even if they do.

Losing out on this year’s game of speed-bump musical chairs, however, is the Wi-Fi radio, which stays at the old 802.11g/b protocol rather than the current, much faster and farther reaching, 208.11n. While justifying the investment Apple made in dual-band routers back in March of this year, it does sort of stick out.

Overall, however — and despite the allure of video (which we’ll get to in a bit) — this is the key upgrade offered by the iPhone 3GS. It’s fast…

Screaming Fast

So what if it’s got better hardware inside. What does that mean to me? In two words: less waiting. Less waiting for apps to launch, web pages to render or re-render, lists to populate or scroll, less lag, less lock-up, less of a dozen little things that take a dozen seconds and add up to a noticeably better, smoother, and more stable experience throughout the day.

Apple, for their part, claims on average the iPhone 3GS performs twice as fast the iPhone 3G. That may not sound like much, but imagine your car suddenly accelerated from 0-60 twice as fast. Imagine your laptop suddenly doubled its productive speed. It’s not something you think you need, but if you ever go back to the slower model, it’s something you immediately miss.

Speed matters.

• TiPb Video: iPhone 3GS vs. iPhone 3G Browser Speed Smackdown
• TiPb Video: iPhone 3GS vs. iPhone 3G App Launch Battle Royal!

Video Kills, Still Camera Now a Star

Not only does the iPhone 3GS answer the long-standing complaint about the camera on the iPhone 2G and iPhone 3G by raising the megapixel count to 3 (better, if only just), but it adds auto-focus, macro mode, and VGA-quality video recording to the mix.

Photo Realism

Aside from the 3 megapixels being the barest boost possible, auto-focus and macro are very welcome features. The star of the show, however, is once again Apple’s ability to make them really easy to use. Since this is a hardware, not software review, I really shouldn’t mention the “tap to focus”, no matter how user-empowering it is. Nor the auto-white balancing and all the other software-side mojo Apple has going on here. That they blend hardware capabilities with software features so seamlessly will make it hard to keep this review on the straight and narrow. Fair warning on that.

All in all, the quality of the pictures the iPhone 3GS can take are much improved, as is the range of conditions under which hey can be taken in. It’s not a DSLR, not even a high-end consumer camera killer by any stretch of the imagination, but it’s already killed the need for a separate point and shoot for many (based on Flickr usage stats alone) and this new, improved version just means those pointedly shot pictures are going to look a whole lot better from now on.

Here’s a few samples, including the Apple Store in Montreal and one from Jeremy of downtown Chicago.

Video on the Go

Video being VGA-quality is a bit of a downer, especially considering the chipset seems capable of 720p, and the bar has pretty much been set there by the likes of the Flip Mino HD. Also, like many low-end point and shoots, you can’t change focus once you start recording. Those limitations not withstanding, iPhone 3GS is about to do for video what it’s previous generations did for stills.

The single most compelling thing about the new video functionality is that it will always be there with you. RED ONE may shoot heaven the way the angels see it, but you’re not lugging that beastie around with you all day, every day.

I mentioned above how the iPhone is the most popular camera on Flickr. I’m betting iPhone 3GS will become one of the most popular cameras on YouTube as well. Again, not to stray too far into software, but the ability to shoot video with a device you have with you all the time, easily trim it, and send it straight to YouTube (or MobileMe) is a killer app.

Unfortunately, we’re more likely to see 11 billion more “cat falling off piano” videos than UFO footage, Big-foot proof, or an LED flash being developer for the fourth generation iPhone…

• TiPb iPhone 3GS Low Light Video Recording Test
• TiPb iPhone 3GS Video Recording – Walking Test at Apple Store Montreal
• TiPb iPhone 3GS Video Recording – Driving Test

Its Master’s Voice Control

Is Voice Control really a hardware feature? Apple didn’t deign to render it unto the iPhone 3G, so it could well require the horsepower and the same differences in the 3.5mm headphone jack that prevented the remote control from working in older iPhones and iPods. Either way, Voice Control is clearly one of the differentiators being offered on the iPhone 3GS, so we’ll take a quick look.

Now, Voice Control is certainly nothing revolutionary. Feature phones have been doing it for a decade. The iPhone 3GS version looks great, of course, and sports a heroic number of language options. That Voice Control itself is not voice controllable — I can’t put on my Scotty accent and simply say “Computer!” — is disappointing if understandable, but not even a Google Voice Search-style accelerometer and proximity sensor triggered activation scheme?

Holding down the home button and waiting for the tone, it’s hard to argue with those who call it gimmicky at this point, but it’s equally hard not to be tantalized by the possible future it suggests. If “call” and “play” are options today, why not “email Dieter”, “browse tipb.com”, “take photo”, “launch application Twitter”, “take voice memo” or any of a dozen other commands tomorrow?

Also, Voice Control can be launched from within other apps. You can be browsing, playing a game, working on a note, and launch Voice Control, tell it to “play music” and continue working without having to exit your current app, go to Phone or iPod, and come back.

It’s still not background multitasking, but it’s interesting.

• TiPb Video: iPhone 3GS Multilingual Voice Control Challenge

Accessibility

Connected to Voice Control and worth noting both as a software feature and exclusive to iPhone 3GS are accessibility options including VoiceOver, Zoom, White on Black, Mono Audio, and Speak Auto-text. We’ll look at these more in a future post.

All-in Compass

Adding to the iPhone 3GS’ location-based services is a digital compass that promises to help us more quickly discover not only where we are, but which way we’re going. There’s an app for that, of course — a stand alone wooden-and-brass chromed single-tasker that’s fairly meh-worthy. Integration into the Maps app shows more promise, a second tap of the “find my location” button now giving projection of your direction.

It does open up future possibilities for Google street-view to leverage the compass, the way it has on Android since launch. Other applications as well, including the oft talked about “augmented reality” views where data is superimposed on top of live images (rates on hotel rooms, movie times on theaters, etc.) I’m not sold on the relative advantages of that paradigm yet, but I’d happily take being proven wrong.

Conclusion

I’ve said it before and I’ll say it again: Apple had me at speed. The minute I saw the performance potential of the new hardware, I had to have it. Video is nice and I’ll likely use it a lot, but just cutting that much overhead off my day to day usage is priceless.

But I’m not a typical iPhone user, I’m an enthusiast and you may be as well, in which case — speed and video! If your usage falls more towards the casual, if you just want a phone and an iPod and some nifty apps, then is the iPhone 3GS for you?

If you don’t have an iPhone yet, now is a great time to get in. Subsidized prices for the iPhone 3GS are low ($199/$299 in the US on a 2 year AT&T contract), and you won’t find a more user friendly and integrated (iTunes ecosystem) device in the mobile computing space.

If you currently have an iPhone 2G and you qualify for subsidy pricing, it’s also a no-brainer. Unless you don’t have 3G coverage in your area, don’t care about GPS or low-res pictures, and want to ride the original until it breaks down, the iPhone 3GS should be on your shopping list.

If you have an iPhone 3G… well, here’s where it gets tricky, especially if you have to pay your carrier a hefty upgrade fee. How much, if at all, does lag bother you? How badly do you want to take better quality pictures and video? If speed and the new camera are worth more to you than the upgrade price (and check with your carrier to see what exactly that will be), then go get it. If not, then the iPhone 3.0 software will give you very nice upgrade all on its own anyway.

And as to the big question posed in the beginning — is the iPhone 3GS worthy of the 2,1 designation? Is it a big enough leap forward?

More of a step then a jump, but a good one and in the right direction. 2,1 is in keeping with how Apple classifies new processors in its Mac line, and it’s fair enough here as well.

As much as I would have loved a 480×800 OLED display, a 5 megapixel camera, 802.11n, and — yes — a glowing Apple logo, iPhone 3GS delivered where it mattered most and did it without completely shattering the huge advantage of platform compatibility.

Matt Miller, editor of our sibling-site NokiaExperts, got an advanced look at Documents to Go for iPhone as part of his ZDNet gig, and has already gone live with an amazingly detailed review: Review: Documents To Go raises the bar for iPhone word processing.

Matt loves the low price point, the Word editing, and Exchange support. Obviously, he misses the Excel editing support, but knows that’s coming.

Check out his full review for more, including a huge screenshot gallery, and overviews on editing, syncing, and Exchange support.

Thanks Matt!

We’ve had a lot to say about the Palm Pre over the last few months, but it pales to insignificance compared to the epic monster of a Palm Pre review our noble Editor-in-Chief, Dieter Bohn, has just dropped on sibling site PreCentral.net:

There are Pre Reviews & then there are huge Pre Reviews with 12 videos and photo galleries w/ 200 images for companions

Well. Done. Sir.

If you’re tired of the sizzle and want some steak, if you’ve seen smoke but question if there’s fire, get thee over to PreCentral.net and read the Palm Pre review.

Then hurry back here and tell us what you think of it, and how you think it’ll compare with the iPhone!

With WWDC 2009 right around the corner, there is excitement in the air. The iPhone OS 3.0 software and a highly possible next generation iPhone are right around the corner. Now what does this have to with the Plantronics Voyager 855 Bluetooth Headset? The answer to that question is simple – A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile). Finally A2DP is coming to an iPhone near you… unless you still plan on keeping that first generation iPhone. (Sadly, for A2DP, you guys will need to upgrade to a current 3G model or the soon-to-be-announced next generation hardware.)

So, iPhone 3G owners, what better way to get a jump on things than by picking up the Plantronics Voyager 855 Bluetooth Headset?! It is available in TiPb’s sibling store WMExperts for a cool $69.95. After the break, a full review!

Design

The Voyager 855 consists of two pieces: a headset unit, which is where you will find all of your controls, and the detachable earpiece, which is what you will use to turn the 855 into a stereo headset – pretty crafty indeed.

The headset is sleek and stylish with its black coating with silver trimmed accents. The mic boom slides out to bring the microphone closer to your mouth. That not only makes it easier for the person with whom you are speaking to hear you, it’s also a way to answer and end calls – more on that a bit later.

Next up is it’s size. The Voyager tips the scales at mear .53 ounce (11 Grams) so it is surprisingly on the lighter side compared to other headsets available. It measures 2.25 inches by 0.5 inch by 0.6 inch. So again, not large by any means unless you have the boom extended. With the boom, look to add another inch or so to it’s length. To get a better grasp on it’s size below you will can see the Voyager next to the Jawbone 2 and Apple’s no longer available headset.

Now if you are looking to get in on the stereo bluetooth action you will need the separate stereo plug-in cable with earpiece. It looks just like a regular earbud attached to an ear loop. To get stereo bluetooth you simply need to attach the ear loop with earpiece to the main headset. The stereo setup is meant to be worn with the cable resting behind your neck.

Also included in the box: ear loop stabilizer (2 sizes), sound isolating ear buds, micro USB charger, lanyard, and carrying case.

Usability

I’ve been using the Voyager 855 for about a week now and I will admit the sound quality is pretty good compared to other headsets I have used in the past. While the headset is not as clear as — or does not boast noise cancelation like the Jawbone — it does contain AudioIQ, which is simply a fancy name for digital signal processing or DSP. Without noise cancelation, loud conditions did create a bit of background noise but people I spoke with did not have any problems hearing me or vice versa. So overall the AudioIQ does it’s job well. To make your voice heard even better you can also slide the boom down closer to your mouth. The boom can also be used to answer and end calls simply by sliding it out or in respectively.

The added bonus of the Voyager 855 is it’s ability to turn into a stereo bluetooth headset by simply adding the stereo plug-in cable. The sound quality for listening to music was pretty decent as well. I have no complaints in that department.

The big question I always have when it comes to bluetooth headset is how comfortable is it to wear and how is the battery life? This headset comes with three earbud pairs in different sizes, allowing you to pick and choose the most comfortable fit for you. You can wear the headset with or without the included earloop, on either your left or right ear. So with that said, you should not have any issues finding the right combination that will comfortably fit your needs. Battery life was excellent. Plantronics claims 7 hours of talk time, 6 hours of listening time, and 160 hours of standby time. I’ve put it through the ringer this week and have had to charge it two times within the week with a good amount of usage.

Conclusion

The Plantronics Voyager 855 Bluetooth Headset, which is available in the WMExperts store for $69.95 is a fantastic deal. Not only will you be able to take full advantage of the upcoming 3.0′s A2DP feature you get a very good overall bluetooth stereo headset.

Pros

• Low price for what you get
• Stereo Bluetooth
• Fits comfortably
• Great battery life

Cons

• No noise cancelation
• Micro USB charger

Design

The DLO HybridShell for iPhone 3G is a transparent plastic snap-on case for the iPhone. The case protects the back and sides. The openings are all precision cut, even the camera, to allow for easy access to all of the ports and switches on the iPhone. As a bonus, you even receive a screen protector to protect the screen.

Daily Use

The factor that attracted me to this case initially were the raised black rubber “bumps” on the bottom of the case. I think everyone would agree that out of the box, the iPhone can be a little slippery. After snapping on the case I immediately began placing the case on any surface I could find to see how it “stuck”. Keep in mind that there is no adhesive, simply solid rubber studs. I have to admit to my surprise it actually made a difference. Specifically in the car. Placing the case on the dashboard for example proved  non-perilous.

With these positives, there are inevitable downsides. The big one? Well, that same awesome non-slip behavior on surfaces also applies to your pant pocket. Though not impossible to wield, depending on how tight you wear your pants, the case can get “stuck” pulling it our of your pocket. Yes, those rubber studs work their magic in there too.

I typically shy away from snap-on cases because my biggest fear is that if the phone is dropped, the case will hit the ground and break apart. Not so with the DLO Hybrid Shell. Once this case is on, it stays on and can be very difficult to remove (I had to get my pocket knife to use as a prying tool to remove the case).

Conclusion

Overall I think this is an excellent case only brought back a tad from perfection by a couple issues including: no docking while in the case (you can still use the USB cable), sticks in your pocket and the case can be rather challenging to remove. This last one only would apply if you swap cases often). These sniggles aside, if you are looking for a clear case with screen protector and rubber grips, I think you can’t go wrong with this case. Its low-profile and ridged to serve the most abusive customers.

Pros:

• Lightweight
• Case is compact
• Precision openings for accessing everything you need on your phone
• Back grips are nice
• Included clear screen protector is an added bonus

Cons:

• Case can get “stuck” in your jean pocket do to the rubber studs
• Case is very difficult to remove
• Not dockable from within case

TiPb’s Rating:

[Ed: New Case-Mate Vrooms in new spectacular colors now available in the TiPb iPhone Store! - Rene]

The iPhone 3G certainly has a ton of case options. Everyone has their own take on what constitutes a good iPhone case—some prefer silicone, others want a hard plastic, some prefer loud cases, others search for more subtle options. We take a look at a lot of cases here at TiPb and there’s a different qualification for the case we’re about to take a look at—this falls under the ‘fun’ category.

The Case-Mate Vroom for iPhone 3G ($14.95) is a subtly-fun designed rubber case. From afar the Vroom case looks like a basic, black silicone case that protects the back of the iPhone 3G. Upon closer inspection, whoa what?! The back has tire tread!

Is this merely a gimmick? How cool is it?

Read on for the rest of the review!

Design

Come on. Laugh a little. Ease up. The Vroom case for the iPhone 3G is funny and a definite conversation starter. I mean, it’s a tire on your iPhone 3G! You could even come up with a far-fetched story on how you custom made the case with your old car tire’s or even say its a special edition made by Goodyear or Michelin. I mean, a tire on your iPhone? What other crazy designs can we get?

Jokes aside, the Vroom case is a basic black rubber case that protects the full back of the iPhone 3G while leaving room open for all of the iPhone 3G’s functions. It even comes equipped with a plastic screen to protect the iPhone 3G’s touchscreen. We’re not fans of those plastic touchscreens preferring to go with Bodyguardz or Invisibleshield for cases like these.

But in all, I think it looks great and adds a ton of character to the iPhone 3G.

Usability

The rubber is a lot different from other silicone cases I’ve encountered. Instead of a soft, grippy feel the Vroom case is harder and slicker. I don’t prefer this finish because it doesn’t offer the same amount of grip as other silicone options but I think that’s just a matter of preference.

What’s great about the Vroom case, other than the design of course, is that it doesn’t add much thickness to the iPhone. I found that the case was really easy to hold and didn’t change the contours of the iPhone 3G. And though the rubber is a bit different than most cases, I feel like it’s a stronger grade. Instead of being just a sleeve or a skin, this feels like true tire rubber. I guess it succeeded in its intended effect, right?

But this case does have its fair share of limitations—more thought was put into its design than its actual construction. It attracts lint and dust very easily, I could never really manage to keep the case clean. This may be more of a color issue than anything since dust simply shines on a black case.

Also, this is personal preference but I don’t like it when a case ever-so-slightly exposes the chrome rim around the iPhone. I feel as if you’re going to cover the back of the iPhone you might as well go the extra millimeter to cover the chrome rim.

But in all, the Vroom case offers just enough protection. It’s not going to be mistaken as an OtterBox but it definitely does a good job in preventing nicks and scratches from daily routine.

Final Thoughts

If you’re looking for pure protection, this case probably isn’t for you. I won’t lie, there are better options for you if protection is your biggest concern. For starters, take a look at the TiPb store.

But if you like quirky designs and/or conversations revolving your iPhone 3G case—hey, this is as good as it gets. Let me tell you, when I was testing out this case, I got numerous compliments and questions about its origins. I found that I personally LIKED the case enough to ignore its limitations.

Though it only offers middling protection—this is the case I reach for most for my iPhone 3G.

PROS

• Great, Fun Design
• High Quality Rubber
• Adds Minimal Thickness

CONS

• Offers Average Protection
• Attracts Dust

FINAL RATING:

The iPhone and music pretty much go hand and hand. Your music deserves to be played through a more than decent stereo headset, one that can deliver clear, clean, crisp sound at any volume. That said, I jumped at the chance to try out the iharmonix Pro i-Series Stereo Headset and put it through some serious usage. You can purchase this exact headset right in TiPb’s very own store, for the low price of $39.95. Honestly, I did not know what to expect while waiting for UPS to drop these babies off but I will admit, I was pleasantly surprised. For a full review, read on after the break!

Design

Lets start out by taking a look at the Pro i-Series design. All in all, I am fairly impressed with its build quality. Is it as fancy as some of the higher priced headsets out there? Not at all, but for a $39 it’s not to be scoffed at. The quality is definitely sturdy enough to last for the life of your phone. The headset’s wires are designed fairly well with a thickness and coating that keeps them from getting tangled easily. That would be good news for all of you who are jamming them into your pockets. It is also important to note that they are about 4 inches longer than the stock Apple headset.

Also included is an in-line microphone with an end and send button. You can use the same button to pause, skip tracks, etc., just like you are able to with the headset included with the iPhone.

Iharmonix even tossed in two different earbud sets so that ears of all sizes get the perfect fit. The memory foam earbuds, which you compress with your fingers and put into your ears, were difficult to insert but I did get them to fit. The rubber earbuds on the other hand were way more comfortable for me. Granted this all depends on your ears and what you prefer.

With every aspect of it’ design being positive up until this point, I did I manage to find one negative. Compared to the Apple headset, the 3.5 mm headset plug stands out a bit more than I am comfortable with and does not offer any flex or give if it were to be bumped or tugged on. I’ve always been a bit leary with any headset I’ve used for the simple fact that, with one good whack or tug, you are bound to end up with a crack in the plastic around your iPhone’s 3.5 mm jack. So that is something that should have been taken into consideration. Other than that one minor concern, iharmonix did a really nice job designing this particular headset.

Usability

Now this is where the Pro i-Series shines. Out of all the headsets I have used since getting my first iPhone I can tell you that you will be hard pressed to find one that will outperform this headset, especially in this price range. The sound quality while listening to music is definitely splendid. You get good bass and more importantly it is clear and heavy without getting distorted at higher levels. As is the case with similar headsets, the bass does not take away from the mids or the treble, so the balance is spot-on at low or high volumes. For all you fans of Dieter and Mike, who star in TiPb’s Phone Different Podcast, you’ll be really pleased to know voices come across superbly.

Color me impressed. You will not get a better bang for the buck than this.

That brings us to call quality. The Pro i-Series is very good. For the most part, the person on the other end of the call sounds very natural and there’s very little background noise. Most of the time friends told me I sounded loud and clear. There were a few instances that I was told I sounded distant but overall that was far and few between.

Conclusion

If you have been looking for a modest replacement for headphones that come with the iPhone, I would not hesitate to pick these up. Sure there are other headphones out there that outperform the Pro i-Series but you better be ready to fork over $100 plus. For $39.95, you really can’t beat the overall quality of the iharmonix Pro i-Series Stereo Headset.

Pros

• Excellent quality for the price
• It’s cheap!

Cons

• Lack of flex in 3.5 mm plug
• Earbuds may not fit comfortably depending on your ears

TiPb Accessory Review Rating

Come this “summer”, iPhone 3.0 — see our walkthrough — will allow iPhone 3G (and perhaps next-generation iPhone users) to enjoy new Bluetooth functionality including stereo headsets, both the A2DP audio and ARCP control protocols. For consumers, the Motorola S9 Stereo Bluetooth headset (available from our sibling store, WMExperts) may be an option you want to consider come release day. For developers testing using the A2DP/ARCP profiles on the iPhone 3.0 Beta, they might even be something you want to consider now.

Note: This pre-review will not be focusing on iPhone 3.0 functionality, which is currently in closed beta. It will concentrate only on the headset itself. However, for those developers needing an A2DP headset for testing 3.0, it’s our understanding this one works well on multiple units, over multiple carriers.

Form Factor

The Motorola S9 is a fixed form, if flexible plastic horse-shoe shaped, behind-the-head fitting audio solution that combines stereo music with phone functionality. The advantage of being a singular unit is that it’s solid, unlikely to become loose or break off at some weak join point. The disadvantage is that if your head is too thin or too wide, the headset will be either uncomfortable or unusable. Likewise, the behind-the-head layout will appeal to those who like wearing hats or otherwise don’t want the bar crossing over their head. However, it may be a non-starter for people who want to use them while reclining or lying down.

Controls

A status light in the middle of the bulge along the back of the headset separates the standards-friendly mini-USB charging port on one side from the power button on the other. Both are covered by soft touch red plastic. The right-side earpiece has controls for play/pause, forward, and back. The left side earpiece has controls for answering the phone as well as volume up and down. These controls are under harder black plastic, with the play/pause and answer buttons providing a tactile, click feedback, and the volume and track buttons on either side lying flat and flush.

Functionality

The S9s are rated for 6 hours talk and 7 hours music, but like any re-chargeable product, battery life can and will vary based on usage and cycle. Sound volume is good, as is music quality, though the compression required for AD2P stereo Bluetooth transfer might not be to the liking of audiophiles. If you’re happy enough with traditional MP3 sound reproduction, however, you’ll likely have no problem with this device.

Conclusion

The freedom provided by wireless Bluetooth stereo headsets like the Motorola S9 will be a boon to iPhone users, the convenience easily outweighing concerns of audiophile-level sound reproduction (at least for most). They won’t fit everyone on either end of the physical or usage pattern scale, but as with the quality, they’re well suited for a large enough swathe down the middle.

Bottom line, if you want something solid, affordable, portable, and functional for your iPhone 3.0 developer unit, or upcoming iPhone 3.0 release unit, you’d do well to consider the Motorola S9s.

Pros

• Good sound
• Good battery life
• Good price-point
• Light and comfortable
• Well suited for on-the-go use.

Cons

• May not fit all head sizes
• Not well-suited for lying down

TiPb Accessory Pre-Review Rating

The Case-Mate Barely There case for the iPhone 3G, available for $19.95 from the TiPb iPhone Store, is designed to accomplish several things:

• Protect your iPhone from minor impact and abuse (e.g. bumps and scratches)
• Do so without adding significant bulk or making it un-pocketable (if that’s how you roll)
• And to look good while doing it.

How well does it hit these targets, and what if anything could it do better? Find out in our review…

I’m not a huge fan of cases. More often than not, my iPhone goes commando in my pocket. Well, almost. I have a sticker-skin on it to protect from minor scratches since the plastic iPhone 3G backing is so prone to them. I do worry, however, that one day I’ll drop my pride and joy and that same plastic backing will chip or crack on me. Living with that fear in the back of my mind is what drove me to try out a few options, starting with one that’s as close to naked as a hard case can be.

Design

Case-Mate’s Barely There case comes in a rainbow of colors. Enough to make the latest gen iPod nano jealous. Case the rainbow. Seriously. Black, white, red, orange, purple, pink, and blue are your options. Being somewhat stalwart and sedate myself, I went with black.

It covers the back and sides of the iPhone 3G, with cutouts at the corners to increase flexibility and aid in getting it on or off. Cutouts are also provided for the controls, speaker, mic, and dock port, and a hole is cut in the back so the big Apple logo on the iPhone can represent. Fandom rejoice. Everyone else scratch your heads and hope nothing spears it right in that target spot.

For the front, in lieu of armor, Case-Mate provides a fairly typical screen protector.

Usability

Slide your iPhone in, volume buttons first, and the other side flexes and snaps into place securing your iPhone in its protective shell. Simple, direct, easy. Win.

For the screen protector — it’s a screen protector. Clean thoroughly. Apply carefully. Squeegee down deliberately.

day in, day out, the case just does what it’s supposed to from that point on — protect your iPhone from the abuse of casual use. Living up to it’s name, it often times felt like it really was barely there, adding nothing appreciable to the in-pocket experience, and even giving a tiny bit of extra, and appreciated, heft in-hand.

It’s not coated in soft-touch, so there’s really no added security when it comes to actually preventing drops, but it feels tough enough to survive a pretty good whack. And hey, if you break it, at least you’re only out an Andrew Jackson and not the heap of Ben Franklins a new iPhone would cost you.

Of course, the front is covered with only a thin plastic film, so while you still get the scratch protection, dropping it face down will offer nothing in the way of similar impact resistance.

Problems? A couple minor ones to start, mostly to do with fit and finish. The edges in the corners were left a tad sharp. Don’t get me wrong, nothing skin-piercing here, just enough to give you an annoying poke. A little extra rounding off in the factory would have been appreciated.

Likewise — and I preface this by saying I have a sticker-skin on top of my iPhone 3G which might have caused just a millimeter or so of extra girth, creating the problem — plastic interiors make me to worry about cases causing scratches as much as they prevent them. I saw some depressions on my sticker-skin. No idea if that would have translated to anything on a bare iPhone back, but a little more inside finish at the factory would be reassuring here as well.

Being a complete and single unit case, it’s not compatible with all dock-port accessories. Anything slim and at the end of a long cable, like the standard USB sync that comes with the iPhone, should do you fine. Any kind of cradle, however, will almost certainly require you to remove the case first.

Lastly, the added size, even while minimal, will of course make it incompatible with some holsters and pouches. Without a belt-clip option, this case seems pretty much targeted at people like me — those who prefer not to have cases or case-like trappings at all.

Again, just like the product name promises — this case is barely there.

Conclusion

For those who prefer nothing to come between them and our iPhones, the Case-Mate Barely There case is definitely worth a look. In the eternal compromise that comes between comfort and protection, Case-Mate strikes an excellent balance. And, since Apple in its infinitely looped wisdom only offers the iPhone 3G in black and white models, the Case-Mate is also a great way to splash some color on your unit while keeping things lean and still getting some added peace of mind.

Pros

• Strong and flexible
• Easy application and excellent fit
• Wide range of color choices

Cons

• Edges and inside could have better finish
• Not compatible with some dock-port accessories
• Not compatible with all holsters/pouches and no belt-clip option

TiPb Accessory Review Rating

The Case-Mate Dockster Leather Case for iPhone 3G is available and can be purchased in TiPb Store for $34.95. If you are looking for a case that is slim and dockable, then this case might be for you. Let’s see how it measures up after the break!

Design

Daily Use

Placing the case on your iPhone could not be any easier; simply slide the top end on, then slide the bottom end. There are no buttons to snap, no clips to latch; they just slide together easily. Once the two pieces of the car are together, they are secure. I did not have to worry about one side slipping or falling off. The other benefit of this case is it adds a little extra grip too without become too think. The leather feels really nice in your hands and solid plastic frame adds piece of mind if it is dropped.

Docking the iPhone is easy, simply slip off the bottom end and yo are in business. I was very surprised at how easy it was to do.

Conclusion

Pros:

• It is dockable!
• Attractive leather finish
• Sturdy plastic supportive frame
• Thin
• All ports are very easily accessible

Cons:

• I really can’t find any pertinent negatives with this case
• A variety of colors, currently black-only

TiPb’s Rating:

Let me start off by saying I’m not usually a fan of any protective skins for any cell phones that are currently on the market. I’ve found that Egrips for iPhone 3G have to sway me in a different direction, however, and I’ve found they can be quite valuable. If you’d like a more confident grip on your iPhone 3G, then Egrips available from The iPhone Blog Store for the price of $14.95, just may be what you are looking for.

For a more in depth look, keep reading after the break!

Design

Egrips are made from a specially formulated silicone elastomer that has an extreme amount of friction that prevents your iPhone 3G from sliding around on almost any surface, as long it is dry. You name it, it will stick — things like car seats, center consoles, counter tops, desktops, laptops and even your shirt sleeve. Egrips are only 0.5mm thick so if you decide these are for you, the days of bulky silicone skins and cases.

In the package you get 4 separate strips to apply to your iPhone 3G. The back piece, two pieces for each side of the home button, and one last piece for the upper right hand corner next to the handset speaker. You may be wondering, where is the piece for the left of the handset speaker? Well that’s an easy one to answer: there is none (it would cover the light sensors). Don’t fret just yet, you can still place your phone face down without it getting scratched. The three pieces do a fine job. Something else worth mentioning here is that Egrips comes in two variations: black (what I went with), or clear.

Usability

How many times have you set your iPhone 3G down on the passenger seat while you were driving only to take a turn and see your precious phone go flying off of the seat and crashing into the door or onto the floor? Scary moments, I know. I was a bit skeptical when I first received my Egrips but I put it to the test by placing my my iPhone 3G on the leather passenger seat in my car and took a nice quick ride. While I was nervous that my phone would go flying, to my surprise it didn’t move an inch. Success!

While some of you who don’t use a case may really enjoy Egrips on their own, I can understand there may be a concern for those who do use a case. I have eight or nine cases for my iPhone 3G, with the Egrips applied to my phone I was able to still use all of my holstered cases. Vertical or horizontal, it did not make a difference. For those of you who use hard cases or silicone cases, I am afraid you are out of luck. That add extra thickness of .05mm is just a bit too much for those types of cases.

A few more questions I had were: how long and how well would it stay on my iPhone 3G and would it stay clean? Honestly, I’ve only been testing out Egrips for about a week and I can say that I see no signs of them coming off anytime soon. None of the corners have peeled up or are showing any signs of that happening, which is a good thing. If you do want to remove it for whatever reason it does indeed come off without leaving any residue or damaging the phone in any way shape or form. Now the other all-important question: how clean would this sticky material actually stay over a period of time? Again, Egrips did not disappoint. What I expected was something similar to a silicone case. You put it in your pocket and when you remove it, it’s covered in lint. Not the case with Egrips, which was nice to see.

Conclusion

So if you are someone who likes the whole “naked” look of your iPhone 3G but you want a little more reassurance in terms of grip, Egrips are just the sort of product you should consider trying out. If you are someone who loves a hard case or simply wants the best protection you can get, you might want to pass on Egrips.

Pros

• Gives you excellent added grip
• Does not add much extra bulk to your iPhone
• Fairly cheap

Cons

• Does not offer the overall protection that a normal case can
• Hinders your ability to use some cases while Egrips are on iPhone

TiPb Rating

I’ve never found a good compact headset. The default Apple ear buds that ship with the iPhone (and every iPod) just don’t stay in my (must be mutant) ears. Likewise every other earbud I’ve tried had fallen out in the matter of seconds. Even the ones with over-ear hooks flop to the sides with annoying consistency. And Apple’s original in-ear headset? Didn’t quite fit in my ears so I gave them to my sister.

So it was with great and possible anticipointment that I decided to brave this world again and hope beyond hope that not only would Apple’s new In-Ear Headphones with Remote and Mic work well and be convenient, but that it would work at all.

Did it? Find out after the break!

Not iPhone Compatible

No, that’s not a typo. Apple clearly lists the new In-Ear Headphones with Remote and Mic as not iPhone compatible. However, I am using it with the iPhone and it does work, except for the volume controls (which double as the skip forward/back). Hopefully this will be addressed in the next iPhone OS update, as it’s a pretty puzzling omission.

Hardware

In the box are two plastic capsules. The first is a rounded triangle that contains the ear pieces in the center and the cord wrapped around the edge. With no indentation between the clear top and white plastic bottom, getting this capsule apart is tricky. If you intend to store your headphones in this handy container, the lack of an even more handy finger recess or other easy-opening point could prove consistently annoying.

The second capsule contains smaller and larger silicone ear tips in case the default ones don’t fit you properly. While also seamless clear and white plastic, the cylindrical makes this container much easier to open — ironic since you will likely need to open it much less frequently, if ever again.

Lastly, kudos to Apple for providing 2 extra replacement mesh caps for the headphones. Hopefully you’ll never need them, but if you do, having them included is priceless (well, technically, worth the price of a new headset!)

The headphones themselves are quintessential Apple — white, plastic, with that special firmness that resists tangling.

New to this model is a small control module attached. The center of the module has a recessed play/pause button. The outer outer sides provide the volume up and down buttons (which are NOT supported by the iPhone) and, if you double-click, track forward and back.

Daily Use

Over the last week, I’ve found Apple’s new In-Ear Headphones with Remote and Mic to be quite good, and an excellent value for the price (something many joke is impossible for Apple). Sound quality is very good, mic quality acceptable given the type of device, and best of all — they mostly stayed in my ears.

Not having used in-ear headphones before (because they never fit right for me), I did find the experience a little distracting at first. The sound of the cord being tapped, of eating, of everything going on in my head took me out of the experience. However, I’ve come to notice this less and less as time goes on.

I did find that, when walking around, I would typically take one earpiece out so I could hear and keep track of my surroundings. For people using them for outside, safety alone would make this a must.

Bonus for MacBook Users

When Apple introduced these near earphones, they were quick to point out that they’re fully supported by the new (late 2008) MacBook, MacBook Air, and MacBook Pro. In tests, I found them to work well for making Skype calls and recording audio. They supposedly allow iTunes control as well, but I could not get this functionality working on my late 2008 MacBook Air, however the internet seems to show many people having better luck with it (maybe my set has a problem with the volume control?). If they work for you, anyone owning a recent Apple laptop may consider these killer just for the multi-tasking functionality.

Conclusion

I finally found a compact headphones that I can use! Granted, there may be others towards the higher end, but for their price, especially with the added MacBook compatibility, these will become my new standard headphones. Now if only Apple would fix the iPhone compatibility…

Note: I haven’t had a chance to try them with VoIP on an iPod touch, but I hope to in the near future.

Pros

• Excellent sound quality for the price
• Elegant remote control features
• MacBook compatibility for some

Cons

• Limited iPhone compatibility

TiPb Review Rating

If you don’t know OtterBox, you should. They make high-quality, high-grade cases for the iPhone 3G that offer first-class protection. The OtterBox Defender Series for iPhone 3G ($49.95) is one of the most comprehensive cases ever designed for the iPhone 3G.

We had already taken a look at the OtterBox Defender Series for the Original iPhone, how does the updated version for the iPhone 3G hold up? Does it offer great protection? Is it just another case?

Read on for the rest of the review!

Design

The OtterBox comes in 4 different parts—each serving a purpose to cradle and protect the iPhone 3G. The base layer is a hard plastic shell (front and back). The second layer is a thick yet still soft layer of silicone that wraps around the aforementioned hard plastic shell. And finally, the last piece is a plastic cradle that adds another layer of protection but also doubles as a belt clip.

A thin sheet of plastic protects the screen, camera port, and Apple Logo while the headphone port, volume buttons, and sleep/wake ringer switch are protected via rubber caps. A thin cloth also covers the speakers.

Overall, the design of the OtterBox is carefully thought out and provides a perfect fit for every little nook, switch, and button on the iPhone 3G. Using a hard shell base layer with a silicone skin offers great protection while providing for even greater textile feel.

Usability

Obviously, the OtterBox Defender Series serves to a specific niche and those who have no need for such a rugged case would assume the case is in excess. But judging it from a pure protective stance—there are few options better. I have full confidence that the OtterBox case will protect my iPhone 3G in almost any likely scenario—a fall down the stairs, skidding across a hiking trail, and even a drop on concrete.

But because of its intricate design, care and exactness is needed when applying the case. The OtterBox is not an ordinary case that can be easily slipped off and on, you’ll have to fix the silicone to wrap around the intricacies of the plastic shell. Furthermore, the plastic shell seems to have a lot of clips and snaps that need to be put together. It’s a process to be sure, but after you’re done, this is protection at its finest.

Even more amazing is how the OtterBox maintains the iPhone 3G’s sensitivity and allows access to all its ports, buttons, and features. The touchscreen maintains the same sensitivity, I had absolutely no problem playing games and surfing the web with the OtterBox applied.

The buttons can be easily pressed except for the Home button. For some reason OtterBox decided to make a Home Button that cuts off the top of the circle. The plastic cover for the touchscreen can also get problematic if you leave some air space between it and the iPhone’s screen. Unsightly air bubbles would appear but I found this to be hit or miss and not particularly damaging.

The included belt clip is made from the same tough plastic as the hard shell and it locks the iPhone into it quite well. In fact, I often times had trouble pulling the iPhone out of the clip—the fit was that secure. The belt clip is able to rotate 360 degrees and the iPhone can be placed either be open faced or face backwards.

OtterBox has certainly improved on the deficiencies in the original iPhone, namely two issues that I had problems with are now fixed. The ringer switch is now accessible and the home button can be pressed when inserted into the belt clip. Bravo to OtterBox for listening to my complaints!

In all, the OtterBox offers as close to complete protection and coverage of every part of the iPhone. If you’re looking for superb protection or live an outdoor lifestyle, this case is truly one of the best available.

Final Thoughts

I’m a huge fan of OtterBox products because they put care into their design and they execute extremely well. The silicone seems to be of higher grade than basic silicone cases—offering better texture, thicker protection, and doesn’t seem to stretch as much. I definitely feel like OtterBox succeeded in creating a case that can offer maximum protection without sacrificing usability.

The one downfall is obviously price. At $49.95 it is a fairly steep cost to pay for an iPhone case. But compared with other cases priced near the Defender, the Defender offers an infinite amount more protection. Though it does add considerable amount of thickness, if you’re looking for a case that protects your iPhone from the elements—thickness should be expected.

Also, it cannot be fully submerged under water, a definite shortcoming considering its target market. However, with all things considered, the Otterbox Defender for iPhone 3G is great implementation of protection without compromise. All of the iPhone’s features are present with an unparalleled level of protection. I would consider this a buy for anyone who’s lifestyle is rugged, planning an outdoor trip, or is looking for the ultimate protection for their iPhone.

PROS

• Superb Protection
• Soft Silicone Feel
• Everything Protected, Every Feature Still Usable

CONS

• Bulky
• Pricey

FINAL RATING:

[This is an official Smartphone Experts Round Robin post! Every day you reply here, you're automatically entered for a chance to win an iPhone 3G, Case-Mate Naked Case, and Motorola H9 Bluetooth Headset! Full contest rules here!]

After 4 weeks sampling Google’s Android G1, Palm’s (HTC’s) Treo (Windows Mobile) Pro, HTC’s Windows Mobile FUZE, and RIM’s BlackBerry Bold, it’s back, and I’m back.

Boom.

A lot has happened since Dieter ripped the still beeping iPhone 3G from my cold, not-even-dead hand. Promo codes hit the App Store. iFart apps did to (and made a killing — sigh). And, of course, Apple released a little something called firmware 2.2.

Admittedly, I cheated a bit. I checkout out the new firmware and the new Google Maps, but I really haven’t had the chance to use iPhone OS 2.2 as my “daily driver”, not until now.

I’ve reviewed the iPhone software several times now, for 2.0, 2.1, and 2.2, so I’ll spare you the regurgitation, because something else has happened to: I’ve spent time with all those other smartphones. I’ve experienced some things still unavailable on the iPhone, some I’ve really liked, others… well, check the videos for the Android G1, Treo Pro, HTC FUZE, and BlackBerry Bold if you haven’t already.

Instead, I’m going to focus on that: returning to the iPhone and looking at it again through eyes now widened by our sibling sites’ signature devices. And I’m going to start after the jump!

iPhone vs. Android

When it comes to the Android, everything seems to boil down to “openness” — unlike the iPhone, which is strictly controlled by Apple and the App Store, pretty much anyone who wants to (and knows Java) can code for Android and give away (and maybe eventually sell) what they want, where the want, and how they want. (Within reason, Google still has a kill switch all their own.)

But big deal. Android’s openness is cliched to the point that that the strawman is wincing. I’m going to propose that neither open nor proprietary, chaos nor order are inherently good or bad, and more importantly, really matter to the end user. Both have advantages and drawbacks — it is what’s ultimately brought forth from each platform that matters (the iPhone, after all, has a Darwin kernel, OpenGL, and other non-proprietary code at its core).

Sure, developers want to express themselves with as little restriction as possible, but they also want to feed their families. Consumers want that next great paradigm-shifting application but they download fart gags in droves. (Unless I missed the memo saying those were one and the same?)

So I’m taking the App Store vs. Android Market off the table. Likewise, I’m ditching the infinite possible Android hardware options vs. the iPhone’s singularity of form and function. Android will give developers more options but more headaches, users more choices but more confusion. Wash.

So what did my week with the G1 teach me about the iPhone? Apple needs to worry about cloud services.

Push Gmail is nice. Push Gmail is fine. Having a separate Gmail app is a dumb idea, and Gmail’s IMAP implementation is so buggy, every time I get an “invalid certificate” or “too many concurrent connection” error I consider abandoning it forever, Contacts are a disgrace, and everything has been in beta beyond the point of embarrassment, but here’s the thing: Google owns the cloud and they’re beginning to show it with Android.

I’ve said before that one big advantage the iPhone has is it gets Google as well as Apple, while Android gets only Google, but that may not always be the case. Sure, Google wants the eyeballs (and advertising dollars — never forget their core business) of the iPhone’s user base, much as they do Windows Mobile, BlackBerry, and every other platform mobile and otherwise, but that may only be until such time as they own the platform as well.

MobileMe is a start. We can spare the botched launch jokes — for a few months now MobileMe has been solid, and while it provides some killer functionality for Mac users (Back to My Mac, Mac Sycn, etc.), using the Android really made me think Apple has to up its Cloud game and fast.

First, iPhone needs more robust email functionality. Skip the non-standard labels, but give me filters/rules, the ability to star/flag, and otherwise raise the on-device and web-based feature power to desktop Mail.app levels with Gmail-type power and even better usability.

Get CalDAV really rocking, let me share and subscribe to/publish calendars. Again, iCal power in my hand and on the web.

CardDAV would be nice too, with the same sharing, subscribing, and publishing abilities for contacts, with status rolled in for good measure.

And get those notes syncing, along with the Tasks already built in.

Sure, Android doesn’t do all this, but I’m positive it will. Maybe not Android 2.0, maybe not even 3.0, but as soon as Google stops pulling a Microsoft and actually gets their act integrated, they’ll go from owning the cloud to leveraging it. That, above open markets and variable form factors, is what I’ll really be keeping my Android eye on, and that is what I want to see Apple not only compete with, but raise the bar again in terms of elegance of design and function.

iPhone vs. Palm Treo Pro/HTC FUZE

I’m putting the two HTC-built, Windows Mobile running smartphones together. Blame Palm, not me. Actually, blame both Microsoft and Palm because as much as the Palm OS was abandoned to the point that we couldn’t even include it in the round robin, Windows Mobile showed me its aging platform wasn’t that far from a similar fate. Sure, Palm OS 2.0 Nova, and Windows Mobile 7 are both on the horizon, but as of this writing, both are still vaporware, and both have suffered similar grand promises and heartbreaking delays to the point of asking: it’s 2008, do you know where your 3rd party developers are? (Hint: browsing the AppDroid MarkStore).

In all fairness, however, I’m less worried about Windows Mobile because, well, Microsoft has a winzillion dollars to keep funding it, and like Google they’re investing a ton of that cash in the cloud. So, while Live! Mesh Azure is a near impenetrable clusterfrak, with integration almost as badly broken as its branding, it won’t always be. They’re building data centers like QuickyMarts and Ballmer’s right, they’ll just keep coming and coming, and they could eventually nail it. I could very well get my ZuneBoxPhone Live! one day.

So, just like I’m taking a pass on the openness and flexibility of Android, I’m skipping the old standbys of power and configurability with Windows Mobile. Overhead and complicating clutter render them zero-sum gains anyway.

What will I focus on? Apple’s 360 degree integration, from Final Cut Pro to iTunes to AppleTV to MobileMe is so far unmatched, but it’s by no means unmatchable. Microsoft, with its Kraken-like tentacles, could go a full 520 degrees. We can make all the clumsy giant jokes we like, but getting crushed by a clumsy giant doesn’t make you any less crushed.

Case in point, the HTC Touch HD. We didn’t get it in the round robin (it’s not, and won’t be, officially available in North America), but it shows what type of technology can be put into an iPhone-sized package. I’ve repeated far too often already that I want (and fully expect) to see an iPhone HD come WWDC in June, 2009. Keeping pace in the hardware war is just one step. Others will involve some patents Apple has already filed, especially with streaming video (TiVo meets Slingbox).

Notice I’m talking about entertainment in a Microsoft segment, not Exchange, not remote device management, not office documents, because a) Microsoft is pushing hard in the consumer products space and that’s where Apple dominates, and b) this isn’t the BlackBerry segment, in which — quite frankly — those subjects would be more appropriate given market share.

iPhone vs. BlackBerry Bold

So let’s not talk about Exchange, remote device management, or office documents here either, b’okay. Consider them the last of my stereotypical aversions. As well as BlackBerry handles those tasks — and handle them well it irrefutably does — there’s something BlackBerry does infinitely better that Apple needs to consider and contend with: it’s creates CrackBerry.com members.

That’s not a sibling site plug. As much as the NOC and BIS/BES is an overly-proprietary single-point-of-failure, security and privacy bag half-filled with hurt, it creates an environment that once you get into, you can’t easily get out of.

It’s not that the BlackBerry calls to you. Having something blink at me is not nearly as compelling as having an iPhone just sitting there, not telling you if you have to pick it up or not — ensuring you check it when you may not even have to. It’s that once you get the true push, once you get the direct PIN to PIN messaging, it becomes like a community. Your sales team might all have them, but your friends and family might all have them as well.

We’ve seen the same thing with Twitter. People go where their friends are, and once you have the momentum of community, it creates a significant barrier of exit. Who wants to leave their community behind? It’s why Pownce and Jaiku and other status engines have failed.

While Apple should be applauded for embracing open standards like IMAP IDLE and built amazing technology with OS X 10.5 Server, they’ve done relatively little to promote any sort of community around the iPhone, and what little they have done is handled by third parties via the App Store.

This from the company that told people to Think Different. That created the Cult of Mac. I spoke about the cloud with Android and the integration with Windows Mobile, and here Apple needs a bit of both. And come on, it’s not like snooty Apple fans wouldn’t jump at the chance to be “official” snooty Apple fans.

I’m not the first to suggest this. I’m probably not the hundred and first. But Apple needs to put a little addiction of their own in the iPhone. Mobile iChat would be a great start. Give MobileMe Lite away for free with every iPhone, tied to an always on, multitasking Mobile iChat (supporting not only open Jabber and proprietary AIM and iChat protocols, but Twitter as well — Dieter’s right about cross-platform presence ruling it all), and toss in a super silky smooth CoreLocation-powered social iNetwork along with it. Make PIN seem Paleolithic. Make the NOC the next Friendster.

Conclusion

The Smartphone Experts Round Robin was a stroke of genius. Not only does it let sometimes myopic editors experience the greater gadget world, but it hopefully brings our readers with us (and gives some lucky winners some free smartphones for their trouble). Sometimes we think our chosen device does something really well and don’t realize just how well (and sometimes how differently) other device do the same. Likewise, sometimes we have gripes about our device that turn out to be far worse elsewhere.

It’s a reality check of the first order. Android’s potential, Windows Mobile’s legacy, BlackBerry’s connection, and in the end?

Thanks to everyone on the Android Central, Treo Central, CrackBerry.com, and WMExperts forums for all their help, my fellow editors Casey, Jennifer, and Kevin, and our editor-in-chief Dieter Bohn for their many insights.

A month and a marathon of reviews later, I love my iPhone more than ever, but also think I understand it more than ever as well. And most importantly, I know what I want to see from it, and from Apple, for the next Smartphone Experts Round Robin in 2009.

[This is an official Smartphone Experts Round Robin post! Every day you reply here, you're automatically entered for a chance to win an iPhone 3G, Case-Mate Naked Case, and Motorola H9 Bluetooth Headset! Full contest rules here!]

Black and white. Night and day. Left and right. BlackBerry Bold and iPhone 3G. For the penultimate Round Robin, I set aside my multi-touch no Qwerty for Kevin’s touch-less Cadillac of Querty’s.

And…? I loved it and hated it. How utterly appropriate. Not to be too tale of two-cities about it, but it was both the best of the Round Robin devices for me and the worst. Google’s Android G1 tried to do everything but beta’d all of it (give them time though!). The HTC Fuze tried to shellack over Windows Mobile to make it more like the iPhone and — in terms of usability — tripped and fell all over itself in the attempt. The Palm Treo Pro, while unabashedly Windows Mobile, was still a touch screen, allowing for some level of direct comparison, and proving just how far behind Windows Mobile’s interface has fallen.

But the BlackBerry Bold is a different beast entirely. Direct comparison is impossible. A pager vs. a music player, all grown up and bedecked in smartphone tech. Both devices can do similar things, but their strengths are almost polar opposites, as are the approaches they take in delivering them.

Kevin’s already written 7500 words on that, however, requiring few if any from me. So rather than rehash, or duplicate what the previous Round Robin editors have said better before me, I’m going to change it up a bit (yes, again) and look at things from a different perspective. And I’ll do it after the break!

Hardware

The BlackBerry Bold is the nicest hardware I’ve yet experienced in the Round Robin. The other devices were a little too plastic, a little too creaky. I think battery doors contribute to that since structural elements can no longer be braced to the back, not to mention hinges for the sliders. With the Bold, I expected something as good as the iPhone’s singular slab of glass and metal and high-density backing.

I didn’t quite get that, however. The Bold is lighter than I anticipated, and some of that lightness just made it feel a tad below the iPhone in build quality to me. That slight aside aside, the whole device speaks — nay, screams — luxury. The faux leather, the glossy back trimmed in sliver (yeah, RIM totally ripped the look off, but they did it because it works). It really is the executive smartphone.

And yeah, it’s positively covered in buttons. Full Qwerty keyboard (though it misses some of the dedicated keys other devices had, like period, search, etc.), left and right (or plain and studded) convenience keys, green and red phone keys, BlackBerry (menu) and back (yes!) key, volume rocker and mute button. It’s even got left and right fake buttons (okay, yeah, they’re actually contact points, but they look like buttons which is a slight design failure).

For my tastes, there are actually too many buttons, and I found it too easy to hit them and thus, too easy to do things by accident. One of the convenience buttons defaults to voice control, and so I kept getting a very helpful lady asking to help me do what I didn’t want to do, when I didn’t want to do it. Thanks for that!

Also, while I’m no BlackBerry ninja, I couldn’t find a way to quickly lock the device in the manner of the iPhone sleep/wake button. I could hold down the red phone button, but that seemed to actually turn the services off. Otherwise, the screen would turn off, but if I bumped the wrong button, it would wake up and start to do things as I was pocketing it (again, most often that helpful lady, this time from the rather intrusive confines of my pockets!)

Oh — and it has a nice screen. Expecting me to gush? I would but after 4 other editors, what’s left to say? The iPhone is 160dpi, the Bold is 217dpi or so.

A closer comparison, though, would be the Bold and the iPod “fatty” Nano of the previous generation which had a similar horizontal screen above the control area (substitute scroll wheel for Qwerty). Inarguably it’s a gorgeous display with nary a jaggy in sight, however… it’s too small for my tastes. I like the iPhone screen size. It’s the 52″ HD LCD to the Bold’s 37″. Unless you’re in a cramped sliver of a condo, most people would prefer the physically bigger screen, and I find the same holds true on the mobile. Now, give me that 217dpi on a 3.5 in screen and we’d be talking (Touch HD, specifically).

The BlackBerry Life

I’m not reviewing the OS. It’s a Java Micro Edition pseudo-OS and despite some limp signs of life in the last (and curiously first) BlackBerry developers conference, both its limitations and the API shenanigans engaged in by RIM (which makes Apple’s SDK seem positively straightforward) make it exactly where Dieter pegged it to be: at its zenith much as Garnet was for the Palm Treo 650. It does what it can do, and as a platform I’m not sure it’s capable of much more. RIM should be applauded, and should desperately be working on a next generation OS of their own deep beneath Waterloo way.

What I am reviewing is the BlackBerry lifestyle, which is what is required to use this device. It’s not called push because it alerts you the moment data has been sent in your general direction, it’s called push because it will shove you both in how you must work to make use of that data, and the hold that data begins to take on you.

I’ve joked about this before, but it really is preemptive and interruptive. PING! You’ve got mail. PING! You’ve got BlackBerry messenger. PING! You’ve got SMS/MMS (yup, it has MMS!). PING! You’ve got… on and on and on… If you have any heft to your contact list, and size to your mail pipe, that little blinking red light is going to start to pwn you. Kevin says it’s compelling. It’s the crack. It makes you not want to put it down, and if you have, to pick it back up again often and always.

And I’m not sure that’s a Good Thing.

But back to that in a moment. More than just pushing your data, the BlackBerry records and pushes state on that data. If you’re messaging, for example, not only are you alerted to it being sent, but to it being delivered, being read, and even when the other person is typing a response to it.

Some call this accountability. Your boss, your partner, your fellow communicator knows what you’ve seen and when you’ve seen it. And it scares the privacy out of me. Sure, it’s not dissimilar to IM status in many applications, but then I heavily restrict my IM usage as well. It’s like having that boss, partner, or fellow communicator staring over your shoulder 24/7. Frankly, it’s creepy. Don’t just get off my lawn, get out from over my shoulder!

Back to Ping Death. I have no attention span. Give me a distraction and I’ll take it and ask for another. I need to focus in a world that does everything it can to split my focus. See, it’s not that I don’t understand the crack in Crackberry Kevin’s metaphor. I understand it too well. And the last thing an addictive personality needs is another addiction.

Slice it this way: demanding attention is different than on-demand. In my day job, we have a term called “data explosion” where so much information comes at you so fast it becomes paralytic. The BlackBerry is a little like that. Kevin has said the BlackBerry is an on-the-go device and the iPhone is a stop-and-use device. I had the exact opposite experience.

With the iPhone, I listen to podcasts or audio books as I commute. I occasionally read the email previews when at traffic lights or when walking downtown. I glance at the SMS previews likewise. (I wish I could do likewise with iChats, but more on that next week). I can surf the web or play some casual game while I’m waiting in line. It fits into the broad or broken moments of my day.

The Bold breaks my day. If I have 3 people hitting me on BlackBerry Messenger all at once, I can’t handle that exchange “on-the-go”. I have to stop, parse each message, make sure I’m in the right place for each one, and respond appropriately. And the little red blinker makes certain I really want to jump in and engage with those 3 people post-haste — even if I’m supposed to be finishing this review. The more important the person is to me, the more demanding. RIM really nailed the social aspect harder than even MySpace or Facebook, and perhaps rivaled only by always-on Twitter. Once you get a bunch of people all on BBM, it’s like being at a really good party and the push notifications are like shots. You don’t want to leave — but eventually you’ll collapse.

With the iPhone, I’ve turned on push but turned off notification. Everything is there and instantly available — but on my terms, in my time. I am master of the machine, not slave to it.

On the BlackBerry I could do the same, but then I feel like I don’t really have (or need) a BlackBerry any more. Oh, sure I can edit office docs, but I could do that on Windows Mobile (and too be honest, I bought a Windows Mobile device a couple years ago for that very reason and found it crippled and frustrating enough never to bother.)

So, take this as my stand against the culture of interuption, for which the BlackBerry could most easily be the poster child. This is why I mentioned at the beginning that the Blackberry is the non-iPhone I both loved and hated the most in the Round Robin. It’s not just that I think the age of physical keyboards is over (the Storm — which I’ll get to in a follow up — gives a keyboard-less BlackBerry option), it demands an entire shift in lifestyle. It just works, in all the triple-entendre’d terror that implies.

Conclusion

I won’t lie. I’m going to miss the Bold, and the BBM, and the instant connection to all my friends and contacts. But at the same time I’m going to enjoy getting my life back. A good friend of mine who works in a super-critical position in a huge company is a BlackBerry user and as much as he loves it, he hates it with a breathing passion because he knows every call could be his boss asking why he hasn’t done something about what the boss already knows he’s seen, read, or otherwise been pushed. He’s highly placed in this company, with exponentially more people beneath him than above, but we all know it’s the bosses (or girl/boyfriend/spouses) call that comes most often, and with the biggest impact. I can understand why people are so passionate about the BlackBerry, but I can also understand why people sue for overtime when their companies “give” them BlackBerry’s to use. Crackberry is a very apt nickname.

Apendix: Sleeping with the Frenemy

A few people I know duel-wield the iPhone and the BlackBerry. To get a sense of their “best of both worlds” approach, I spent a few days Bold-only as the Round Robin demands, and the weekend slinging one on each hip.

To first address something we get a lot of in the forums, the iPod touch/BlackBerry nirvana is an urban myth. Absent 3G and GPS you’ll be missing out on one of the most exciting aspects of the iPhone: ubiquitous location-based services. The Bold has the same guts, but it’s user experience for this technology just doesn’t compare, while the iPod touch’s WiFi restriction makes it unusable for large stretches. I had an iPod touch originally. It took me all of a week to give it away and get an iPhone.

Back to iPhone+Bold. It’s an interesting approach but one I ultimately found would be too cumbersome and expensive. Since I won’t switch SIMs every 2 minutes, I’d need 2 plans, one with BIS (which I won’t rant on now, but which deserves it for being both powerful and punishing to consumers — you shouldn’t need anything other than a standard data plan to run a smartphone in 2008! Work that out RIM!). I’m also a Mac user, and while RIM is improving Mac support (and aren’t anywhere near as negligent as Windows Mobile) it’s nowhere near there yet. Since many Mac users are also CrackBerry addicts, and proven price-insensitives and brand-loyalists, ignoring them (us) is just bad business.

Bottom line, I don’t have a handy bat-buckled utility belt, nor do I want to be perpetually clad in vests-of-many-pockets, so convergence devices are important to me. I would only ever carry one phone. In this world, it’s the iPhone. In another world (where my lifespan would not doubt be shorter and my stress level way higher), it might just have been the Bold.

[This is an official Smartphone Experts Round Robin post! Every day you reply here, you're automatically entered for a chance to win an iPhone 3G, Case-Mate Naked Case, and Motorola H9 Bluetooth Headset! Full contest rules here!]

Our Public Frenemy Number One continues his assault on the iPhone blog! Not only did Kevin post his video preview of the iPhone 3G, spend time on our forums learning what abuse really is, and even joined in for our iPhone Live! Podcast, he’s gone and done a near epic 7500 word iPhone 3G full, final review.

Fanboy much?

But what did he think of it? Did the man with two-tic-tactile thumbs-of-fury learn how to type on glass? Did he master the Super Monkey Ball? Did he get lost browsing “just the internet”? And did he finally, fully restore his childlike sense of wonder, something years of BlackBerrius Pusheruptus all but productivity’d out of him?

Check out his review to find out (hint: he calls it the Ah Frak Phone!), post a Crackberry.com comment for a chance to win the BlackBerry Bold, and post your thoughts on Kevin’s thoughts right here for a chance to win an iPhone 3G.

What? You want MORE chances to win? Head on over to the Crackberry.com forums to help me out with the Bold (the touchscreen isn’t working!) and then hit TiPb’s iPhone forums to give TreoCentral’s Jennifer a hand — she’s got the iPhone 3G this week!

Sonos is a “multi-room music system” that lets you wirelessly stream music to any “zone” in your house either independently or synchronized together using a centralized controller. And, oh yeah, that centralized controller can be an iPhone or iPod Touch.

Chad, with the help of his friend, gave us a first look at using Sonos with the iPhone in lieu of its traditional controller, and raised some great pros (total iPhone control of all music, in every room, of your Sonos-enabled home) and cons (iPhone relegated merely to control, and not leveraged for the media-powerhouse it is in its own right as well) about the experience. So great, in fact, that when Sonos offered TiPb a limited-time demo to test it out, I jumped at the chance.

Since I’m not a Sonos user, not an audiophile, and not particularly interested in struggling anymore with complicated setup procedures, I thought it would be ideal to approach this from a new-user perspective, and one used to the iPhone ecosystem where things (often) “just work”.

How did it go? Find out after the break!

Hardware

Delivered in the Sonos box we received were two ZonePlayer 90s and one ZoneBridge. They were kind enough to offer test speakers, but I had that covered.

ZoneBridge

For Sonos to function, at least one of the ZonePlayers needs to be plugged directly into your WiFi router. If you don’t happen to have your router conveniently located to one of your sound systems, Sonos provides the ZoneBridge. Just hook that up instead and then put your ZonePlayers wherever else you want them. An elegant enough solution until the ZonePlayers can lose that one-hardwire requirement and go pure WiFi, which given the speeds and range of 802.11N shouldn’t be far off. (Right now Sonos prefers to create their own, exclusive Mesh sub-network off the hard-line).

ZonePlayer 90

With the router very close to one of the sound systems I was testing, I could skip the ZoneBridge and plug the ZonePlayer 90 directly into an Airport Extreme. I had to yank out another device to make room for it, but the ZP90 includes a second network jack to give any such de-placed components a new sub-home.

The device itself is nice looking, a white rounded square shape familiar to anyone who likes the Apple aesthetic, and it sits raised on four molded legs. The small size, at 5.4 x 5.5 x 2.9 in, means it doesn’t take up a lot of space and can fit in pretty much anywhere (no doubt, however, someone somewhere will complain it’s not in rack-mount friendly format — thank goodness for that!) The front sports a mute button and a volume rocker, and a second Sonos logo (the first being on the top). Design quibble: the buttons, especially the iconography, isn’t as beautiful as the device itself, and twice as many logos is half as strong branding. (Especially when the brand was already smartly enough chosen to be readable backwards and forwards, upside and down).

The back holds the ports. From the left is power, RCA stereo in and out, 2 network ports, and digital coax and optical out. This means it should support any home theater, stereo system, self-powered speakers, and other similar sound equipment. The RCA in also means iPods (with the audio out cables), DVD players, TVs, etc. can be plugged in and streamed throughout the system as well.

Unlike many Apple products, the ZP 90 came with some cables! Along with the power cord were RCA connectors and a network cable. No digital cables, unfortunately, so BYO coax or optical if that’s how your sound system is set up.

Setup was extremely simple. Just plug the power into the ZP 90, attach a network cable between at least one ZP 90 and your router, and plug in your sound system via any one of the input ports listed above. It took all of a few seconds. If you have more than one ZP 90, the steps are the same as above, minus the hard wire router connection — WiFi only, baby!

ZonePlayer 120

Though we didn’t test one, it should be noted Sonos also has a ZonePlayer 120 available that is similar to the ZP 90 but includes a built in amplifier and direct speaker connections so it can basically serve as its own music system — no pre-existing home theater, self-powered speakers, or other audio source required.

Software

Setup

The Sonos Controller iPhone app is available, of course, from the iTunes App Store. That means it can be downloaded directly to the iPhone or iPod Touch, or downloaded and synced over via iTunes on the desktop.

Note: Sonos has an installation CD that you can load up on your desktop or laptop to setup the system, but since this is an iPhone blog, I skipped this step and decided to with a full on iPhone-only setup.

Once the Sonos Controller app is installed on the iPhone, tapping it gives you the option to set up your zone. If you’ve ever used a setup wizard, you’ll feel right at home. Hold down the mute and volume up buttons on the ZP 90, the iPhone app detects them, and setup is just a few simple taps and roll-selectors away. If you’re setting up more than one zone, which it asks whenever you finish setting up the last on, just repeat the process.

It couldn’t be more simple.

Use

Sonos deserves high-marks for the app. It respects iPhone design and user experience paradigms, looks great, and is easy and most importantly — intuitive to use. Right away they present a very familiar iPhone media browser where you can choose what kind of music you want to listen to, with each choice sliding over narrower sub-options until you ultimately get exactly what you want. This could range from choosing radio to a genre of music to a radio station playing that genre. In addition to internet radio, Sonos (if you install the desktop software) also supports your existing computer-based music collection (though not iTunes DRM-protected content — record label FAIL again!), as well as services like Audible.com, Napter, and select others.

Don’t want to dig through menus? Not a problem. That’s why search was invented, and why the iPhone app supports it. Just type in the title or some keywords and, if it’s available, it will pop right up.

Once you find something, you can easily add it to “favorites” so you can quickly return to it later.

Select which “zones” the music should play in and, once it starts, volume controls are available to get it to just the right level. Each “zone” can be independent — for example an MP3 file can be playing in the bedroom and internet radio could be on in the living room, and the iPhone app offers complete control over both.

Alternatively, “zones” can be combined so that the same content, in perfect synchronicity, and be played in multiple or all “zones” simultaneously. Perfect for that party that refuses to stay contained in a single room.

The interface even shows which “zones” are active, so if power is turned off on one system, you can tell it’s unavailable. Plug it back in, and it pops back up.

The Sonos Controller app even supports queuing, so you can create a on-the-go playlist for your streaming music/sound content.

Again, as Chad said, it would be nice if the iPhone itself could also be set up as a portable “zone”, carrying the same synched content with you around the house, and playing along with the same queue, but if that was an option, we couldn’t find it. Maybe version 2.0?

Conclusion

The Sonos system just works, and with the iPhone controller app, it makes Apple’s amazing convergence device all the more amazingly convergent. Would that my home were bigger, and I had more friends to party with more often (like in all those spy movies where the target is always throwing a huge bash just conveniently that very night — that’s the scale I’m thinking of!)

What Sonos has accomplished with this app right out of the gate is awesome. If anyone already has Sonos and an iPhone or iPod Touch, and doesn’t have this app… what’s the matter with you? Go get it now! If anyone has an iPhone and multiple rooms in which they want a highly scalable, superbly controllable audio experience, Sonos is definitely something to look at (or to ask for as a holiday gift! — perfect timing!)

Pricing and Availability

Sonos is available online via the Sonos Store, or at many fine electronic retailers. MSRP for the ZoneBridge is $99, and the ZonePlayer is $349. Of course, street prices can and often will be lower. Bundles are also available, although I didn’t see any without a controller, which iPhone/iPod Touch owners no longer need. A tad pricier than the previous generation, but these are likely premiums for the latest technology, and will no doubt drop over time as all technology prices do.

Rating

[This is an official Smartphone Experts Round Robin post! Every day you reply here, you're automatically entered for a chance to win an iPhone 3G, Case-Mate Naked Case, and Motorola H9 Bluetooth Headset! Full contest rules here!]

The iPhone 3G drives Crackberry Kevin nuts, no doubt about it. Sure, he likes a few aspects of it, including the inimitable App Store, but the push buzz when he’s talking, the lack of a back (button, that is), and a million other things add up to make him officially re-dub the device the Ah-[Redacted] phone.

While WMExpert Dieter kept hammering away about the openess of the platform, Crackberry Kevin focuses more on BlackBerry-type productivity. But that’s the beauty of the Round Robin — we get so many looks at so many different devices/platforms from so many different points of view.

Coming from a turbo tactile typing, push email addiction like the BlackBerry Bold, does Kevin have some legitimate gripes? Or is this just a case of post-Storm-FAIL sour grapes?

Confession: many of the things he picks on, we’ve complained about numerous times on TiPb already. But we’re allowed to offer constructive criticism about our beloved device. Can CrackBerry get away with it?

NOT. Head on over to CrackBerry.com and let him know what you think before El Jobso himself decides to call Public Frenemy #1 up and give him a little Apple-powered “Skidoosh!” You could even win a BlackBerry Bold for your trouble!

Note: Some people are having trouble seeing the video (comes back as unavailable). It’s working fine for me, but if it’s not for you, please let me know in the comments, and please try this direct YouTube Video link.

[This is an official Smartphone Experts Round Robin post! Every day you reply here, you're automatically entered for a chance to win an iPhone 3G, Case-Mate Naked Case, and Motorola H9 Bluetooth Headset! More below!]

Did I need to review two HTC Windows Mobile devices in a row? Would it have been better to have the G1 or Bold in between, or would I then have back-to-back front-facing Qwerty or Slider bloat? I don’t know. Last week’s Palm Treo Pro and this week’s HTC FUZE are differentiated not only by form factor, but with the FUZE’s addition of Touch Flo 3D (which, during the video shoot, I came to lovingly re-brand “Press Really Hard Stammer 2D”).

Fair enough, coming from an iPhone I challenge any non-Apple device’s ability to deliver the same experience. They can’t. But that’s the point of the Round Robin: for each editor to look at every other device from their own smartphone’s point of view.

Will the humungous slide-out keyboard be enough joy to cancel out the Touch Flo blues? I don’t know yet; we’ll find out together in my final, full review later this week.

Meanwhile, check out the video above, and if I’m wrong, mean, or just stupid, let me have it in the comments, or — better yet — head on over to the WMExperts Forums and help me see the error of my ways.

Likewise, Crackberry Kevin is suffering without his keyboard and trackball, so be sure to give him all the assistance you can before he he comes gunning for our iPhone in his own video!

Doing so, of course, gives you a chance to win the iPhone 3G and HTC FUZE… and a ton of other cool smartphones and accessories. Prize details after the jump…

Every day you comment here, you get one entry to win not only a supra-shiny iPhone 3G, but the Case-Mate Naked Case which allows full touch through access to the iPhone’s amazing screen. Smartphone Outlet is also kicking in the revolutionary Motorola H9 Bluetooth Headset AND a runner-up prize, $50 coupon good at any SPE store, including the new Smartphone Outlet, where you can find refurb Smartphone Accessories at very (very!) low prices.

Check out our full contest rules!

[This is an official Smartphone Experts Round Robin post! Every day you reply here, you're automatically entered for a chance to win an iPhone 3G, Case-Mate Naked Case, and Motorola H9 Bluetooth Headset! Full contest rules here!]

Of all the reviews I have to write as part of the Smartphone Experts Round Robin, I have a feeling this one is going to be the hardest. See, I was a Palm OS user since the Palm V and stuck with the platform through the Treo 680, before switching to the original iPhone.

That, year after year after year, Palm still hasn’t been able to ship a successor to Palm OS Garnet is inconceivable to me to the degree that what I’m now holding in my hand, gorgeous and powerful though it may be — isn’t a Palm, isn’t a Treo. Not really. I was funny about that in my video. I’m actually more than a little sad about it real life.

The Treo 800 series should really be running Palm OS 2.0 “Nova”. Since it’s not, however, I’m reviewing an HTC handset running Windows Mobile 6.1 — something I’ll be doing almost immediately again with the HTC FUZE/PRO.

How to handle that? To avoid redundancy, I’m going to stick reviewing hardware — a front facing Qwerty this time, slider the next — and breaking up the software into two parts. This review (and thanks to Dieter for the idea!) will focus on the traditional Palm core — the four pillars of PIM (Personal Information Management). The FUZE review will cover everything else Windows Mobile (media, apps, maps, etc.)

And I’m going to begin, after the break!

Hardware

The Palm Treo Pro hardware is a real departure. Gone is the little gray box that debuted with the Treo 600. The big honking antenna disappeared with the 680/750, but now even the legacy Treo 800 inset screen and gunship good looks have been given the heave ho.

Some have said this is because HTC basically designed and built the unit. Whatever the reason, it looks fresh and modern. It moves Treo — physically at least — into the next generation.

It looks good. It feels good. The form factor is very nice in the hand. Like the Google Android G1 (also by HTC) it does feel a tad creaky, but I’m beginning to think that a) the iPhone just spoiled me for build quality and b) plastic with removable battery equals a little bit of creak.

Buttons and Keys

A few niggles. The camera button is oddly placed. Having a physical button is okay, and I’m sure some appreciate it, but putting it below the volume rocker is non-sensical to me. The iPhone, by contrast, puts the mute button there, so all volume controls are grouped, and you can feel if the mute is in-line or off-line with the volume rocker, letting you immediately understand state.

On the opposite side is a WiFi on/off button. I’m not sure why it’s there, or why it even exists. An “airplane mode” style toggle, maybe, but why just the WiFi radio? Is that any more necessary than Blue Tooth or cell? I really don’t know.

The keyboard, on the other hand, while a little cramped compared to the 680, is a huge improvement just based on the key material itself. Gone are those hard, rounded nasty little nubs I could never really type on, and in their place is something… like gummy bears. I can’t really describe it, but boy does it improve my typing experience. Keep this material and expand the keyboard back to full Treo size, and Palm has a real winner on their hands (and in ours!)

That said, the iPhone has really spoiled me off hard keyboards and the Treo has re-affirmed that fact. I only need the keyboard for text entry, and after I’m done, I was just sitting there staring at it staring back at me. “Go away! I’m done with you!”, I felt like saying, “I want to watch some video now and you’re in the way!”. But it couldn’t go away. I’m not sure if the FUZE or Bold will pull me back from this precipice, but for some types of users, I’m thinking the era of hard keyboards is over.

As to the hard buttons — they depress me a little. And confuse me. The original Palm PDA’s were pretty much perfect at this, but it’s something Palm has struggled with since transitioning to the Treo line. My 680, for example, had a Green, Red, and Phone button (3 buttons just for the phone!). The Treo Pro has a Green, Red, Windows, and OK button. None of these seem optimal to me. And hitting Red (end call) to get to the Today screen seems counter-intuitive. So does every button but the center of the 5-way and OK serving to wake the device, with the center unlocking it. I realize we need different buttons to wake and unlock, but the center just seems so natural.

Screen

Windows Mobile Treo has finally caught up with the Palm OS 650! Yup, we have 320×320. It’s unfortunate that it happened around the same time the Bold shipped 480×360 and the HTC Touch HD dropped the 800×480 bomb, but welcome to the 21st century! Speaking of which — FLUSH! This is something I’ve wanted on a Palm for a long time, and boy does it deliver. After Kevin’s epic deflation of the stylus in his review — an issue I shan’t revisit here since he nailed it so well — it’s nice not to have to try to poke into corners with any type of input any more.

The next step for Palm will hopefully be a non-square screen. This device with the Bold screen would be impressive (and would likely make Dieter faint).

Fit and Finish

The speaker being placed along the side is genius. If I hold the iPhone wrong, I can’t hear a sound coming out of it. With the Treo Pro, even if I put it flat on the table, the audio is not effected one bit.

The standard USB connector is also very much appreciated. Absent a near iPod monopoly and the ubiquity of the dock connector that goes with that, sticking with standards is a win for every body.

Overall, this device really shines in fit and finish, and it’s obvious Palm and/or HTC spent a lot of time sweating the details. While I benefited from Kevin and Dieter’s tutorials on how to open the battery cover, once open there’s a handy tab to pull out the battery, and SIM entry/exit was a breeze. I use this example because it’s easy to scrimp inside where you think no one’s looking. We looked, and no scrimpage was found.

This device is well made — and beautiful — inside and out.

Final Hardware Thoughts

Downside? I have iPhone out cables that connect to TVs to basically give me a portable AppleTV (the dock even works with the Apple Remote). I take shows and stuff I’ve rented to my friends and family to enjoy together on the big screen. This week in particular, I really missed being able to do that. Apple is still the only one who’s nailed ecosystem.

In a world without the iPhone, however, — and maybe the Bold, can’t say yet — this would be the type of hardware I want. If they could better the buttons, it would be the kind of hardware I carried — if I still wanted a hard keyboard, which is a thought I’ll be finishing in the FUZE and Bold reviews.

Windows Mobile for PIM

Palm nailed the Zen of PIM back in the late 90s. Say what you want about the aging Palm OS (and I’ve said plenty myself!), but it’s arguably still one of the best PIM app suites on the planet. The story about it, about the early Palm team counting key strokes, is near legendary now, and it showed. Everything was easy. Everything was intuitive. Everything worked.

This is not that Palm.

Windows Mobile works — don’t get me wrong! — but it takes work. I have full faith and confidence that if I invested the time to tweak and tune every little setting, to dig into every little registry entry, to basically Dieter or Malatesta the heck out of it, I could achieve something that the Palm OS did pretty much out of the box. But I have neither the time nor the inclination to do that.

By way of example, I bought my iPhone 3G on launch day, and iTunes was down, so no syncing, no activation. No problem. I put in my Exchange details, boom, work was running. Put in my MobileMe, boom, personal was taken care of. Put in my Gmail, boom, TiPb was happy. It all just worked.

With the Treo Pro, I never got OTA anything working. I never got BT sync working despite trying 3 different Macs (all failed at different points). I even bought MissingSync out of desperation, and USB tether would cause MissingSync to beachball of death continuously. I tried launching Windows XP via Parallels and it wouldn’t even see the device.

Now, most users aren’t Mac users, fair enough, but I am and I know many, many Mac users were Palm users prior to the iPhone, so I don’t accept the really poor user experience. I should also point out that I never had a problem syncing my old Treo 680 via MissingSync via BT or USB on the Mac, and I likely could have figured this out too given more time and patience (and forum help). But I oughtn’t have to.

Cases in point:

Mail

Phone aside, Email is the killer app. It’s what made the BlackBerry the Crackberry. I use Exchange for work and Microsoft makes not only the Treo Pro’s OS, but Exchange itself, so I was anticipating a quick and painless set up.

I was wrong.

First, just like I inexplicably can’t setup Exchange in Outlook on a PC (gotta go to Control Panel!) I had to setup ActiveSync first on the Treo. Entering my info was easy enough, though password handling reminded me of iPhone OS 1.x, where we’re expected to enter pseudorandom passwords that are totally obscured, which was made extra hard by having to use shift and alt to change state on a visually unchanging hardware keyboard. I managed to do it eventually however, only to be stopped dead by ActiveSync refusing my company’s certificate.

On the iPhone, I just ignore the security warning and it works fine. With the Treo, I could find no way around it. TreoCentral Forum member Conrad gave me awesome directions for manually finding my certificate on my desktop and transferring it to the Treo Pro, but there’s no excuse for that having to be part of the process.

So, while I could get the certificate easily enough, I couldn’t transfer it over from my Mac by either BT or tether, so I couldn’t get Exchange.

Really depressing.

I did get Gmail setup, though it defaulted to POP. Forum member RichChestmast tipped me to flipping on IMAP, however.

Calendar

I like the Calendar App. I couldn’t sync either Exchange or MobileMe (where I keep my personal data) over, so I just re-entered everything manually (which technically avoided tethering!). Anyone who’s used Outlook — anyone who’s used any Calendar app, will be right at home, and that’s the highest of praise for PIM apps.

As mentioned, there’s a hard key for the calendar, letting you zip right into it and cycle through states, and I’ll use this opportunity again to announce my appreciation for the Today Screen, which would be a welcome option on the iPhone.

Also, the Windows Mobile calendar provides both week view (like the G1), which the iPhone lacks, and year view, though the screen size and ratio constricts it to 9-month view. Both of these would be welcome additions to the iPhone.

Tasks and Notes

As I mentioned in my Android review, the iPhone’s stupefying lack of a Tasks app, and lack of any built-in way to sync notes, even with Exchange which supports just that type of syncing, has conditioned me to pretty much stop using these pillars.

They’re here. They work. But they’re not particularly attractive (making me miss Marker Felt is about as low as any Notes app could ever sync). I’ll get into this more in the FUZE review, but it’s not 1998 any more. UI matters.

Secret Sauce

(Yes, I refuse to surrender that jargon to lesser complaints). When Bill Gates took the stage at CES and stunned the world with a Palm running Windows Mobile, one of the first things that got me psyched was the Photo Dialing. I loved how Palm tweaked out Windows Mobile.

I didn’t notice anything special about the Treo Pro. In a world with Touch Flo 3D and Xperia Panels, I was expecting something.

Far as I could tell, though, when Palm ordered up the Treo Pro, they held the sauce.

Pity.

PIM Postcript

When I was having trouble figuring out how to review this not made by Palm, not running Palm-OS Treo, Dieter gave me some great advice — review it as a Treo, as something you use on the go to get things done.

In that regard, it’s decidedly middling. The latest, greatest hardware and Windows Mobile, while better looking and far more powerful than my old 680, just weren’t as fast and easy to use. They took more work, and that meant they were far less Zen. And, dagnabit, the measure of any true Treo is in the Zen.

Conclusion

I’m really conflicted about this device. It looks and feels great, it’s powerful and configurable, but for every point I feel it improves from the Treo 680, there’s an equal point where I feel it falls short.

I love the new key material but the board is more cramped. I can do far more with it, but it’s just not as easy to get things done. It’s not the aging Palm of yesteryear, but it’s not the Palm I need today — not quite.

I’ve pretty much come to a conclusion that’s been brewing in my head for a while now (and I’m sure I’m not the first to think or post about it). In many ways, the iPhone is far more the successor to the original spirit of the Treo than any current model being sold by Palm today. Windows Mobile, for all the smart business and stop gap reasons that make perfect sense for Palm Inc. from every angle, just doesn’t feel like a Treo to me, and the iPhone does. The iPhone is what I wish Palm had shipped 5 years ago. So I’ll end where I began the Treo Pro is an HTC Windows Mobile device — a terrific one, maybe the best one available here and now — but it’s not a Palm. Not a Treo. Not for me.

Here’s hoping Palm hits a home run with Nova for next year, and we get a 2.0 OS device in Round Robin 2009.

[This is an official Smartphone Experts Round Robin post! Every day you reply here, you're automatically entered for a chance to win an iPhone 3G, Case-Mate Naked Case, and Motorola H9 Bluetooth Headset! More below!]

[Digg link]

I loved Palm devices and used them as my “main brain” from the Palm V all the way to the Palm 680, before transitioning to the first iPhone. But here’s the thing, I don’t feel like I left Palm — I feel like they left me. Will the Palm Treo Pro be enough to lure me back?

Fair warning: About 1 minute of this preview is done “Zero Punctuation” style (without the salty language, of course!). Apologies to Ben “Yahtzee” Croshaw and everyone at the Escapist for the poor (very poor!) parody, and to our readers… er… viewers, but it had to be done!

Check it out, then head on over to Treo Central to help me get this thing working! Every day you post, you get entered to WIN one of FIVE smartphone prize packs! And you can enter each site’s contest, so don’t forget to help Dieter un-harshen his mellow with the iPhone!

Prize details after the jump…

Every day you comment here, you get one entry to win not only a supra-shiny iPhone 3G, but the Case-Mate Naked Case which allows full touch through access to the iPhone’s amazing screen. Smartphone Outlet is also kicking in the revolutionary Motorola H9 Bluetooth Headset AND a runner-up prize, $50 coupon good at any SPE store, including the new Smartphone Outlet, where you can find refurb Smartphone Accessories at very (very!) low prices.

Check out our full contest rules!

iPhone OS 2.2 build 2.2 5G77, at 246.4MB, is the second major point release to Apple’s second generation mobile operating system. Following on release 2.0 (full review) on July 11, and 2.1 (full review) on September 15. Interestingly, while 2.0 had 8 betas, 2.1 only had 4 and 2.2 but 2. Is Apple really getting twice as efficient, or only spending half as much effort getting feedback?

Like 2.1, this update is also available FREE for the iPod Touch. Unlike 2.1, however, Apple is not providing the same functionality to Touch, with the Google Maps update notably missing. Since these updates don’t seem dependent on either the cell radio or GPS, it’s difficult to imagine why Apple chose to — we’ll say it — shaft the Touch. Perhaps they’ll blame their subscription accounting model again? iSigh.

Remarkable also by it’s absence — again — is the much ballyhooed Push Notification Service (announced during WWDC 2008), intended to provide the semblance of multi-tasking to 3rd party apps by sending badges, sounds, and pop-ups through a central Apple server to alert users of, for example, new IMs or tweets. (Should we even bother to mention the continued, and continually unexplained, absence of cut and paste, MMS, unified inbox, video recording, etc.)

Note: We updated just fine using iTunes 8.0.1, but you may want to consider grabbing yesterday’s 8.0.2 release first.

But enough dwelling on the didn’t gets. Read on after the jump for the we gots!

iPhone OS 2.2 Release Notes

Apple gets (can we still call it uncharacteristically?) chatty with the details:

This update contains many bug fixes and improvements, including the following:

• Enhancements to Maps
  • Google Street View
  • public transit and walking directions
  • display address of dropped pins
  • share location via email
• Enhancements to Mail
  • resolved isolated issues with schedule fetching of email
  • improved formatting of wide HTML email
• Improved stability and performance of Safari
• Podcasts are now available for download in iTunes application (over Wi-Fi and cellular network)
• Decrease in call set-up failures and call drops
• Improved sound quality of visual voicemail messages
• Pressing the Home button from any Home screen takes you to the first Home screen
• Preference to turn on/off auto-correction in Keyboard Settings

Products compatible with this software update:

• iPhone
• iPhone 3G

The Fixes Are In

Much like 2.1, and as can easily be seen by the list above, 2.2 is much ado about fixes. Many of our current gripes, especially the fetch-mail problems and incredible crash-iness of Safari have been seen to. It’ll take a few days and a lot of testing to know for sure, but already things in general seem much snappier, smoother, and even more polished. This is especially noticeable in SMS, Contacts, and other previously laggy apps.

Likewise, Apple has closed a number of security vulnerabilities, a complete list of which can be found in their Knowledge Base, but includes fixes for CoreGraphics, ImageIO, Networking, Office Viewer, Passcode Lock, Safari, and Webkit.

The Un-Affected

While a lucky few apps got updates and some more received tweaks, the vast majority remain unchanged from 2.1 and even 2.0. Outside the general fixes mentioned above, that includes SMS, Calendar, Photo, Camera, YouTube, Stocks (nothing to stop them going down, sadly!), Weather, Clock, Calculator, Notes, Phone, and Mail.

In the perhaps re-broken category — though again this is based on only preliminary tests — iPod is back to losing its place in podcasts and other long-form content for me again. Hopefully this is a temporary glitch. (For those who don’t remember, this used to be a common problem fixed only with a reboot that suddenly “reminded” iPod where it had left off).

Likewise, while we can still connect to a VPN over WiFi, I still can’t over 3G. No explanation on that yet either, though we’ve confirmed on multiple iPhones on both Rogers and AT&T.

Home Screen

The iPhone has 9 available Home Screens to store Apps and WebClips. Now, if you’re on screens 2-9, you can press the Home button and be whisked back to screen 1. A very nice touch.

UPDATED: Speaking of nice touches, while 2.1 saw Apps revert to their last assigned location after being updated, 2.2 finally nails it — Apps are updated in their last assigned location. (Thanks phester!) No more whiplash.

Google Maps

Wow but did this app receive the most attention. Google showed that even post-Android, they haven’t given up an ounce of their iPhone love, not only with their Advanced Voice Search in the Google Mobile App, but baked right into iPhone OS 2.0 as well.

First is Street-View. Google hasn’t yet photographed every street, even in the US, but if you search for major American cities, you’ll probably get lucky.

What is it? When you see a pin in a Street-View enabled location, tapping on the little icon on the left (looks like the top of a man), will animate you through an awesome transition to first-person view of that exact place. Swipe, and you can spin 360 degrees around or pan up and down. A searchlight metaphor, straight out of your favorite FPS, shows which direction the current view represents. Brilliant.

You can also report inappropriate content — which I’m guessing means road-repair not being finished with all due haste?

Words don’t do it justice (which is why we post pics!). Utterly mesmerizing.

Second, if you hit the icon to the right of the pin, you get pretty much what you got with previous firmware, with the notable exception of a new button option at the bottom — Share Location. This is similar to “Mail Link to this Page” in Safari, but instead of a web site address, it sends the Google Maps location of the pin.

Lastly, if you use directions, Maps now provides not only Driving, but Transit and Walking to boot (ha!).

Transit provides bus departure and arrival times, the cost of (combined) fare, and a schedule button to get more options. Note: Bus and train numbers aren’t shown right away. You need to hit Start and get underway for those. Maps will, of course, give you directions on how to get to the bus(es) and train(s) as well!

Walking ignores one-way streets and other vehicule-specific limitations (too much to hope for “Warning: Extreme Tire Hazard?” shortcuts?) when suggesting the fastest route.

Over all, since the iPhone doesn’t have a built-in compass like the Android G1, Street-View isn’t quite as jaw-dropping a demo on the iPhone. Never the less, it’s a spectacular update to an already outstanding app.

Rating: killer.

Settings

Under Settings, General, Keyboard, you now have the option to turn off the iPhone’s Auto-Correction, which many users — especially non-English users — found skewed more stupid than smart.

You can also, apparently turn on Japanese Emoji icons (screenshot via Macrumors) — if you are in Japan and on SoftBank, the official iPhone carrier there. Otherwise, no Emoji for you! (I did manage to switch my iPhone to Japanese trying this out, with only my 3 year old Chinese character (same as Kanji) reading level allowing me to bail back to English… Phew!)

iTunes WiFi Music Store

You read that title right! iTunes now has a new button along its bottom bar — Podcasts. Hit it and you’re greeted with a familiar interface boasting all new — for the mobile app at least — content. Audio and Video Podcast direct downloads have arrived. (You can even get our very own Phone different!)

It functions identically to music downloads, though all Podcasts are still free.

Unlike Music — and identical to the App Store — If you can find something below 10MB (we can’t!) you can download it over 3G. For everything over 10MB, iTunes will complain and direct you to WiFi.

In a pinch — and kudos to Apple for thinking of this — you can ignore the download button and tap the podcast title to launch the QuickTime plugin and stream the Podcast without saving it. You could do this previously via hitting a web link in Safari, of course, but adding it right into the same location as downloads is a fantastic option for users.

Note, having done this frequently from within Safari, it can be a life… er… boredom saver, but can also be frustrating. Dropouts and restarts can occur, and it won’t remember your previous location if you try to come back to it later.

Note: On the download screen, there’re are controls to pause and resume, and (consistency points!) you can swipe to pop up the delete option.

Epic addition that, while it still doesn’t excuse PodCaster-Gate, projects Apple’s iTunes/iPod dominance well into this generation.

App Store

Still no demos. Still no shareware. Still no trial periods of any kind. Yes, the ongoing tribulations of the App Store, developers, and their business models get very little help here, but Apple has provided a minor tweak for users — improved categories with icons.

Better still, App Store Mobile finally catches up with it’s Mac/PC counterpart, showing all the screenshots a developer supplies for their app, with the first one shown full-size and the rest tiled underneath. Tap on any of them to launch an embedded Photo browser to cycle through them all full screen.

If, after using the icons and screenshots to help choose and app, you ultimate decide you hate it and want to burn it from your flash memory, Apple will also cheerfully now ask you to rate it first. Any guesses as to how many 5 star apps will get trashed?

UPDATE: Introduced in 2.0, gone in 2.1, the “Update All” option makes its triumphant return in 2.2. (Thanks Scott!) A convenient feature and a solid decision on Apple’s part.

Safari (Web Browser)

Though the big news is the apparently improved reliability, Safari got a small tweak all its own — the search bar is now surfaced right up alongside the URL bar, with the search button (logically) gone and the back button now relegated to a less prominent position inside the URL bar (much as it is on Mac/PC Safari, absent the orange color).

And while it sure seems faster, whether any additional WebKit goodness, including the screaming hot SquirelFish JavaScript engine, has made it into the Mobile version is something we’re still very interested in finding out.

iPod

We noticed you noticing our previous mention of the Podcast direct download feature in the iTunes app. Well, it’s accessible via the iPod app as well. If you go to the Podcast section and drill down to a Podcast list, you’ll see “Get More Episodes…” at the bottom of the list (notice we didn’t say “end” — we’ll get to that in a bit!)

Why Apple chose text instead of an elegant, reflective button we don’t know, but tapping it will take you straight to the iTunes app page for whatever Podcast you wanted more of. Very nicely integrated.

Okay, so that “end” in the “beginning” at the “end” thing? It looks like Apple has reversed the order of Podcast listings in 2.2. In 2.1, the most recent episode was at the top. In 2.2, it’s at the bottom.

Why? Well, in 2.1 when you finished listening to a Podcast episode, it would auto-annoyingly go right on playing the next oldest episode available, with nary a Settings toggle available to end this assault on reason.

We’re guessing they flipped things so that iPod will now auto-just-as-annoyingly go right on to the next newest Podcast.

Why, in the name of Jobs, can we not just get buttons similar to the Music section so we can choose to loop or not on our own?! What’s that? They do have those buttons, it’s just that the buttons seemingly do absolutely nothing?!

iSigh again.

Memo: Please flip the Podcasts back and, you know, implement the behavior of the buttons, not just the visual state, b’okay?

Conclusion

Yeah, STILL no cut/copy/paste, no turn-by-turn, no MMS, no video recording, no ubiquitous landscape keyboard, and the list goes on and on. It’s just Apple, once again, doing what they think will give them the most holiday, Storm-competive bang for their developer buck.

Should you upgrade to 2.2? Still an major NO if you want it jailbroken and — eventually — unlocked, according to the DevTeam. For everyone else, there’s not reason not to. It costs nothing and Google Maps and Podcast Downloads alone are major reasons to grab it and not look back.

If you’re uncertain, drop by the forums to talk it over.

And if you notice anything else we may have missed, please let us know in the comments and we’ll update asap!

[This is an official Smartphone Experts Round Robin post! Every day you reply here, you're automatically entered for a chance to win an iPhone 3G, Case-Mate Naked Case, and Motorola H9 Bluetooth Headset! More below!]

Google’s Android is the future of smartphones. At least, it’s one of the possible futures. Alongside the iPhone, it’s the OS I’m most intrigued by, and that the two companies have chosen such different strategies in tackling the future only makes it ever so much more exciting.

The iPhone is an ordered, iconic device made entirely by Apple, with all the integration and fit and finish — and frustratingly capricious omissions — that only a single guiding mind can achieve. Android, by contrast, is chaotic and communal, designed by Google to free developers and fit a multitude of tastes and form-factors — with all the possible confusion and derivation open source has to offer.

Which one is “better” is a ridiculously impossible question to answer — each platform has its strengths and weaknesses and each user their own unique needs and preferences. Frankly, we’re fortunate to live in a time where there are so many truly awesome devices from which to choose. (Even a few years ago — and yes, I’ll say it, pre-iPhone shockwave — things were far, far more bleak.)

For my part, all I can really do is tell you how I use a smartphone, and how well the Android G1 fits that usage bill.

I really need to point out, up front, that the G1 is a beta device. There, I said it. Unlike Windows Mobile or Blackberry OS, which have been on the market for years and years, and the iPhone OS which is already on 2.x, Android has just hit the market with all the promise and problems that inevitably go with that. The Android device I experienced this week will absolutely and without question be blown away by whatever Android device(s) hit the market next year. So, it’s not a fair comparison for Android from the get go, and I beg everyone to remember that when I lay… er… get into it below the fold.

Getting Started

After far too few hours of sleep, I count on the alarm to make sure I’m out of bed early enough to delay my getting fired for at least another day. Good news. Easy to set. Easy to turn off.

Roughly the same as the iPhone Clock alarm, it’s more utilitarian (a theme we’ll be seeing often) and while that will appeal to some, I miss the eye-candy and pure fun of the iPhone flick-wheels.

Form Factor

Picking up the hardware, it feels good in the hand. It’s heavy but in a solid sort of way, narrower but thicker than the iPhone. The soft-touch plastic is definitely easier to hold onto. The design, however, is… well… less than attractive, and certainly nowhere near as sexy as the iPhone.

Dieter has made a good point that the G1 hardware had to be like this. If it was wrapped inside an iPhone or Blackberry class package, people wouldn’t be as forgiving of the beta software. This way, the outside matches the in. Clunky is as clunky does. It’s the Google stripped down interface and perpetual “beta” tag made manifest.

And that manifestation? While each part of the two-part keyboard and screen slider is good in and of itself, the mere fact that it’s two parts makes it feel creakier and squeakier when you grip it. It’s not the solid slab of the iPhone, but then the iPhone only achieves its form by completely throwing away the keyboard function. The G1 is all about function over form.

Notifications

(Note: I couldn’t find an elegant way to take screenshots absent downloading a dev kit, so I opted for photography. Apologies for the lousy quality, the screens are really bright and beautiful.)

First thing I do is hit a button to wake the phone, and menu to unlock. Then there’s the awesome puzzle-game unlock. Not sure why I have to hit Menu first and then the puzzle though. One unlock would be enough.

As with the iPhone, I’d like for there to be a today screen. (Marketplace, which I’ll get to later, will likely fill that void at some point if it hasn’t already.)

I heard alerts go off during the night, and the notification bar shows calendar and email waiting. I love this feature. Sure, I’d rather just tap or swipe to reveal it, rather than have to pull it all the way down, but the feature itself it great.

(Actually, I’d really like a pop up to be right there when I turn the G1 on, even before I hit “menu”. When I get an alert on the iPhone, if I look right away it’s already popped up on the screen. If I miss it, it pops up as soon as I wake the phone. I need that! If a future version combined the best of both, it would be notification bliss!)

User Experience

Here comes my major rant, and I’ll get it out of the way early so I can hopefully redeem myself to the Androidikas later: Android as it stands right now has a terrible, borderline-incompetent lack of consistency and user-friendliness to its interface/experience. (Which is something the iPhone absolutely kills at, making this all the more frustrating to me).

Navigation is completely non-intuitive and you are continuously left to guess which of the myriad (too many!) input methods is needed at any given time. Keyboard, touchscreen, scroll wheel, and hard buttons are all good, all fine, really. But all at once?

First example, I turn on the phone and a beautiful home screen greets me. I swipe the touch screen and super-sweet parallax scrolling takes me to a Google search box. I tap the box and it lights up and I get a cursor, suggesting input can be made. But I can’t make it. It is utterly unmakable!

I can tap away and nothing will happen unless it occurs to me to open the slider keyboard, at which point the screen will rotate and I can enter text. (Would it have been so much work to either add a virtual keyboard — don’t tell me it’s coming later, or the text box should come later too! — or just make a popup tell me to open the keyboard to enter?)

Second, there are two (2!) mail apps (more on that later) and while the regular mail app has nice, persistent controls like “reply” at the bottom of the screen, the Gmail app tosses them in-line at the bottom of page — which is often quite a lot of scrolling away (yes, I know there are keyboard shortcuts and menu options — exactly the point of this rant!)

Third, when there are those menu options sometimes needful controls are hidden — tragically — behind the “more” touchscreen button. No effort has been made to elegantly or intuitively direct a user to the right control at the right time, nor to keep controls consistent within input methods or between apps. For shame. That needs to be overhauled completely in the next major rev.

Okay, rant over. I shan’t mention it again. (At least I’ll try very, very hard not to).

Email

Yup, I check it as soon as I get up. My job entails supporting offices in different time zones, and TiPb never sleeps, so there’s usually a ton of stuff piled up in my inbox. One of my biggest gripes about the iPhone is how many clicks it takes to move between email accounts. If you drill down, you must drill back up. Will Android help me out there?

A bit, as we’ll see. Of course, there shouldn’t be two email apps to begin with, just one GUI, and Android should handle everything else transparently. Since both apps have their good and bad points, combine all the good into one would be killer.

Gmail App

I’ll just say it — push Gmail is awesome. I want it on the iPhone right now. Forget Street-view or Location Sharing in iPhone OS 2.2, Google — give me push Gmail!

I use Gmail for both my personal and TiPb mail. Unfortunately, Gmail app only supports one (1) Gmail account (the iPhone only supports one ActiveSync account, but I seem to be able to set up more than one Mobile Me Account.) My personal account won the coin toss.

Setup was easy. Actually, you have to set up Gmail in order to activate the G1, the same way you need iTunes to activate the iPhone, so it needs to be easy.

Once I plugged in my credentials — skidoosh! — all my personal mail “just worked” with instant Google goodness.

Confession: I did find the controls a little confusing (and both trashed and spammed Crackberry Kevin — sorry Kevin!), but luckily Dieter posted the aforementioned excellent keyboard shortcuts. In any case, stars are right there. Labels are right there. Everything anyone who has ever used Gmail via the web interface has ever wanted in a client is right there. If the next rev cleans up the controls, this could be the killer app.

Mail App

Absent built in Exchange support, which the iPhone OS 2.x enjoys via ActiveSync, I set up my work email, and my TiPB Gmail both in IMAP. I’d used IMAP for iPhone OS 1.x, so while it’s nowhere near as robust as ActiveSync, it got the job done. Gmail, due to Google’s “unique” implementation of mapping Labels to IMAP folders, has never been enjoyable to me, not on the iPhone, and not here, but it also gets the job done well enough for now.

I should point out that Gmail IMAP generates regular invalid certificate, simultaneous connection, and other errors to the point of being utterly useless at times for me on both the desktop and iPhone (and Twitter shows I’m not alone), but I had no problem with either of those things on the G1. Either I got lucky, or Google’s got some extra special mojo at work here.

Like the Gmail App, navigation is more challenging than it ought to be. Also, I ended up keeping it on manual as far as when to check mail, since anything automatic thrashed the battery life something fierce. This meant I had to wait each time I opened the app for it to download new messages, and even on WiFi this seemed to take longer than the iPhone does.

The Four Pillars of PIM

Once mail is triaged, it’s time for me to figure out the day. Now, I don’t use tasks/to do or memo/notes (don’t tell Dieter!). This may be because the iPhone just totally FAILS by not providing sync features for them. So, to be honest, I don’t know if Android does this or does it well. It’s simply outside my current usage pattern.

Calendar

iCal synced via MobileMe is my main modus operundi. I don’t use gCal on Google’s server, but I did manage to export my main calendars as ICS files and import them into gCal for instant syncing to Android. Sweet!

I’m still looking for a direct (i.e. non-3rd party) way to simply subscribe to my iCal calendars in gCal using CalDAV, but while Android Central forum members pointed me to great directions for doing the opposite (subscribing to gCal in iCal), I’m still looking for my holy grail. (Anyone seen it?)

It’s a great calendar app. Not as good as Gmail, not as bad as Contacts (wait for it). As Casey will tell you, Week View merely being present is a big plus over the iPhone.

Contacts

I’m going to rant again. I don’t understand how the same company that makes Gmail can put out what they laughingly call Google Contacts. This, above all, made my life with Android miserable.

First, I turned on Google Sync in Address Book and immediately my contacts were beamed to the cloud. Then they were condensed and rained back down on me in tiny, droplet-y fragments. See, Google seems to just randomly add contacts almost always without any sort of container or relationship. Suddenly I had 3 to 10 contacts per person, some just email addresses, some just phone numbers, almost none linked in any useful way.

I did my best to clean it up, but searching for contacts by name seldom if ever turned up their numbers, and when people called me, I almost never got the name of the caller even if it should have been in there.

[Note: Dieter in contacts above, but no numbers, no email, no nothing. FAIL!]

Since I’ve long since lost the ability to actually remember numbers, this made the phone all but unusable for me at times. To be clear, however, this is not Android’s problem, it’s Google Contacts and Android inherited it. And this is not just my opinion, it’s an opinion I’ve seen echoed by many otherwise extremely happy Gmail users.

Please fix this, Google. Pretty please?

On the super epic plus side, however, this did mean I got all my data onto the G1 over the air. No tether. No cable. Totally leash free. MobileMe and ActiveSync users know this freedom. Android users know it as well.

Web

We browsing is huge on the iPhone. It’s inarguably the best mobile browser implementation yet. How does the Google Browser stack up? Pretty well. The lack of multi-touch is a huge hit, no way around that, but the rendering (based on the same open source WebKit foundation as the iPhone’s Safari) is snappy and it’s much, much, (much!) more stable than the iPhone was under 2.1 (let’s hope 2.2 has fixed that).

I had nary a crash all week.

I do wish, however, that it would auto-scale pages and fit text the way MobileSafari does. Having to manually adjust each page with the magnifying buttons got old fast. On the UI massive FAIL front, not being able to tap the touch screen to activate a URL chooser was stupefying. You can start typing on the keyboard to do that, of course, or hit the menu button and then touch “Go to URL” but — again — forcing a user to open a keyboard or switch between input methods is just way, way broken.

Android’s browser doesn’t currently support flash, though it looks like it may soon. When you get to a YouTube video, you’re prompted to launch it in the YouTube app (like on the iPhone) or to view it in the browser. The former works just like you’d expect (hey, Google owns YouTube!), the latter, however, then asks you to download Java and Flash. Er… Howsabout we remove that until after Flash is made into a plugin, b’okay guys?

Phone

I like the phone app quite a bit. I liked it when I used it on the Treo. I say that because it’s almost identical. Same tabbed approach to the same basic usage choices. They worked then, they work now, and as Steve Jobs so rightly said, phone is the killer app.

The only problem I had is that when I had to enter extra digits, opening up the keyboard while keeping the handset to my ear was tricky to say the least. Sure, they’ve invented speakers and headsets for that stuff, but I should have an onscreen keypad as well. Or is it there and I just missed it?

Pairing with my Blue Tooth was a synch. Once and a while it wouldn’t work, and I would find the BT radio turned off, but turning it back on would again enable flawless use. Android really nailed this.

In general, however, I could use a little more visual differentiation in the settings between buttons that simply toggle on/off radios like WiFi and BT, and buttons that take you to those radios settings. Identical slices of a single vertical list with only check marks vs. arrow circles isn’t really enough.

Media

The iPhone, with its iPod pedigree, is a media powerhouse. It’s the media powerhouse! How does Android stack up?

Video

The lack of a built-in video player ranks up there with the lack of MMS on the iPhone. Both are inexplicable. To Android’s credit, however, a video player is just one short trip to the Market away. (Want MMS on your iPhone and jailbreaking is your only current option).

Audio

Music is built in, both the player and the Amazon MP3 store. And they’re fine. Since Amazon hasn’t seen fit to offer the service in Canada yet, I was shut out of fully testing it. Come on, Amazon!

I’m not much of a music listener (the irony is not lost, believe me), so fine was good enough. What I am, though, is a voracious podcast listener. My feed is clogged with every Smartphone Experts cast, most of TWiT and Pixel Corp, GDGT, and many more. (I save video podcasts for the big screen).

Again, this meant a trip back to the Market to get a podcatcher… something (also ironically) Apple refuses to allow into the iPhone App Store.

I’ll be honest here — it worked but nowhere near as well as iTunes, which while still tether-bound until iPhone OS 2.2 (which may well hit today!), is just buttery smooth. Time-outs and failed downloads plagued me (which may also be the case in 2.2, who knows at this point?).

When I don’t have time to tether the iPhone, I’ve tried streaming via web links and the Quicktime plugin, which is hit and miss as sometimes the connection stalls and unlike a downloaded podcast, it never remembers your location if it you come back to it later.

Android was very similar, though perplexingly after I typed in a URL with the keyboard and clicked to begin the stream, closing the keyboard would stop the stream. This is most likely a bug and will hopefully be fixed.

Photos

Photos on the iPhone is one of those apps you do demos with. Multi-touch just kills it. So, while Android can handle photos just fine, it doesn’t have anywhere near the fun factor of the iPhone.

Strangely, cover art for the podcasts I downloaded somehow flooded my photos app, so the top level looked more like an iTunes tab than a set of albums!

Android Market

This is the area where Android has the potential to really decimate the iPhone. Given all of Apple’s restrictions on the App Store and the iPhone SDK, including no multi-tasking, no access to the iPod, no turn-by-turn, etc. etc. ad naseum infinitum, the freedom of the Android Market (even though it too has a kill switch) should release the true power of developer innovation.

One day.

Today, it’s still a little on the far side of slim pickings. This may simply be due to the lack of a commercial option on the built-in app — serious developers who make great software need to be paid enough to support their making great software. Hopefully this will shake out rapidly.

Since the default Android IM client wouldn’t work for me (it was upset I wasn’t using a T-Mobile SIM — apparently it ties into SMS), I went in search of a 3rd party client from the Market.

Android Market works pretty much the same as the App Store, with a few little differences in the UI. Some of them are useful, but the polish wasn’t there, so I’m calling it even at this point.

It was easy enough to find an IM app, and dead simple to install and use it. Strangely, it kept logging me out, defeating the purpose of multi-tasking, but I eventually found a preference setting to keep me logged in and receiving IMs in the background. That was awesome! … until my battery very rapidly ran dry.

Push has its price. Maybe this is what’s (still!) delaying Apple’s Push Notification Service?

I also downloaded a game. I game very little, and very casually — often just to wind down before going to sleep. As anyone who’s seen my video know, it was frustrating. Not the download, that was easy. The game, however, told me to “push up to start”. Touch screen up did nothing. Keyboard had no up key. Finally I hit the trackball and voila. This is the double edge to the Android Market Store: absent a unified hardware platform like the iPhone, you never know what input methods will be available on any given piece of equipment, and which ones will be in use on multiple input devices. This developer clearly should have allowed upward swipes on the touch screen, when a touch screen is present.

The game itself, aside from being the most popular at the time of my download, was fine for freeware, but nothing like what we’ve seen on the iPhone.

But it was enough to put me to sleep.

Another plus: on app update notification. I find having to go to the App Store on the iPhone inefficient at times, and really liked how Android alerted me to updates right from the app.

Conclusion

Again, this is a beta OS on mundane hardware and is ultimately and absolutely fine. It’s fine. Really.

I was expecting more. I was expecting what I have every ounce of confidence Android 2.0 will be.

Problems vs. promise was the theme of my entire week with the G1. It’s not an iPhone killer, not by any stretch of that overused drip of marketing hyperbole… but it could easily become one if Apple isn’t very careful.

Unlike Apple, Google isn’t secretly building devices to slip out of their jean pockets at trade shows and shock and delight the world first time at bat. They’re taking a decidedly Microsoft-ian approach of releasing concept pieces and using the early adopters to test and refine. Microsoft typically does horrible first revs, poor second revs, and then starts to nail things third time at bat. Hopefully Google will hit their home run faster.

I know I’m desperately rooting for them.

[This is an official Smartphone Experts Round Robin post! Every day you reply here, you're automatically entered for a chance to win an iPhone 3G, Case-Mate Naked Case, and Motorola H9 Bluetooth Headset! More below!]

Okay, fair enough, I’m having a little fun up there, but with the Smartphone Empire Experts Round Robin officially under way and my iPhone frozen in carbonite for the next month, the G1 could be my only hope!

I’m still trying to figure out if this is the ‘droid I’ve been looking for, however. Do I understand the awesome power of the open-platform of the Google? Or is it more concept now than device, twisted and confusing?

Check out the video, then head on over to Android Central to help me out. Every day you post, you get entered to WIN one of FIVE smartphone prize packs! And you can enter each site’s contest, so don’t forget to help turn Casey back to the iPhone side as well!

May the forums be with you!

Prize details after the jump…

Every day you comment here, you get one entry to win not only a supra-shiny iPhone 3G, but the Case-Mate Naked Case which allows full touch through access to the iPhone’s amazing screen. Smartphone Outlet is also kicking in the revolutionary Motorola H9 Bluetooth Headset AND a runner-up prize, $50 coupon good at any SPE store, including the new Smartphone Outlet, where you can find refurb Smartphone Accessories at very (very!) low prices.

Check out our full contest rules!

The iPhone 3G has plenty of case options that range from hard polycarbonate cases to soft rubber options, from colorful designs to more understated lines. The Marware Sport Grip for iPhone 3G ($19.95) is a soft rubber case that incorporates subtle design and offers superb protection. How does it perform?

Read on for the rest of the review!

Design

The Marware Sport Grip for iPhone 3G is a silicone rubber case that protects the corners, the entire back, and even the home button on the iPhone. The Marware Sport Grip also comes with an adequate adhesive clear screen protector that covers the entire front face of the iPhone 3G. There is a quirk in design that exposes the multitude of sensors on the iPhone 3G but this oddity is due to maintaining the function of the sensors.

The Marware Sport Grip is available in three opaque colors: black, white, and pink. What makes the Marware Sport Grip case stand out is that it protects as much of the front face of the iPhone 3G as possible—the home button and ear speaker is protected—leaving only the touchscreen open for ‘direct’ access. Few cases offer as much protection.

The volume buttons and sleep/wake switch are also covered via exterior rubber buttons—no worries, the buttons don’t lose much sensitivity with the protection, the molded rubber buttons are very easy to press. The silent/ringer switch is made available through a small cut out in the case.

Usability

Make no mistake, the Marware Sport Grip’s main purpose is to protect the iPhone 3G offering few frills and no gimmicks. Whereas other companies choose to sway consumers with eye-catching design, the Marware Sport Grip focuses on function. The design is simple—cover as much as the iPhone 3G as possible. And to that extent, it definitely succeeds. You can’t possibly cover more of the iPhone 3G’s exterior without losing some functionality, the protection that the Sport Grip offers is simply superb.

There is also a cutout for the speaker grilles on the iPhone so the sound won’t get muffled behind the silicone. There will obviously be some thickness added with the case but it isn’t bothersome. Overall, the Sport Grip performs solidly and the rubber used is thick enough for better protection but not too thick where it detracts from the iPhone’s form factor.

Even though the Marware Sport Grip is made from a silicone rubber, it doesn’t offer the tactile feel or grip of similar options. The case also attracts a lot of lint and dust but perhaps this is due to my testing with the black version. Also, though the holes for the iPhone 3G’s sensors are purposeful, it is still an odd design choice that clutters the front face of the iPhone 3G.

Final Thoughts

Overall, the Marware Sport Grip will fit anyone who wants a simple case that offers the most protection possible without sacrificing function. The case adds minimal thickness and the iPhone 3G feels secure and protected. Obviously, those looking for a more unique design should look elsewhere but the Marware Sport Grip is as solid a case as it gets with the iPhone 3G.

PROS:

• Superb, Complete Protection
• Maintains All Functionality of iPhone
• Adds Minimal Thickness

CONS:

• Attracts Lint & Dust
• Little Grip Added
• Cluttered Front Face

FINAL RATING:

The Griffin Wave for iPhone 3G uses a unique wave lock design to create a snug fit for the iPhone and offer solid protection. The hard plastic case was unique among competitor’s offerings because instead of choosing a slide mechanism to connect the case together, it uses a front piece and a back piece to hold the iPhone. Does the Griffin Wave succeed as a case? We think so. Read on to see why.

Read on for the rest of the review!

Design

The Griffin Wave for iPhone 3G is a hard plastic case that offers protection for the chrome rim, corners, and entire back of the iPhone. It comes in four color choices and allows accessibility to all the ports, switches, buttons and jacks on the iPhone.

As mentioned before, the Wave case comes in two parts. Unlike other cases which offer a top and bottom slide mechanism, the Griffin Wave opts to use a front piece and a back piece—held together via the interlocking wave design. To explain it briefly, the wave shaped closure overlap and inserts into each other to create a very, very snug and secure fit. It kind of looks like DNA.

The polycarbonate of the Griffin Wave is clear and the wave lock design is very pleasing to the eye. The helix design adds a certain amount of depth and improves the look of the iPhone 3G.  

Usability

I found that the material used in the Griffin Wave feels great in the hand. Though it is unmistakably a hard plastic case, there is a soft touch rubber feel to it and the iPhone feels safe inside. I believe that Griffin found a great compromise with soft cases and hard cases in the Wave. Whereas soft cases offer better grip, it often loosens over time. The benefit of a hard case is that it soundly protects the iPhone without wear and tear. But the main problem is it typically adds too much thickness and that the material doesn’t provide for much grip.

In the Wave’s case, it combines both the sturdiness of a hard case with the tactile feel of a soft case. I loved the added depth and dimension of the material and found it very pleasing to hold. Also the clear polycarbonate material allows you to see the Apple logo on the iPhone and gives off a better look than an all plastic material would.

All the ports and switches of the iPhone are made available with the Wave case. The hole for the camera is exact. Because of such precise cuts along the ports and openings, it leaves little room for dust to settle and build up. Though it does add some amount of thickness, I didn’t find it to be bothersome.

However, the case doesn’t seem to match up exactly where the front portion and the back portion meet. This is odd considering everything else about the Wave is so exact and beautiful. Though the slight opening might only affect the most nit picky of people, it is a design flaw nonetheless. The packaged plastic screen protector is a throwaway, it diminishes the iPhone’s sensitivity and is difficult to use. Spring for a adhesive screen.

Final Thoughts

The Griffin Wave for iPhone 3G is a subtly styled, great feeling case. Griffin really did a good job with the Wave and its unique locking system not only offers a secure fit but also adds to the design. I think if you were looking for a hard case for the iPhone 3G, you couldn’t do much better in regards to look, feel, and all around security than the Griffin Wave.  

PROS

• Unique closure system
• Great Design
• Adds minimal thickness
• All ports are accessible

CONS

• Back and Front portions don’t meet up exactly
• Packaged Plastic Screen Protector is a throwaway

FINAL RATING:

Although there are numerous apps that take advantage of the location-based feature the iPhone offers in order to serve up local eats, treats and other items, Goodrec is worth a hard look and download.

Even though it’s free, does Goodrec deliver the goods? Is it worth taking up some space on your iPhone, or is it something you’ll use a couple times and then banish to the electronic void of deleted apps? Read on for my take on Goodrec!

First Impressions

The interface is simple to use. You can use the “Search” screen or “Nearby” to find what you are looking for, from restaurants to movie theaters. Easily look up “Recents” that you have checked before, see which of your friends are online in Goodrec, and even check the history of recommendations you have made over time (more on this in a moment).

Goodrec takes up very little memory on your iPhone and offers a simple menu structure to quickly find what you are looking for. Not only can you find it, but the premise of Goodrec is to build in a community of your friends – people whose opinions and recommendations you trust – so you can make better choices because someone else has “been there, done that, ate that.”

How It Works

In order to find recommended movies, books, restaurants, etc., you need to use Goodrec’s menu. “Search” allows for selecting the category, location, and optionally, a name. If you are more visual, there is a scrolling bar of icons along the bottom of the screen with pictures representing the categories for easy swipe-and-tap.

Using “Nearby”, you can view establishments represented by a pin on a scrollable map. The scrolling map is an excellent feature which I really like. The map is dynamic, so if your desired destination is just off the edge of the map, just scroll and other businesses will appear with their corresponding pins and names. Tapping on the name will whisk you off to the information screen, including address, phone number, and recommendation. Look up more details here and even pull up a map of the location and get directions. Interestingly, the map on the information is a Yahoo map. Tapping on “Directions” then takes you to the Google Maps app on your iPhone. I really wish the mapping was better integrated in this app so that you don’t have to leave the app, check the map, then open the app again to get back to where you were – somewhat of a hassle.

The “Recents” tab will, as you might expect, give you a list of your recent searches, including a way to filter categories, sources of Goodrecs, and location. The “Friends” tab keeps a list of your friends and allows you to “Invite” more friends to use the app. A very nice feature of Goodrec is the social element – you are able to connect with your friends for recommendations. The database you have access to is created by other Goodrec users, so fortunately you won’t usually be buried by an avalanche of recommendations when you are looking for something.

When you take our turn to recommend something, you will see it immediately appear on the map as soon as you recommend it. While you are there, you can mark the location as “My Location” for easier location reference. Once you give a recommendation, it’s stored in the Goodrec database for other people to hopefully benefit from your critique. While you are recommending something, take a picture and store it on your Goodrec so other people can see what you are talking about.

If you are a user of social sites like Facebook, Twitter, or friendfeed, you will be happy to know that you can publish your Goodrecs directly on your site for others to read. Goodrec takes advantage of the location-based capabilities of your iPhone and provides a social network of it’s own or integration into one of your favorite social networking sites so you can share your recommendations with your friends and others.

Final Thoughts

The recommendation system for Goodrec is simple and effective – thumbs up, down, or neutral, with just enough space to leave a helpful comment or two. The social networking aspect is an excellent way to get trusted recommendations and share your recommendations with your friends. Recommendations can be made quickly, privately, and shared on your social networking sites. After using Goodrec a few times, it should be an app that stays on your iPhone for a long time.

Pros

• Easy and useful interface for iPhone and web site access.
• Simple, effective rating system.
• Share recommendations with those you trust – your friends.
• Dynamic scrolling map and directions support.

Cons

• Somewhat clumsy mapping migration between app and Google Maps.
• Social network aspect is reliant on update by your could-be-burned out friends.

Rating:

Everybody has his or her own definition for the perfect iPhone 3G Case. Some may want a hard plastic case, others prefer rubbery silicone cases but most prefer a case that is non intrusive and more importantly, offers protection while adding minimal bulk. The Incipio dermaSHOT Silicone Case for iPhone 3G ($14.95) is a rubber silicone case that tries to offer a layer of protection without adding much thickness. How does it perform?

Read on for the rest of the review!

Design

The Incipio dermaSHOT Silicone Case for iPhone 3G is a fairly simple case that offers protection for the backside, side, and corners of the iPhone 3G. There are multiple color options and the case also includes a clear plastic screen protector.

The material used in the Incipio dermaSHOT is a very soft and malleable silicone. It is unique among competitive products because most silicone cases opt for the thicker, rougher material. This soft silicone design choice is both good and bad, it feels great in your hand because it almost conforms to your grip but at the same time is also susceptible to stretching and loosening.

The Incipio dermaSHOT covers the entire back of the iPhone 3G leaving a hole for the camera, headphone jack, and the silent switch. The volume controls and sleep/wake button are protected via a thicker rubber that offers protection but also easy access to its controls.

Overall, the design is extremely simple—it doesn’t offer home button protection and doesn’t attempt to over complicate things with a sophisticated design or gimmicky options. It is as straight forward as any iPhone 3G case can be and comes in what seems like every color of the rainbow.

Usability

The case fits really well around the iPhone 3G—it is made out of a softer silicone material that wraps solidly around the iPhone yet offers a certain tactile feel that most other rubber cases do not. Specifically, the case feels soft and has a certain amount of depth to it, there’s a give to the case unseen in most rubber options. The extra grip that the case offers is a great touch and really feels good in hand.

Because of the softer, more malleable material of the Incipio dermaSHOT, it seems like it’d be more susceptible to stretching and loosening. Many silicone cases face this problem—the added grip of rubber cases is great but after removing the case a few times it no longer fits as exact as before.

The Incipio dermaSHOT avoids permanent loosening and stretching by using the softer material, it kind of bends towards your movement. Meaning, if you press the sleep/wake button the top of the case is pushed down as well. This is a well implemented compromise, though the case doesn’t offer skin-tight coverage, it also does not permanently stretch. If you’re expecting an exact form fitting case, the Incipio dermaSHOT isn’t that case—but if you want longevity in your silicone case, the dermaSHOT is perfect.

My only gripe with the case is that its cut isn’t the most laser-accurate exact. There seems to be excess materials in the opening for the silent switch. The lines are also not as clean as I would like but that’s probably being nit picky. Overall, the design is fair and the protection is more than adequate. I would recommend passing on the clear plastic screen protector because it deters from the sensitivity of the iPhone 3G’s touchscreen.

Final Thoughts

The design of the Incipio dermaSHOT is simple and basic. There will probably be folks that complain that it is perhaps too plain, but the case does its job—it offers great protection and won’t stretch over time (compared to competing products). If you’re looking for an eye-catching product or head turning design, the Incipio dermaSHOT is simply not for you. But if you want a design that fits great around the iPhone 3G, offers above-average protection, and a multitude of color options at a very affordable price ($14.95), you probably can’t do any better.

PROS

• Feels Great in Hand
• Adds Minimal Thickness to iPhone
• Offers Above-Average Protection
• Many Color Options

CONS

• Plain and Basic Design
• Stretchier than Most Silicone Cases

FINAL RATING:

Is there a difference between a high-end Bluetooth Headset compared to a normal one? With so many hands-free driving laws being passed these days, the question is obviously on many consumer’s minds. The BlueAnt Z9i ($74.95) is one of those high-end headsets that manages to combine a small and sleek form factor and with a powerful piece of technology, Digital Signal Processor (DSP). On paper, it is everything you want in a Bluetooth headset. How does it test? Does it accomplish everything it sets out to do?

Read on for the rest of the review!

Design

The Z9i’s design is extremely sleek and admirably compact. Whereas many headsets of comparable size focus on their notable lack of size over middling specs, the Z9i manages to pack strong, top-of-the-line technology in a very tight package.

The glossy black of the body is accentuated by chrome lining—it matches incredibly well with the black iPhone 3G. There are dedicated volume buttons on the top side of the headset and a multifunction button (power up/down, answer/end calls, and alternate between standard and max noise cancellation) on the headset’s body. Also, the Z9i includes two microphones which are dedicated to canceling noise.

There is an obscenely bright indicator light, which flashes the BlueAnt logo in well, blue (and red). Luckily, there is an option to turn this off because it is quite blinding in a dark room. The earhook design is quite ingenious—where most other headsets have a fixed earloop or one that moves horizontally, the Z9i moves vertically. This offers easier access and greater comfort. The only design quip is that one end of the earhook is strangely visible, an odd decision by the folks at BlueAnt that detracts from the overall sleekness.

In all, the Z9i isn’t exactly adventurous in its design but its execution is top-notch. You would be hard pressed to find a Bluetooth headset that matches great technology with great build quality—those who enjoy a Bluetooth Headset that is small, sleek, and compact will definitely love this headset’s design.

Usability

The Z9i’s packaging includes two earloops (one is transparent), two earbuds, a wall charger (MicroUSB), and a USB cable. The Z9i syncs wonderfully easy with the iPhone and as an added bonus, the Z9i is capable of being simultaneously connected to two different devices, offering seamless transition for those with multiple devices. It offers 200 hours of standby time with 5.5 hours of talk time. Taking advantage of a feature that is lacking in the iPhone, you are able to use voice commands with the headset as well.

I found the Z9i to be really comfortable in the ear. It has a basic earbud design that is really easy on the ears and plus its light weight makes it barely noticeable.

In testing, I found that the incoming calls sounded great, they were clearly audible with no distortion. I had absolutely no trouble hearing the conversation and thought the Z9i was better than most in regards to incoming audio. Though it doesn’t have any technology that adjusts the incoming audio to your background, the easily accessible, dedicated volume buttons do help. 

In quiet situations, the outgoing audio quality is also impressive. Callers didn’t even realize I was using a Bluetooth headset and stated that I sounded perfectly normal with no digitization. The performance in quiet surroundings certainly warrants its high-end price and is impressive due to its dimunitive size.

However, the noise cancellation is not as good as advertised. Though it does block out some background noise and isolates the outgoing audio, it is not the noise assassin that the Jawbone 2 is. When I had the radio on, callers could hear the song fairly clearly.

This might be a philosophical difference between the Z9i vs the Jawbone 2, where the Z9i chooses to accentuate the voice of the speaker and include the background noise while the Jawbone 2 seeks to simply eliminate the background noise. Both work, but if you’re expecting Jawbone-like ability in regards to background noise, you might decide that the Z9i isn’t for you.

Final Thoughts

Let it be clear, that the Z9i is better than nearly every other Bluetooth Headset available and its comfortable fit and long battery life should convince many users that the Z9i is for them. Add the bonus points for multiple device syncing, easy controls, and a small size—it clearly should be considered in every Bluetooth Headset purchase. Though it’s noise cancellation performance is not top notch, callers will definitely hear you a lot easier than other headsets. If you’re seaking a noise cancellation headset, you can do no wrong with the Jawbone 2. If you want something a little more versatile, the Z9i is a great, great headset.

PROS

• Small, Sleek Design
• Comfortable Fit, Easy to Put On
• Sync to Multiple Devices
• Great Incoming Audio Quality, Impressive Outgiong Audio in Quiet Surroundings

CONS

• Not an ‘amazing’ noise cancellation performer
• Odd Earhook Design Exposes chrome

FINAL RATING:

(Not one, but two premiere game reviews on TiPb today. If you haven’t already checked out the review of The Force Unleashed for the iPhone, go get your Star Wars on)

Given all the hype these past couple of weeks — heck, these past couple of years — you probably don’t need much introduction to Spore, so we’ll keep it quick. Spore is a game about evolution that works via a little intelligent design: you start out as a helpless, single-cell organism and work your way up the food chain. On the console and PC versions of the game, this eventually leads you to intergalactic conquest.

In Spore Origins for the iPhone ($9.99 at iTunes), that process is scaled back quite a bit. Over the course of 30 levels you stay pretty much at the single-cell level, adding various eyeballs, feelers, spikes, and the like as you tilt your way through the primordial sea, gobbling up smaller creatures and avoiding the larger ones.

We at TiPb have been waiting for Spore ever since it was announced. Heck, we were hoping it would come to the iPhone well before that. Does it live up to our expectations? Read on…

Evolution Gameplay & Controls

The main setup in spore is the “Evolution” game mode, and you really do begin as little more than a blob. You begin the game with a quick tutorial on control — this being the iPhone, you move your creature around by tilting the device.

Nearly every stage has essentially the same goal: eat the creatures smaller than you by running over them, avoid the creatures larger than you (and their attacks!), and try to fill up your “DNA Bar” to finish the level. Early on it’s pretty simple as you get used to the mechanics of the game. One nice touch is a calibration option for re-centering the accelerometer if you want to set a different angle to “not moving.”

As the levels progress it becomes increasingly difficult to get to your food as larger, nastier, and / or weirder creatures and obstacles stand in your way. Luckily, on most levels that introduce a new aspect to the game, there are tutorials at the bottom of the screen to give you hints about what you need to do to survive.

There are also little power-ups called “symbiotes” scattered throughout the levels that give you quick abilities like Poison and Shield.

Every 5 levels or so the game stops being about just eating as much as possible and instead becomes a “navigate through the tunnels” type of level, which is actually a nice break. There are hidden chambers to find (hint: blow up the blobby-eye-creature), achievement bubbles to grab, and new creatures here too as well.

Graphics and Sound

What can I say? I’m still impressed with the iPhone’s capabilities. Graphics are as you see in the screen shots: very darn good. The game sound is also pretty quality, though the music does get a little repetitive at times — however it fits the mood of the game perfectly with some light-hearted drums and an “aquatic” feel (yes, I suck at describing music).

Creature Creator

• different colors and patterns
• Perception tools like eyes and feelers
• Offensive tools like spikes and teeth
• Defensive tools like shields and (ahem) spikes

Modifying your creature is easy and fun — on the main screen you can pinch and spread your fingers to adjust the size of your body. When you do, the creatures skeleton appears to give you an idea of what you’re messing with. There are plenty of colors and patterns to choose from. Or you can go with another option: pulling a photo from your Photo Gallery (or taking a picture) and using it as the main ‘color’ on your creature.

Replay Value

I’ll definitely be coming back to Spore after I’ve defeated it. You can have multiple creatures — and though there’s no ability to share them or get other people’s creatures over the network, it’s still fun to create them.

There’s also a “survival mode” to the game where the screen is static instead of infinitely scrolling as you swim. Your goal there is to pick up food pellets while avoiding the bad guys, but there are different (and cooler) power-ups.

There’s also decent achievement tracking so you can try to ratchet up your combo points and, trophies, and the like.

Conclusion

Although, as I said, I’ll still keep coming back to Spore for awhile, it’s not quite deep enough or fun enough to make it a long-term go-to game for me. Barring some future updates like the social creature sharing of the full version, I expect I’ll find myself not playing Spore Origins in a couple of months simply because I’ve done everything that there is to be done. There’s actually a compliment in there — Spore is engaging enough that you’ll want to explore all its nooks and crannies.

Pros

• Creature Creator is fun
• Accelerometer / Tilt controls are good and responsive
• Great graphics

Cons

• Gameplay lacks some depth
• Long-ish start up time

Overall:

(Not one, but two premiere game reviews on TiPb today. If you haven’t already checked out the review of Spore for the iPhone, go get your evolution on!)

Star Wars: The Force Unleashed (Mobile) for the iPhone by THQ Wireless is available for $9.99 via the iTunes App Store. Alongside Spore, it’s one of the highest profile games released so far for the “funnest iPod (and iPhone) ever”.

Now, Star Wars was the first movie I remember seeing in the theater (which, yes, makes me old and tells you something about how big a deal actually going to a movie theater was in the days before PPV, torrentz, and home cinema!) I had a lot of the toys. I played a lot of the video games, from the early Nintendo fare that drove the sound track so far into overuse I still cringe when I hear Jawa, to the truly epic Battlefront II on the original Xbox. I even have had the prequels Jedi-mind-tricked out of my consciousness (“not the Star Wars you were looking for…”)

So yes, Star Wars is in my DNA every bit as much as Apple. Put them together and — even absent Megan Fox — and The Force Unleashed pretty much had me at announce. But would it hold me? Does THQ deliver Empire-class sizzle, or Phantom-style fizzle?

Check out the review, after the break!

Story

We play said apprentice, and right from the start, we’re told not to leave any witnesses alive — Imperial or Rebel alike. Keeps things nice and simple, at least to start.

If you’ve seen the game trailers, however, where whole Star Destroyers get pulled from the sky, you know this isn’t n00b Luke or aged Yoda or wasted Windu. This is the Force we always wanted…

… Just not enough of it. The Mobile version is cut way down from its big platform brothers, and ultimately doesn’t last as long as we’d have liked. Think of it as the Force Unleashed: Crib Notes Edition.

Score: 4/5

Music and Sound Effects

Now, the themes and effects are all classic to the point of being repeated pretty much endlessly for the last 30 years. That’s either made it endearing or maddening, depending on your point of view. Except for the aforementioned Jawa theme, it still works for me.

It all comes through well on the iPhone’s “casual listening” speaker, and better still with earphones. I had some issues with stuttering, but a force quit (hold down Home for 10 seconds) cleared it up. Strange that an iPod-based device could have sound issues, unless games are handled differently?

On the negative side, there’s no voice. Instead, we get text screen dialog after text screen dialog, in tiny, thin font. It’s strange to see on a device that can easily handle hour upon hour of podcast, but let’s just assume it’s a limitation of mobility and move on. (Although given the poor excuse for James Earl Jones the big consoles get, it could actually be a blessing!)

Score: 4/5

Graphics and Visuals

Given that split focus, how do the Force Unleashed’s graphics hold up in the actual mobile world? Surprisingly well. It’s nowhere near the PS3 version, of course, so if you’re expecting that, check yourself into real-hab immediately. I’d say Xbox and PSP were a bit of an overstatement as well, but having played me some Goldeneye 64 back in the day, these are on-par in the polygon pushing department, though the text-mapping is predictably — and happily — more advanced.

With regards to the art direction: some aspects are… cartoonish. Vader in the beginning, the lush yet animation-style (i.e. static) background plates. Not that the game as a whole shoots for realism, just that it doesn’t present a unified feel.

Also, I did have the same jitter issues I had with the sound, and while the force quit memory clean-up helped, it didn’t make it perfect.

Bottom line though? This game looks great… for a mobile game, and outstanding for a phone game.

Score: 4/5

Gameplay

A word of warning (and potential deal breaker to some): We don’t have any influence over where our Sith anti-hero goes. No directional control. No movement at all. Like Space Ace and Dragon’s Lair (Wikipedia them) and some of the older Star Wars PC games, cut scenes and the computer move us from situation to situation.

So what can we do? Stand there, get attacked, and have to deal with defense and counter. That’s our job, deflect laser fire, and show boxes, Droids, Storm Troopers, Rebels, and Jedi alike the true power of the Dark Side.

A tutorial starts off the game to teach us the basic Force Grip (a choke) and Throw, and as we progress, new tutorials teach us Force Push and Pull, Force Heal, Mind Trick, Dark Force Lightning, etc. Each is activated by a unique gesture we need to draw on the screen at the appropriate time. For some powers, like the initial Force Grip, the gesture is shown on the screen above the target — a helpful reminder. Simply draw it out and it happens. For others, like Force Heal, you have to either remember it, or pause the game and check the built-in reference — also helpful.

To add some measure of complexity, not all powers work on all enemies all the time, and later we have the ability to switch powers depending on foe and factors. For example, a two-finger upward swipe, downward swipe, or tap switches between Force Pull, Force Push, and Force Grip, with the gesture hint changing along with the power (or changing to an empty circle to show when a particular power will not prove useful).

Some may find flashing fingers all over the display distracting or disastrous, but it’s a touch-screen device, and while that paradigm is new, it’s a good attempt at dealing with controls absent a joystick or d-pad. This is especially true given that the accelerometer isn’t used for anything other than rotating the display. (Though it should be noted that the ability to rotate — and hence choose between between portrait or landscape mode — rocks and is executed with buttery smoothness.) Maybe next time THQ could throw us a bone and let us use that accelerometer to move our character around a bit, even just between action dioramas?

Along with the game mechanics, there are controls aplenty to pause the game, explore options, pick between continuing and starting a new story, and choosing chapters (once you’ve completed them and made them available for replay).

We can also drop in and out relatively well — an imperative on a phone-based game. Take a call, or switch out of the game, and when you come back, you can pick up at the scene where you left off (not just chapter!). This is a lesson in integrated device gaming other developers really need to pay attention to.

One perplexing choice, however, given the multi-touch-centricity of the iPhone, are the dialog boxes. You can hold down and pull scroll bars or hit the More button to move down long passages of text, but you can’t just touch them and flick. It’s the iPhone, dang it! We don’t need no sticky scroll bars.

Score: 4/5

Replay Value

There is a more difficult mode, which will likely appeal to hardcore gamers (which I am, admittedly, not), and since completed levels become stored as unlocked chapters specifically for replay, perfectionists and casual time-killers alike might be drawn back into them. Might.

Score: 3/5

Conclusion

Sure, the iPhone version doesn’t pack anywhere near the scope or power of $59 (PS3, Xbox 360), $49 (Wii), or $39 (PSP) versions, but with no real load times to slow us down, and the ability to drop in and out pretty much on a whim, it fits very well into the iPhone environment.

If you like the iPhone and you like Star Wars, it’s a no brainer. The story is intriguing enough and an interesting addition to the mythos, the sound is classic, the graphics are a contender, and the gameplay is workable.

If you like action games (minus, you know, moving) and want to experience the first important steps of Apple’s “Game On” initiative, it’s a similarly easy choice.

Otherwise you’re paying for the Star Wars name and the fancy production, and you probably want to look around the App Store a while before hitting that buy button.

Final Score

How does the Otterbox perform? Is it as secure and successful as the case suggests? Or is it just another case in the iPhone pipeline? Could it all be just a gimmick?

Read on for the rest of the review!

Design

From a quick glance, the Otterbox Defender doesn’t look much different than any other case. Upon closer inspection however, you begin to notice the well-thought design and construction. Though it adds a considerable amount of thickness to the iPhone, it feels great and solid in hand.

The Otterbox Defender comes in four separate pieces: a front and back hard shell, a silicone sleeve, and a belt clip. The Otterbox Defender includes a protective plastic cover for the screen and an exposed plastic to show the Apple logo—I mean you still have to know it’s an iPhone right?

The camera is also protected by a thin sheet of plastic and the headphone jack and docking port are protected via rubber caps. The speakers and microphone have a very thin sheet of protection on it. The volume, lock, and home controls are also protected by rubber buttons with the silent/ringer switch is completely inaccessible.

Overall, the design of the Otterbox Defender is extremely sturdy and solid. The choice to use a combination of a plastic hard shell with a silicone rubber skin is great because it combines the protection of a hard shell with the overall feel of rubber.

Usability

With such an intricate design for a case, it is obviously going to take time to apply and remove the Otterbox Defender to the iPhone. There are a lot of clips that need to be snapped together and rubber that needs to fit in specific holes, but after you get through that process, make no doubt about it, your iPhone feels as protected as can be. The silicone rubber skin is of great quality and feels great in hand.

All the buttons—volume, lock, home—are equally as responsive with the rubber covering them. Amazingly, the plastic screen that protects the actual iPhone touch screen does not inhibit the sensitivity. I was very impressed by how responsive the iPhone’s touch screen was under that layer of plastic. The only problem with the plastic screen is that if pressed with any amount of force, it would occasionally create unsightly air bubbles. There didn’t seem to be anyway around it.

The included belt clip is made from the same tough plastic as the hard shell and it locks the iPhone into it quite well. In fact, I often times had trouble pulling the iPhone out of the clip—the fit was that secure. The belt clip is able to rotate 360 degrees and the iPhone can be placed either be open faced or face backwards. My problem with the belt clip is that the home button is not easily accessible and it is too tough to remove for easy access.

I have very few complaints about the Otterbox Defender for iPhone because it offers as close to complete protection and coverage of every part of the iPhone. Plus, it gives off a secure and solid look and also feels wonderful. If you’re looking for protection or live an outdoor lifestyle, this case is truly one of the best available and the price can easily be rationalized to be ‘worth it’.

Final Thoughts

I’m very impressed with the Otterbox Defender for the iPhone because of its thoughtful design and excellent execution. I loved the feel of the case because it not only felt sturdy and solid but it also added grip to an obviously slick iPhone. It definitely feels like OtterBox didn’t cut any corners with this case.

Unfortunately, it does come with a fairly high price. But compared with other cases priced near the Defender, the Defender offers an infinite amount more protection. Though it does add considerable amount of thickness, if you’re looking for a case that protects your iPhone from the elements—thickness should be expected.

Also, it cannot be fully submerged under water, a definite shortcoming considering its target market. However, with all things considered, the Otterbox Defender for iPhone is great implementation of protection without compromise. Almost all the iPhone’s features are present with an unparalleled level of protection. I would consider this a buy for anyone who’s lifestyle is rugged, planning an outdoor trip, or is looking for the ultimate protection for their iPhone.

PROS

• Protects Your iPhone in Every Imaginable Way
• Feels Great in Hand
• All Buttons, Most Features Easily Accessible
• Solid Build Quality

CONS

• Adds Considerable Thickness
• Occasionally Leaves Air Bubbles Behind Plastic Screen Cover
• Pricey
• Belt Clip is a Tight Fit and Gives No Access to Home Button

FINAL RATING: 4.7/5

iTunes 8 is here and 95% of y’all are definitely going to want to get your upgrade on. A few of you might not until the pwnage situation clears up. A few more might want to avoid that Blue Screen of Death thing on Vista, although the good news there is we now have a decent fix (check that link).

Ok, so now what are we getting with iTunes 8? Follow us after the break!

iPhone Features

First up and dearest to our hearts — iTunes 8 combined with the 2.1 update to the iPhone will give us backups that don’t last for hours and hours (and hours).

Another nice bit: your iPhone info screen now shows more information about what’s taking up space on your iPhone. Namely — it has a new color for ‘apps’ instead of burying that information within ’0ther.’

Better podcast settings

iTunes is still our favorite way to grab podcasts on the desktop, but the options for how and what to download and keep were always a little too broad. That issue has been resolved with a little shuffling of the Preferences dialog. Podcast settings are now editable on a podcast-by-podcast basisi instead of globally in the Pref’s screen.

New Browsing View: Grid

1. It manages to cram more information (your media) on to one screen while simultaneously making that information easier to quickly browse.
2. With stuff like TV shows and podcasts, it shows you number badges indicating un-seen or un-listened to media.
3. Much like iPhoto, Artist view lets you ‘scrub’ your mouse across a thumbnail to get a quick glimpse of the albums to be found within.

Though we at TiPb are hopeful that Genius (see below) will become more and more useful as time goes on, for now Grid View is our favorite iTunes 8 feature.

Genius

The biggest new feature in iTunes 8 has to be Genius Playlists. Apple has taken a page from the Pandora and Last.fm playbook by helping users create playlists based on a certain song. The basic idea is this: you select a song, tell iTunes to create a playlist based on that song, and iTunes makes a list of up to 100 songs that it believes ‘go with’ that song from your library. For example, choose a Bob Dylan song and you might find Joan Baez in a playlist.

In theory, it’s nearly the perfect way to shuffle your music. Instead of a jarring switch from your secret stash of Kenny G songs to your hardcore rap, you immediately get a playlist of songs that fit the sort of mood you’re actually looking for.

iTunes also (anonymously) uploads your entire library into the cloud and collates your listening habits with millions of other iTunes users. The net effect is supposed to help Genius refine its playlist-creating abilities. That’s good news, because in these early days Genius isn’t quite Mensa-esque in either its ability to recognize songs or in choosing apt playlists to go along with them:

Nevertheless, Genius looks to be a great way to not only shuffle your music but also to (re)discover music in your vast iTunes library that you may have forgotten about. The fact that it’s also available on the iPhone is also great news.

Also notable, of course, is that there’s now a Genius sidebar that appears in your music listings. It offers opportunities to purchase related music that’s not in your library as well as the ability to fill out incomplete albums. If Genius doesn’t have information on a selected song, it defaults to showing top selling songs and albums in iTunes.

New Visualizer

There’s a new visualizer in iTunes, created by the barbarian group, and it’s sweet. Photos do better than words at conveying the new feel, but actually trying it does better than photos, so be sure you check it out.

New Terms and Conditions.

We’re not lawyers so we’re not going to delve into these just now — but we heartily invite you to give it a shot.

Many Bluetooth Headsets are beginning to make and market small, ultra-portable Bluetooth Headsets. Count Samsung as one of them because the Samsung WEP-500 Bluetooth Headset is a simple, stylish, and ULTRA-small Bluetooth Headset.

The headset itself is no bigger than a quarter, with such small stature does it sacrifice in performance? Or is the Samsung WEP-500 Bluetooth Headset the best of both worlds?

Read on for the rest of the review!

Design

The Samsung WEP-500 is a very impressive looking headset. It’s not the flashiest or shiniest headset around but I think that’s a good choice by Samsung’s Design Team. I think a lot of people will appreciate the WEP-500’s subtle style, it doesn’t overwhelm you with bells and whistles. The headset’s color scheme is classy, with a matte black outlining a sleeker bluish black. It also comes in a version with muted silver outlining a tasteful black.

The Samsung WEP-500 is unique because of its circular design and of course, tiny size. Unlike other ultra-portable Bluetooth Headsets, the body of the Samsung WEP-500 is fairly thin. The indicator light is also unobtrusive but also can be turned off by holding the volume button. I definitely enjoy the overall look and build quality of this headset. Too many times, Bluetooth Headsets scream ‘Hey! Look at me!’. The Samsung WEP-500 is confident enough in its styling choices that it doesn’t feel the need to overcome any perceived shortcomings.

Usability

Because of the WEP-500’s small size, the button layout is rather simple. There’s a multifunction button and volume controls. I found the multifunction button to be much too easy to press and overly sensitive. I’ve hung up on a few calls while trying to adjust the fit and didn’t know what hit me. The position of the button is expected but the button itself is just a little too sensitive for my taste; Samsung should have definitely made a stiffer, less obtrusive multipurpose button.

Another sacrifice in having such a small design is that it requires a charging cradle. I’m not a particular fan of charging cradles because it adds another item that needs to be carried. Luckily, the charging cradle doubles as a carrying case and the WEP-500’s battery life is better than similar headsets. Though 3.5 hours may be paltry to heavy users, for an ultraportable headset, it’s almost as good as it gets.

The fit is decent, the design is almost “in-ear” but it is not as bothersome as in-ear ear buds typically are. Though I did find a few instances where I felt as if the headset was about to fall out—the headset managed to stay fairly secure the whole time. However, I wouldn’t recommend running or even light jogging with this particular headset since there doesn’t seem to be an ear loop option.

A notable feature on this headset is the addition of a secondary microphone. I found it very surprising for a device so small to have TWO microphones. And you know what? The addition of two microphones seemed to have helped and make this headset a standout performer. Callers heard me loud and clear, the echo cancellation really seemed to work. Even in noisier settings, the callers didn’t complain as much as they have in testing of previous headsets.

Incoming audio quality is also very impressive. It has similar technology as Plantronics AudioIQ, which essentially means it adjusts the volume to your surroundings. Specifically, it’ll get louder in loud areas and quieter in quiet areas. Plus the in-ear design helps block out background noise, the incoming audio is really great.

Final Thoughts

Overall the Samsung WEP-500 is a solid performer. It combines subtle style with great audio performance, I am happy to use such a great piece of technology. The fit isn’t amazing but after a few times I’ve grown accustomed to it. The circular shape is unique in the world of Bluetooth Headsets and the indicator light isn’t blinding.

My biggest gripe is the sensitivity of the multifunction button. Samsung really should have made it a bit stiffer, I have accidentally ended a call too many times. After a while I got used to the sensitivity and made it more of a point to handle the headset with care. If Samsung ever comes up with a solution to this minor problem, the WEP-500 will become an excellent headset that everyone should own. In the meantime, I can still recommend this to anyone looking for an ultraportable headset because it still works as advertised: great styling and great audio quality.

PROS

• Great Subtle Design, Classy Look
• Very Good Audio Quality
• Decent Enough Battery Life Compared to Similar Products

CONS

• Ridiculously Sensitive Multi-Function Button
• Charge via Charging Cradle
• Still Not Enough Battery Life

FINAL RATING: 4.3/5

Bluetooth headsets are becoming increasingly popular, on a common day you’d run into plenty of people using these hands-free devices. Some make you look like a bionic man, others simply look bland, but there are a rare few that makes your head turn. The Motorola H9 Bluetooth Headset ($89.95) falls in that head-turner, borderline sexy category.

Sculpted to be no larger than a quarter, the Motorola H9 is sleek, lightweight, and unmistakably TINY. How can they fit a capable Bluetooth Headset in such a small package? Does it sacrifice performance for the sake of good looks? Is it even useful?

Read on for the rest of the review!

Design

Obviously, with such a strong emphasis on the size of the Motorola H9, it better be jaw droppingly small and impressive. And to that fact, it is, the headset is amazingly small yet it still manages to remain sturdy and look sleek.

A blue indicator light illuminates the shiny silver on the front face of the Bluetooth headset. Though eye-catching to most, some may find it annoying so pressing all of the control buttons can turn it off. But there is no denying that the Motorola H9 is one of the better looking Bluetooth headsets available, its combination of good looks and superb build quality makes it without a doubt, a high end set.

However, with such a strong emphasis on the size and design, Motorola keeps the functions of the H9 to a minimum. The key control is simple—a main multi button and standard volume buttons. The H9 is designed as an in-ear headset, so those that dislike the in-ear design should obviously stay away. Also, though the headset is tiny in size, it is a bit thicker than expected.

Usability

Because of the H9’s in-ear design the headset will take some getting used to. Though the lightweight of the H9 helps this issue, the in-ear design may not be for everyone. Also, It doesn’t come with an ear loop so though it is secure for daily use—running or even light jogging will probably dislodge the headset.

The fit is decent, after you get used to the in-ear design it slowly grows on you. It isn’t immediately comfortable like those from the Plantronics Line but it’s not uncomfortable either. The fit will probably boil down to how forgiving you are of in-ear designs.

Since there isn’t room for a charging port on the headset itself, the H9 is accompanied by a charging cradle. To charge, you insert the mini-USB port to the cradle and place the headset on the cradle. The charging cradle doubles as a portable charging unit, which is necessary since the H9 itself only holds 1.5 hour of talk time. With the charging cradle, you can add an extra 6 hours albeit at a 1.5 hour a time pace.

Overall, the Bluetooth headset performs solidly—earning rave reviews in more quiet areas but having problems in slightly noisier environments. It’s amazing that such a small piece of technology can perform as well as bigger-sized products. Though callers complained of background noise such as other voices and wind, when I used the H9 in the car, it performed quite well. The in-ear ear buds worked to keep the incoming audio quality clear because it manages to block out exterior noise.

Final Thoughts

Let’s be honest, with such a tiny design the Motorola H9 will obviously have some limitations. Pointedly, the battery life is a concern for constant travelers not everyone may prefer the fit. Luckily, Motorola packaged a charging cradle that offers a boost to the headset’s battery life and the in-ear design blocks out background noise and isn’t all that uncomfortable.

The most important aspect of the Motorola H9 is that it attempts to be unique in the bland world of Bluetooth Headsets and to that extent, it succeeds. The audio quality is near flawless in a quiet setting and it keeps pace with comparable (but bigger) headsets in noisy environments. If you’re looking for a long-lasting Bluetooth headset and your commute is noisy, the Motorola H9 is not for you. But if you want a stylish design that doesn’t skimp on quality, look no further.

PROS

• Incredibly Small Design
• Great Audio Quality in Quiet Environments
• In-Ear Ear Buds Makes For Outstanding Incoming Audo
• Stylish Look

CONS

• Short Battery Life
• Average Performer in Noisy Environments
• In Ear Design May Put Off Some

FINAL RATING: 4.5/5

Bluetooth headsets often offer the same feature set, the same styling, and the same performance. Plantronics is known for offering unique takes on Bluetooth Headsets and often add a new wrinkle to each headset in their product line. Popular because of their comfortable fit and Audio IQ technology, the Plantronics line constantly innovates.

With the Plantronics Voyager 815 Bluetooth Headset ($89.95), the innovation is an in-ear earbud and a sliding boom mic. Do they create a better Bluetooth Headset? Or are these features just bells and whistles? How does the Plantronics Voyager 815 perform?

Read on for the rest of the review!

Ed note: people looking to future-proof themselves might consider the Plantronics Voyager 855, it’s identical to the 815 but supports A2DP Stereo for music. If the iPhone ever supports Bluetooth Stereo, it’s a good option. Note, however, that the 855 has a 2nd earbud attached to the earhook, which might be annoying

Design

The Plantronics Voyager 815 falls in line with the look of a classic Plantronics headset. The sleek black plastic is outlined by a silver strip that tastefully adds symmetry to the design. It is extremely lightweight and feels very durable, Plantronics succeeds again in creating another quality looking Bluetooth Headset. The build quality is definitely that of a higher end headset.

There are three different in-ear earbuds you can insert to fit your ear not to mention the standard, included one. The in-ear earbuds are soft and malleable, they fit gently yet securely, in your ear. I found that the in-ear earbuds were very similar to high-grade earphones such as those from V-moda and Shure. Also, there are 2 different ear loops that allow you to stabilize the headset, though not required, I found it more comfortable with the ear loops attached.

The sliding boom mic is a unique feature in that it is supposed to make your outgoing audio sound clearer. There is no lock or extra click to fasten the boom mic, rather just simply a smooth slide to utilize the mic. You can also answer and end calls via sliding the boom mic. Though when extended, I felt the mic extension wouldn’t be as durable as the rest of the body of the headset because the plastic thins out. The headset is charged via micro USB.

Usability

The overall fit of the Plantronics Voyager 815 boils down to if you prefer the in-ear fit of noise isolating ear buds over the classic, less immersive regular earphones. Because this is strictly an in-ear headset, those who prefer the alternative should reconsider. The earbuds are of high quality materials and fit snugly in your ear canal, though the in-ear design may rub off some, the comfortable earbuds combined with the lightweight headset equals a great, almost unnoticeable fit.

The benefit of an in-ear design is that it blocks out surrounding noise and allows for a clear conversation. I found that though I’m typically not a fan of in-ear designs, using this headset is almost enough to convert me. Combining the AudioIQ technology (which automatically adjusts the volume to your surrounding) with the in-ear design, the incoming audio is superb. No static, great volume, and no background noise.

In varied tests with the PLantronics Voyager 815, I found that the outgoing audio quality was absolutely superb in quiet settings. Callers could hear my voice clearly without any digitization and no echoing. I was stunned by the quality of the outgoing audio quality, it worked wonderfully.

However, the Plantronics Voyager 815 isn’t quite the noise assassin that the Jawbone is so background noise is a bit of a problem. Extending the boom mic does help outgoing audio quality in this regard but the overall effect is minimal. Given a quiet surrounding and the Plantronics Voyager 815 excels, with a noisier background its performance is middling.

Final Thoughts

The Plantronics Voyager 815 Bluetooth Headset has become my go-to headset. The in-ear design blocks out surrounding noise and allows you to focus on the conversation. The fit is perfect, its lightweight body resting gently on your ears. The outgoing audio quality is superb when it is quiet and performs as well as most other headsets when background noise exists.

I think this is the perfect headset for anyone who prefers an in-ear design. The sleek and modern look is an added bonus and the comfortable fit is consistent with the Plantronics platform. Overall, this is easily one of the better headsets on the market today. You should consider it a BUY if you are looking for an in-ear design and a comfortable fit with great audio quality.

PROS

• Very Comfortable Fit
• Stylish Design
• Superb Incoming Audio Quality, Outgoing Audio Quality Shines In Quiet Areas
• Lightweight, Great Build Quality

CONS

• Average Performance in Noisier Environments
• In-Ear Design Not for Everyone

FINAL RATING: 4.5/5

Enigmo is a 3D puzzle-based game for the iPhone developed by Pangea Software that has been met with rave reviews, even earning a “Best iPhone Game” at WWDC 08. The basic premise is to put water droplets in the water container, oil droplets in the oil container, and lava droplets in the lava container using the specific materials given to you. The materials can range from sponges, springs, slides, or even laser guns and it uses basic physics to determine where each droplet will land.

Enigmo is already a popular game on the Mac, but does it translate to the iPhone? Is it worth your $9.99? How does it perform?

Read on for the rest of the review!

Overview

The basic premise of the game is to put 40 droplets of whichever substance (water, oil, lava) into their respective containers. When I first saw it demo’d, I saw the immense potential in this puzzle-based game.

There are various tools you can use to accomplish the mission of filling the droplets in the containers. What’s great is that the water reacts to the item like it would in real life. Specifically, sponges would soak up the water and drip at a constant rate, slides would allow the water to slide down, and well, laser guns (if they were real, they’re more like super soakers) would shoot the water as if the droplets were bullets.

So you get the basic idea, water drips and you navigate those droplets into the container.

The Look

Honestly, Enigmo isn’t a graphically intensive game. There aren’t environmental concerns or realistic textures; obviously it won’t be confused with Gears of War. With that said and for the type of game it is, Enigmo still looks great. The 3D animation is similar to its desktop counterpart and there is never any hiccup in processing the graphics. When playing Enigmo, you can feel the iPhone’s slick graphical prowess, the animation just feels ridiculously smooth.

Luckily, the good doesn’t just end there. The physics in Enigmo is what drives it. Each water droplet reacts as expected and the items attempt to mimic reality—placing an item in one spot is entirely different than placing the same item in another. Because this game is physics based, it is crucial that Pangea nail it—good thing they passed the physics test with flying colors.

My only complaint with the look of the game is that it gets a bit dark in certain spots which is forgivable because the look is supposed to mimic the inside of a water pipe. Also, the introduction screen can be improved; it simply does not do the game justice. (Just look at how bland that looks!)

Gameplay

Because Enigmo is a puzzle-based game that uses physics as its main control, it comes with few instructions other than to put 40 water droplets into the container. The entire is game is essentially trial and error, you see what works and what doesn’t and then adapt to it.  It would have been nice if the developers included some hints to certain levels. For example, if you beat one level in a certain amount of time you would earn a ‘hint’ which you could then use when you are stuck. It could clue you in to where to put a particular piece or what have you. 

The basic controls for the items are dragging and dropping wherever you please. Pinching or pulling the screen will result in zooming in or out. You are also able to twist the item at a more precise angle when dragging the aiming circle outwards. Double-tapping an item will result it being sent back to your inventory bar. You can pause or end the game by double-tapping the screen.

The secondary goal to the game (the first being getting the droplets in the container) is to do it as fast as possible. Each level starts with a predetermined point value and it quickly counts down until it hits zero. When it hits zero, it essentially means you have gained no points. This scoring system is a bit odd because at the more difficult stages, it seems as if the counter is going much too fast and you can’t possibly see how it is feasible to earn points in your first attempt. I assume that the points are geared more toward replay value because completing a difficult level is already rewarding enough.

Enigmo allows 5 different saves and you are allowed to save after completing each level. Though it won’t save exactly from where you last left off, it will bring you back to the beginning of the level. Also, because the premise of the game is set, Pangea promises to introduce more level packs for the iPhone. Furthermore, if you’re ambitious, you can create your own level on your Mac and import them into the iPhone. Enigmo can essentially serve as a platform for creating specific level packs, the replay value of this game is immense.

However, this game isn’t PERFECT. I would like to see some improvements in the controls, sometimes I unintentionally move a key piece when I wanted to actually move the screen and other times I wish the precise zoom aiming would lock so my finger wouldn’t have to be locked to the screen the entire time.Other than a few control quirks and the lack of hints, I believe that Enigmo is a great puzzle game and perfectly ported for the iPhone.

Final Thoughts

But no matter how frustrating the levels of Enigmo can get, the possibilities of the platform is endless. With more level packs coming and the ability to design your own, Enigmo looks like its going to be a keeper for iPhone gaming. Go buy it now!

PROS

• Great Physics and Good Graphics
• Intuitive Gameplay
• Great Replay Value
• Good Music

CONS

• Sometimes a bit dark
• Controls can be quirky
• Maddeningly Frustrating When You Don’t Know How To Pass a Level

Final Rating: 4.8/5

Can’t find a Bluetooth Headset that fits your ear? Struggling enough with the headset that it defeats the purpose of being ‘hands free’? Well, the Motorola MOTOROKR T505 Bluetooth In-Car Speakerphone ($99.95) is ideal for you. It is essentially a Bluetooth speakerphone, keeping your hands free and your ears clear while driving your car. Unlike a Bluetooth headset, the Motorokr T505 is meant to be used strictly in a car setting. How does it perform?

Read on for the rest of the review!

Design

The Motorokr T505 looks about the size of your average garage door opener, in fact, Motorola suggests that you clip it to the sun visor in your car. The build quality of the Motorokr T505 is superb. It has great texture to it, feeling soft yet sturdy. The buttons are defined and easy-to-reach, the overall look of the Motorokr T505 is subtly stylish, a gadget that looks more wonderous and mysterious than utilitarian and boxy. It will more often than not blend into your car instead of sticking out like an eye-sore.

Usability

The Motorokr T505 sets out to do a few things which are: keep your hands free while driving, provide a clearer and louder speakerphone than your iPhone’s, and transmit calls (and music) to your car’s stereo system via FM. It certainly can be considered a narrow scope to focus on, if you don’t drive a car you won’t need the Motorokr T505. But if you do drive a car, let me tell you this, I can’t imagine using anything other than the Motorokr T505 again.

Syncing your iPhone with the Motorokr T505 is easy as any other Bluetooth device. And I was able to use the speakerphone in seconds upon powering up. Also, charging is made available through mini-USB. What’s great about the Motorokr T505 is that there is no fumbling for the iPhone or having an earpiece attached to you the entire time you’re driving, it is truly a hands free device.

The speakerphone is clear, loud, and extremely audible. Callers were pronounced and unmistakably clear, this was as good as it gets for a Bluetooth speakerphone. Callers also agreed that I sounded great and hardly noticed that I was talking via speakerphone, they assumed I was on my iPhone the entire time.

When the FM transmitter in the Motorokr T505 transmits the call to your FM, it scans the best available station to broadcast to. Specifically, it searches for an empty signal and broadcasts your call to that transmission. Doing this, it gives your phone call a surround sound-esque platform. Though your mileage may vary with the FM transmitter, I live in Los Angeles, home of a multitude of FM stations and the Motorokr T505 still managed to find a signal that was empty and transmitted the conversation clearly to my car’s stereo.

However, because the Motorokr T505 is a speakerphone meant for in the car use, it can only fill a specific niche. For example, if you are always on the go but without a car, there is little need for a car speakerphone. But if you are a commuter who travels mainly by car, there are few better options. The only downside to the Motorokr T505 is when you are carrying passengers, your conversation is not exactly private since the whole car can hear and participate. For those worried about those situations, a Bluetooth headset might better fit that need.

Final Thoughts

I never imagined a car speakerphone to perform so well. I initially imagined the Motorokr T505 to be nothing more than a glorified speakerphone for the iPhone, but I was completely off base. It is a speakerphone that offers great compatibility, clarity, and flexibility. As a speakerphone it succeeds, but when transmitting to your FM stereo it surpasses all expectations.

This Motorokr T505 is a great solution for anyone who is looking for a hands-free device while driving in the car. I highly recommend it to all people who are in need of talking on their cell phone while driving.

PROS

• Great Sounding Speakerphone
• Transmits to FM stations well
• Stylish Design
• Easy-To-Use

CONS

• For Use in Car Only
• Conversations aren’t exactly private

Final Rating: 4.8/5

I originally bought my first Palm V so I could take some writing with me on the road. I “upgraded” later to a WinMob device in hopes Pocket Office would be a more robust solution, and then again to a Palm Treo, trying a couple high profile “Office” apps out. Confession: none of them really worked. They stripped out style sheets. They converted files to HTML and mangled format, and the feature sets just were never there. I abandoned them shortly after they abandoned me. Mobile editing just isn’t there yet.

While I wait for a next generation document editor to (hope beyond hope) prove me wrong, FileMagnet from Magnatism is proving to me the value of the iPhone’s built in, format-respectful, Quickview and Quicktime viewers, and added the previously missing — and tremendously useful — ability to transfer supported files effortlessly via WiFi, straight from your Mac (with Windows support already in development).

How does this wireless drive-mode, doc viewer hybrid work out? Read on!

Setup

FileMagnet is a good looking app. Devs-come-lately take note (and by the looks of some of the stuff passing for UI in the App Store these days, take careful note!). This UI is crisp and clean and — very smartly — they pay special attention to the setup. The app seems to automatically detect where you are in the setup and tell you what you need to know to get to the next step, be it enabling the WiFi connection or where to find and how to download the desktop companion app.

Likewise, the desktop companion app has just as big, every bit as bold, instructions — state aware, thank you! — on what to do to get your files sent over to your iphone.

This all combines to get you up and transferring very quickly.

Transfer and Management

FileMagnet uses the iPhone’s built-in 802.11g WiFi radio and Apple’s zero-config Bonjour protocol to do the heavy lifting. Performance was snappy, even for files several megabytes in size. (Note: your Mac and iPhone have to be on the same WiFi network, and security permissions — like firewall settings — have to allow the transfer. See the iPhone Remote app review comments for tips and trouble-shooting on these types of connections).

For fun, I tried a large file (167MB iTunes video file), but cancelled it almost right away. I thought FileMagnet might hang, but after 10 seconds or so, the progress bar disappeared, with no partial file left in the app (and hopefully no fragments eating space on the iPhone). (Since the video was wrapped up in FairPlay DRM, I’m fairly sure it wouldn’t have been usable outside the iPod app anyway).

If you transfer a file over and later don’t want it anymore, you can swipe to pop up a delete button, or give a quick tap to the edit button to turn on old school MobileMail 1.x style deletion. You can also remove files via the desktop app, or choose to download them to the Mac (presumably moving them over).

Note: I made sure to add an delete a few large files several times, and sync with iTunes between each state, and it seemed to accurately reflect the amount of Other data, which greatly increases my faith in clean file management, without any pesky remnants eating up my storage.

File Viewing

If you’ve ever Quickview’ed an Office (Word, PowerPoint, Excel), iWork (Pages, Keynote, Numbers), or PDF file in MobileMail, or streamed Quicktime video or audio in MobileSafari, you’ll be immediately familiar with how FileMagnet displays your stuff. In fact, it’s impossible to review FileMagnet without also reviewing the iPhone’s built in file viewers, which is unfortunate because some negative criticism about how long it takes files to open, and how some files don’t display properly are being misdirected at FileMagnet when they’re clearly limitations on Apple’s implementation. But then, this is what FileMagnet chose to work with. Let’s see how the combo holds up.

I’ve had problems before with large files on the iPhone, so I immediately transferred over a 750KB text-only Word doc and tried to open it. Sadly, an alert popped up saying my 16GB iPhone 3G was running low on memory (sand box issue?). Checking FileMagnet’s FAQ showed they were aware of the large file issue and were working on it for a future update (if they can pull it off, hopefully they’ll share their secret back with Cupertino).

A 125KB text-only Word doc opened in 13 seconds, however, and was highly legible. Since FileMagnet supports both portrait and landscape display, a quick iPhone rotation let’s you maximize either size or line count, and all the usual multi-touch double-tap and spread/pinch zoom in/out are likewise supported.

I test everything dept: A very old XLS file with embedded graphics and macros opened in a non-usable state (logo was blown up over the cells), but Quickview on the Mac renders it exactly as badly, so again its clearly a limitation of the OS. A CSV file (which I don’t believe is listed as compatible) strangely showed up in icon form, but didn’t have the option to open.

A 5MB graphic and animation heavy PowerPoint took 25 seconds to load, froze, unfroze, and ultimately crashed the app. Not to beat a dead horse into some sham of movement, but I’ve had the same problem in MobileMail.

A 32 page, 1MB PDF with text and graphics displayed beautifully and scrolled smoothly. I would have liked to have tested some ebooks, but didn’t have any available at the time. I’ll definitely be trying that out at a later date.

Next up was an a 3.5MB MP3. Started up in the Quicktime viewer almost immediately. Since the Quicktime viewer doesn’t support album art or metadata, never mind play lists, it’s not quite as enjoyable as using the iPod app proper, but the ability to move an MP3 (for example, something you created yourself in Garageband and have every right to do with as you wish) around outside the RIAA mandated iTunes single supported computer can be invaluable at times.

A 15.5MB MP4 file came up with sound but not video in the Quicktime viewer, and spawned another out of memory warning, but again consulting the FileMagnet FAQ led me to doing an iPhone restart, and following that the video played properly.

Quibbles

In the age old battle between ease of use and security, the same UI that allows for such simple setup sacrifices Remote or 1Password style PIN codes for a simpler “Always Allow”, “Allow Once”, “Cancel” single button-click authorization. Many users will likely appreciate this, and if you’ve got a strong WPA password on your WiFi router (and you do, don’t you?), both computer and iPhone will have to have been given the key to be on the same network, but even so the lack of PIN or app-specific password will no doubt make the security conscious bristle.

As mentioned above, support for larger files types is currently lacking. Nothing new there, as MobileMail and MobileSafari have the same problem, but given that the iPod app can handle large media at least, this might just be an issue of how much memory the SDK grants app developers, but it’s good to hear FileMagnet is working on it none the less. (Hopefully Apple is as well).

Preservation of state, where after viewing a file you can close it, open it again, and be right back exactly where you last had it open (be it the same page in a PDF or same time code in media) would be much appreciated. For hardcore ebook readers, bookmarking would be essential in the future.

The desktop companion app shows the size of the file under the file name. The iPhone app only shows the file type (MP3 Media, Word Document, etc.), which the desktop app doesn’t show. Both are useful, but given the size and complexity limitations of Quicklook and Quicktime, I’d personally prefer to have the file size on the iPhone (almost as a warning!).

Also previously mentioned, FileMagnet is currently Mac only, which makes some sense given how iPhone development significantly overlaps with Mac development, but Windows still owns the marketplace, even for iPhone users. The developers tell TiPb that Windows support is already “being polished in the lab” it isn’t yet available at the time of this review, so Windows users will want to hold off until it’s released.

Direct iPhone-to-iPhone WiFi transfer would also be interesting, but as I would mostly use that to send docs to co-workers, simply being able to email them would likely serve me just as well. (Though either would be welcome).

Q&A

Glen Aspeslagh from Ecamm/Magnetism was kind enough to arrange for a brief Q&A with FileMagnet developer Joshua Keay.

What prompted your original concept, or what was your inspiration for FileMagnet?

We made FileMagnet because we wanted to use it ourselves. We’re based in New York City and spend a good amount of time on the subway. It’s great to be able to read a book, look over a document or quickly scan through some images when you’re on the go. It’s pretty basic functionality, though the iPhone doesn’t have it built in. So we developed it for ourselves and quickly realized that it’d be useful for a lot of other people as well.

Any special challenges you faced in realizing the concept?

One of the big challenges we faced in developing the Application is coming up with an elegant interface for actually getting files onto your iPhone. There are a lot of different techniques that people have tried, including passcodes and synced folders, though many of them can quickly become confusing. We wanted a process that was very easy to understand and that could be accomplished without reading a manual. We’re quite happy with what we’ve come up with, in terms of balancing set up time and ease of use.

Any high-demanded or personal favorite features still pending?

[W]e’re working on some new importing options to enable users to add files to FileMagnet from all different sources rather than just your Mac. This new functionality will allow FileMagnet to integrate with a number of different usage scenarios, and we’re pretty excited to be developing them.

Thanks Joshua!

Conclusion

If you want to edit your documents on your iPhone, well, I reckon you still have a while to wait. If you want an elegant way to move Quickview or Quicktime compatible files to and from your iPhone, FileMagnet is worth checking out. While I see myself sticking with the iPod App for media in all but rare emergency transport situations, FileMagnet is definitely and improvement over uploading and linking to, or emailing documents, and I think I’ll be giving the PDF viewer a good workout in the weeks ahead.

Pricing and Availability

FileMagnet is currently priced at $4.99 and is available — where else — via the App Store. (iTunes link)

Pros

• Superb user interface
• Easy setup
• Effortless document and media transfer
• Excellent integration with iPhone Quickview and Quicktime

Cons

• Currently Mac only (PC version in development)
• Easy setup comes at the expense of security
• Lack of “bookmarking” reduces user experience
• Inherits limitations of Quickview and Quicktime, especially with regards to file size

Rating

4/5 for Mac users
(Not available for Windows at this time)

While Apple waits on manpower/priority celestial alignment to someday enable the long requested cut, copy, and paste functionality in the iPhone OS, Proximi’s MagicPad has decided to take multi-touch into their own hands, and provided something far more than what they describe as a proof of concept: a rich text editor which, a few limitations aside, brings Apple’s OS future very much into the App Store present.

Text Selection

Apple provides a user experience for insertion point placement that involves tapping and holding your finger down until a magnifying loupe pops up and lets you more accurately position the curser. To zoom in on a photo or fill the screen with a web element, Apple gives you the double tap. Many have wondered what an interface for text selection (the pre-requisite for Rich Text formatting and cut, copy, and paste) could or would look like — and some have even wondered if getting it “right” was what was delaying the functionality.

MagicPad combined the insertion point placement tap-and-hold with the zoom double-tap, to text select via double-tap-and-hold. And while it may not be what Apple will ultimately term “right”, could it be “right now”?

Read on to find out!

MagicPad’s text selection choice will likely be loved by some, hated by others, fill more than a few blog posts, and eventually either be copied or obsoleted by Apple (something the developers previously told TiPb they were very much hoping for).

Personally, I found it almost immediately usable, which is perhaps the most important factor for me. Nice touches include the ability to tap-and-hold to get the zoom loupe for insertion point, then tap-again-and-hold to activate text selection. Quick-selection works something like double-clicking on a PC to select a word: Tap-tap-hold-and-drag to highlight the current word no matter where the insertion point is (use the previous tap-hold-insert-tap-hold to select only part of a word). While it looks complicated when written out, it feels very organic. The nature of the loupe itself, of course, can make either insertion or selection tricky, but it gets easier quickly.

Rich Text Styling

Unlike the built in Notes App, in all its mono-sized, Market Felt ug-ness (seriously, does that font have something on Steve Jobs? Pictures? Video? What?), MagicPad allows expanded control over font face, size, color, and style/decoration.

Fonts

Selectable fonts include Serif (Times New Roman?), Sans Serif (Helvetica?), Marker Felt, Cursive (Zapfino?), Mono (Courier New?), and Type (American Typewriter?). While only a subset of the subset of fonts Apple includes on the iPhone, it covers the bases.

Point Sizes

Though not as fine-grained as a slider, button selectable sizes step from 14, through 16 and 24, to 36 points, which is a good mix given the 320×480, 160dpi nature of the iPhone’s screen.

Colors

Whether due to current interface limitations (the need for large, easy to tap buttons) or simple presentation realities (the need for consistent, matchable colors), MagicPad currently provides a restrained 8 color choices. Standard black is joined by red, green, and blue, and rounded out with preference towards the warmer orange, pink, violet, and capped off by gray. It’s not hard to imagine, however, that like early graphics programs, 8 will someday jump to 16, and perhaps even 32 or more.

Styles and Decorations

Though not all fonts support all styles or decorations, with MagicPad you can easily choose from any available bold or italic styling, or underline or strike-through decoration.

Cut, Copy, and Paste

What all iPhone owners have been waiting for, cut, copy, and paste functions as simply as simple functionality should. Once selected, a quick tap of the tools button brings up the same type of selector as the Rich Text formatting, with the choice to — wait for it! — cut out the selected text, copy it, or paste it in at the current insertion point.

Quibbles and Q & A

One problem that immediately jumps out with MagicPad was the lack of the auto-text completion that makes the iPhone soft/virtual keyboard usable in so many other apps. Brian Radmin from Proximi was gracious enough to answer some of our questions about this.

Is the lack of auto-correction a limitation imposed by the API given what else you were trying to accomplish?

Apple’s SDK does limit us from using the built-in auto-correct feature because of the way MagicPad needed to be developed.

We are in the process of building around this and definitely know how much utility the auto-correct function brings…especially to a text-editor.

So it’s something that will come in an update?

While our main focus was to create a working case implementation for our text-selection (and copy & paste) UI candidate, we are also working hard and committed to producing a great feature complete productivity app which includes auto-correction. We hope to have it in place for our next version.

Thanks Brian! Does that mean we can request “undo” as well? It sure would come in handy to roll-back some of our less considered stylings and pastings.

On the quibbles heap, rather than the built-in MobileMail App, MagicPad uses its own email server to send out MagicPad notes, complete with a CAPTCHA requirement. While a privacy policy and terms of use are prominently displayed along with the more common email fields, this seems like a less than ideal solution, and something I likewise hope is made obsolete in future releases of either the SDK or MagicPad itself.

Update: Brian let us know that yes, indeed “undo” is in the pipeline, as is CAPTCH-free email, though until Apple allows RTF via MobileMail, it will still need to go through Proximi’s servers.

Conclusion

As a proof-of-concept for text selection and thus, Rich Text and editing functionality, MagicPad is a big, bold step up onto Apple’s plate. A dare. Perhaps a double one. Not the final answer, but the only current one and while not everyone will agree with the implementation, the bottom line is it works as implemented.

As a Notes replacement, the extra features are great, if you can live without auto correction and the privacy/security of the built in MobileMail application. (And due to the SDK restriction on sharing data, we can’t mix and match the best of both apps either). The killer Notes app, however, will need to support syncing back to the desktop and cloud (ActiveSync or MobileMe), so until Apple pulls the trigger on that most basic of functionality, every note app will fall a little short.

Pricing and Availability

$3.99 via the App Store (iTunes Link)

Pros

• Working cut, copy, and paste on the iPhone, come on!
• Rich text styling
• Did I mention CUT and PASTE

Cons

• No auto-correction for spelling
• Uses 3rd party email server

Rating

4.5/5 (bonus points for sheer audacity).

Are you a frequent international traveler? Are you always confused by international electrical outlets? Have you realized that there are a gazillion different electrical outlets requiring a gazillion different plugs? Well, the Mobi Products World Wall Adapter for S&C Cables for iPhone 3G, iPhone ($34.95) tries to simplify the tangled messy world of cables by giving you almost every solution in a simple adaptor. How does it perform?

Read on for the rest of the review!

Design

Also, the charger has two USB ports available for charging. Thank god USB is universal because if each region had their own USB, well that would be more of a doozy than the electrical outlets.

Usability

The On/Off switch and Indicator Light made it easy for me to determine if the adapter was working and its light weight made it unnoticeable when moving from station to station. However, because the adapter includes so many different charging capabilities, it is a little bit bulkier than ideal size, but this can be forgiven since the adapter packs so many features into one device.

The execution of the Mobi Products World Wall Adapter is smart and purposeful. It all is designed to look like a one piece device but when put to use, the usefulness of all three adapters shines through. The inclusion of the three main electrical outlets allows the adapter to be compatible with over 150 countries worldwide. There are also built in surges and spikes protection system to protect your electronic devices from potential damage.

Final Thoughts

PROS

• Simple, Straightforward Design
• Two USB Ports for Charging
• As close as you can get to a Universal Charger

CONS

• A tad bit bulky

Final Rating: 4.8/5

Need a place to keep your hands free when you hit the gym? Looking for the ideal workout case for your iPhone? The Marware Sportsuit Convertible case for iPhone 3G ($34.95) and original iPhone ($34.95) is a workout case that keeps your iPhone always within reach and your hands free to lift weights, use the yoga ball, run faster etc. It also doubles as a slim-profile sleeve case. And even triples for a clip-on case that is attachable via belt clip. How does it all perform? Does it hold up over time?

Read on for the rest of the review!

What Comes In The Box

• Marware Sportsuit Convertible
• Arm Band
• Belt Clip
• Key Pouch

Design & Fit

What’s unique about the Marware Sportsuit Convertible is its versatility. Marware stresses that you are able to use the workout case as an independent case as well. Though it may look unsightly, the case itself offers great protection with padded backing and edges and a full screen protector.

The Marware Sportsuit Convertible leaves room open for all of the iPhone’s sensors, the camera, ear speaker, and headphone jack. The belt clip works as well as any other belt clip. Most of my testing concerns the Marware Sportsuit Convertible Case as a workout Case.

Usability

In my testing, I found the case to be extremely comfortable and usable. I found the case easy to remove from the arm band and most of the iPhone’s buttons easily accessible. There are gray outlines that detail where the buttons on the iPhone are (not like you would forget, but a nice touch). Though the iPhone does lose some touch sensitivity behind the plastic screen protector, it didn’t seem to be a deal breaker for me. Whatever I needed to get done in the gym—changing playlists, increasing volume, make a quick call—the Sportsuit Convertible handled well enough.

The material of the arm band is great and I rarely noticed my iPhone attached to my arm when running. The velcro attaches well and the arm band is always secure. The quality of material that Marware uses in the Sportsuit Convertible was a great choice. As a workout case, the Marware Sportsuit Convertible succeeds.

Final Thoughts

Though it was a complete pain to remove the iPhone from the case, when it was in the case my iPhone felt safe and secure. There was never an issue of looseness and my iPhone was never in danger of falling onto the treadmill (oh the horror!) or getting smashed by some free weights. Obviously, if you were to use this as an everyday case, the plastic screen protector wouldn’t be the most ideal for heavy touch screen usage, but the Sportsuit Convertible is perfect for a trip to the gym and is rugged enough for any physically demanding exercise.

PROS

• Great Build Quality, Neoprene feels soft
• Secure Arm Band
• Useful Key Pouch

• A VERY, VERY tight fit. A little difficult to remove the iPhone
• Not the prettiest design
• Loses some touchscreen sensitivity

Twitter, Twitter, Twitter, oh how I love thee. Now I can really love thee with Twitterrific for the iPhone! If you are a fan of the very popular microblogging service Twitter, you are in for a rare treat with Twitterrific for iPhone from The Icon Factory! This application comes in two flavors: a free version with a very unobtrusive banner at the top or a paid version for $10 with no banner advertising and an extra theme.

The Basics 

You have to create a Twitter account before using Twitterrific. Once you have an account, you login with your Twitter username and password. After that, it’s off to the races!

You have a list of “tweets” from people you follow listed on the main screen. You can scroll though this list with a flick of your finger. The bottom of the screen has four simple icons:

• Refresh
• Post
• Info
• Settings

Refresh simply refreshes the screen to see any new tweets. The post icon opens up a box with the standard keyboard for you to enter a tweet with 140 characters or less. The screen has a counter to let you know how many you have left. Twitter also gives you the ability to “direct message” one of your friends on Twitter. To do this in Twitterific, simply tap the post icon in the box again and the post will change to a direct message post. Tap the icon one more time and you get a reply post (it changes to reflect the last post you have selected for a reply. Want to reply to someone else, select another post).

Pictures, Locations and Browsing, Oh-My!

When you are creating a post, Twitterific also gives you some additional options. For example, you can tell Twitterrific your location and it will update the Location field in your Twitter profile with where you are right now. The will use the GPS functionality in the iPhone 3G or My Location with the iPhone 2G.

You can also take a picture and attach it to your Twitter post. How? With TwitPic of course! TwitPic is a free service that lets you post pictures via Twitter. It works on the same premise as TinyURL. The “tiny URL” is added to your post. You can then view the picture buy clicking on the link in the Twitter post.

But wait, what if you are on your iPhone and you tap on a link? The thought in your mind right now is that the link will open in Safari, right? OH NO! Instead, Twitterific has built in a mini-browser using WebKit you so never leave the application! You can zoom and everything just like mobile Safari. Truly awesome.

Settings

The settings in Twitterrific are the basics. You can turn sounds on/off use screen names, show hints and even enable left-handed controls. What I think is another truly innovative feature is that Icon Factory have added a JavaScript bookmark for you to post links directly from Safari to Twitterrific! That is really going the extra mile for a 1.0 product. The only downside to this is that it requires some manual editing once installed, but hey, anything for Twitter…

Conclusion

I can’t say enough about this app. If you use Twitter, this is an absolute no-brainer. Icon Factory has some followers from their popular desktop version of Twitterific and I am sure they will be picking up more fans with the iPhone/iPod Touch iterations. The simplicity of the layout, options and ingenuity with pictures and locations really makes me want to shout from the rooftops use this application. What? You have not downloaded it already?

Ratings (out of 5)

• Look and Feel: 5
• Navigation: 5
• Features: 5
• Reliability: 4
• Overall: 4.75

Pros:

• Easy to use
• Every Twitter feature you could want!
• Looks good
• Intuitive
• Mini browser saves time

Cons:

• Performance can be a little sluggish. I am sure this will improve with time.
• Crashed once while using it. Again, will be addressed in a future release.

Could last Friday have been any more massive for Apple? Following on the heels of slew of preparatory updates including OS X 10.5.4 and iTunes 7.7, the transition from .Mac to Mobile Me, and — oh, yeah — the highly anticipated launch of the iPhone 3G hardware (see Dieter’s review), Apple also dropped a little something called the 2.0 firmware. Available pre-baked in the new iPhone 3G, Apple didn’t spare the love for owners of the original iPhone 2G who receive it as well as a FREE downloadable upgrade, as do owners of the iPod Touch (minus the phone, camera, SMS, and GPS functionality, and the FREE part — $10 please).

The 2.0 firmware was first demonstrated back at the Apple iPhone SDK Roadmap event in March 2008 and immediately went through a very long, very public beta process where almost anyone could sign up and download it. In spite of the NDA (Non-Disclosure Agreement), during the 8 different betas released to developers, many new features that weren’t originally demonstrated still leaked out all of the interwebs. But did all of them?

Read on to find out!

What Hasn’t Changed

Before we dive in to all the new hotness, let’s just get some housekeeping out of the way. Some apps remain pretty much unchanged (at least to our eyes!) from the 1.4 firmware that immediately preceded this release. This includes:

• Home. 3G label replaced E(DGE) for the new hardware, and dock icons look to get a tad more translucent when they zoom out or back in, but otherwise its the same Springboard as before.
• Text. SMS messages tweaked to allow following or bookmarking of texted linls, but still no SMS forwarding. Still no MMS.
• YouTube. It’s your vidz, what else did you need? Oh… inline Flash…
• Stocks. Same old widgety goodness from the last gen.
• Weather. See stocks. No HTC Touch Diamond-style animated goodness here.
• Clock. What do you want, it’s timeless!
• Notes. Still no sync. Still no integration with the other PIM (Personal Information Management) apps. Still no landscape keyboard. Stevie, please!
• iTunes. Icon tweak aside, you can still buy songs over WiFi, and that’s still it. No media and nothing long-form.
• iPod. Gets some small tweaks like video rotation (you can watch portrait or landscape now), and video podcasts are gone from the audio section, so no more listening-only option (?!). But how about metadata? A2DP Stereo Bluetooth support ?

Sure, constraints on time and resources, not to mention battery life trade-offs mean we can’t have everything and all at once, so let’s see just what Apple did choose to update this time around…

Calendar

The most visible for every user in Calendar is color! No longer doomed to dull blue, the new Calendar 2.0 will retain your color settings when you sync from Outlook or iCal, and what’s more — will use transparency effects to visualize overlapping effects. Very sweet.

The biggest change overall, however, is integration with over-the-air, wireless syncing via “push”. For more details on these, see our already-posted reviews for both Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync and Apple MobileMe “Exchange for the rest of us” service.

Camera

The Camera 2.0 software has also been tweaked to improve image quality but the big news is that it is now location aware, which means it will geo-tag your photos.

For more on how CoreLocation services work, including how to grant and reset permissions, check out the sections on Maps and Settings (below).

If Flickr popularity is any indicator, a lot of people will welcome these updates.

On the minus side, there’s still no ability to tweak basic camera settings, however, and no Mobile iPhoto-like post-processing options have been added. Apple may figure users will do this once they sync back to their computer, but if you want to take a shot and quickly email it upload it, the ability to do basic corrections on the iPhone itself would be more than handy.

Photos

Photos is mostly unchanged from 1.4. The only difference is that now, in addition to photographs taken with the iPhone’s built camera, the Camera Roll also store screenshots.

How do you take a screen-shot? Press the Home Button and Sleep/Wake button (on the top) at the same time.

For the iPod Touch, since it lacks a camera and hence a Camera Roll, screen caps are stored under Saved Photos.

An almost invisible addition if you don’t know about it, it’s still much appreciated (especially by reviewers, no doubt!)

Still no ability to tweak photos, Mobile iPhoto-like, but as a viewer — and a way to stun crowds with accelerometer spinning, finger-pinch zooming — it’s still a killer app.

Maps

Maps 2.0 gets a minor face lift, using the more literally page curl icon to activate — what else — the page curling to reveal the extra options added during the late 1.x era.

For iPhone 3G owners, however, Maps also adds the much more precise location functionality provided by the new aGPS functionality. Rather than just the large blue circle (sometimes encompassing entire city blocks) that Google cell tower mapping and Skyhook’s WiFi Router mapping provided previously, aGPS now gives a small blue dot within yards/meters, if not right at your exact current location. (Complete with eye-candy fading ripple effect).

Leveraging the cell and WiFi location services to handle some heavy lifting, the aGPS is remarkably snappy.

Moving? No problem, the blue dot will follow you.

From staying on route to keeping track of where you parked (via the pin drop), this functionality is huge, especially for people who have no inborn sense of direction… (present!)

Note: Like all location aware apps (including Camera and even 3rd party App Store apps like Twitteriffic), Maps will ask your permission to use your current location the first few times you launch it. Keep agreeing and it will stop bothering you. If you later have privacy concerns, you can revoke your permission in the Settings and force it to ask you again next time (see below). In the age-old battle between convenience and security (where the former often — and unfortunately — trumps the latter), this is an interesting and acceptable solution.

Incredible new functionality, though it is lacking in turn-by-turn

Calculator

Apple’s Vice President of Design, Jonathan Ive, loves him his mid-1900s Braun, and few places is that more obvious than the iPhone’s Calculator app. While the basic app itself remains unchanged from 1.x in its default, portrait mode, if you switch to landscape, Calculator 2.0 now switches with you, expanding to become a full-on scientific calculator.

While I have pretty much allowed myself to atrophy into a near math-lexic state, this had been a long requested feature and is a very welcome addition.

What would also have been a very welcome addition? The ability to backspace to precisely correct input errors. The ability to nuke the entire current display with the “C”-Clear button may be more in keeping with the 50 year old physical calculator from which the iPhone calculator was derived — and thus default behavior for those raised on said calc — it’s just not how modern computer input should work. Bad user experience.

Settings

While Settings is not the sexiest app in the bunch, it underpins pretty much everything else and has received quite a few updates in 2.0. Fire and foremost is a new “Fetch New Data” section, while “Mail” has been renamed the MobileMe- and ActiveSync-enabled “Mail, Contacts, Calendars”.

The Fetch New Data panel lets you globally toggle “Push” data syncing (for MobileMe and ActiveSync), schedule fetch/pull requests (e.g. for POP or IMAP email checking), and an Advanced panel to select Push or Manual (with the same type of scheduling set up in Fetch) for MobileMe.

Although a system-wide change, one thing is obvious in Settings that’s fantastic news for anyone that uses strong, even pseudo-random passwords (no, not cut, copy, and paste, don’t be silly!). Apple has changed the way password fields work, now leaving the last character you typed visible for a few seconds so you can minimize the chance of typos. Not perfect, but lightyears ahead of the old system which pretty much made everyone and their IT department shorter and simplify passwords, again trading security convenience. Good Job!

General Settings adds a new On/Off toggle for Location Services, to globally allow your iPhone to use the Google cell, Skyhook WiFi, and for iPhone 3G, aGPS technologies to keep track of where you are — or not.

A new section called Restrictions allows you to selectively disable (via a 4-digit Pin number), iPod content flagged as “explicit” (though sadly only for violence and adult subject matter, not explicitly poor taste or writing/production…), and potentially inappropriate Safari web pages and YouTube videos, as well as access to spend money on the iTunes WiFi Music and App Stores.

Good stuff there for parents, even if no toggles will prove perfect and parents will still need to monitor their young hax0rs lest they find a way around them.

The Keyboard and International sections have been beefed up in anticipation of Apple’s 70+ region eventual iPhone 3G rollout (and since the iPod Touch has already been available for almost a year in most areas, about time too!)

Yummy. Having done a couple of years of Mandarin, while I haven’t had the chance to try out the Chinese handwriting recognition yet, I’m eager to and will definitely report back in a future post.

Last in the General Settings, Reset has been updated to let you change your mind about previously allowing or disallowing location services (for the Camera, Maps, and some App Store Apps), and to go along with the new emphasis on enterprise features, Apple’s enabled Secure Erase, and warns it will take 2 hours just to prove it’s serious.

Given previous reports that AT&T refurb iPhones contained the data from previous users, this is an important addition to a device that can easily contain all your personal and business data. Hopefully — for Steve Gibson’s sake! — Secure Erase uses several passes of pseudo-random data writes, and not something patterned like zero-ing out, which can still be subtracted to reveal the underlying data — if you have the tech and the will to go to the trouble, of course!

For Mail, Contacts, Calendars, in the Mail, the only new addition is the ability to add Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync and Apple MobileMe accounts (see our previous walkthroughs for more). Contacts and Calendars give similar options, allowing you to choose which account you want as default, how you want your information sorted and synced, and other bread-and-butter style management features. Newly added is the ability to Import SIM Contacts, which may be useful for people upgrading from GSM feature phones and who stores a lot of data on their SIM chips. For ActiveSync Calendar users, you can toggle New Invitation Alerts On/Off.

The last major change to settings is that now App Store apps, like AOL’s AIM, can add their own panels to Settings. Not all do, with others choosing to keep their own local settings within the apps. Daring Fireball, Ignore the Code, and others have commented on the relative merits and implications for Apple’s Mobile HIG (Human Interface Guidelines) for both approaches. I’d just add that Mac apps can have their own Preferences, or can add panels to the global Settings app. Perhaps the iPhone environment could likewise label local options as Preferences to avoid user confusion with the Mobile Settings app proper.

App Store

The only new icon on the first page of the 2.0 home screen, App Store is potentially the killer feature of 2.0, and one of the biggest ripples in the mobile market thus far. Check out our previous coverage in Brian’s How To review.

The core concept really is game changing, but even as some accuse Apple of being too controlling (and they are to the extent they will not allow certain classes of apps, nor the discussion of the SDK in public), they obviously weren’t controlling enough to keep out the silly, duplicative, buggy, ugly, and sleazy dev dwarves. But we’ll post more on that later.

Bottom-line for me? The cream of the crop put to shame any previous mobile development ecosystems. It really might be the next major computing platform…

Phone (and Contacts!)

Phone’s changes are primarily in the Contacts section, and as special bonus, Apple snuck the iPod Touch’s dedicated Contacts app into the 2.0 firmware for iPhone users as well (though the hid it on the second screen). What’s the point? Well, first its nice to have if you just want to access your Contacts in fewer taps. Second, unlike the Phone app’s contacts, Nate Bird points out that the Contact apps allows for you to add contacts while speaking on the phone. Nice bit of extra functionality there!

Rounding out the contacts goodness is the long awaited ability to search your contacts. If you’re at the top, you’ll see the search box ready to go. If you’ve already scrolled down, just tap the magnifying glass icon above the letter A on the alphabet running down the right side, and you’ll be whisked back up to it.

Drawbacks? It’s… not exactly zippy to bring it. We’re talking EDGE speed here, not 3G for the interface. But that problem plagues more than just contact search, so I’ll save it for the end.

For the rest of the enhanced contact functionality, see our previous reviews for Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync and Apple MobileMe.

Mail

At the risk of being repetitive, the major new feature in MobileMail 2.0 is the “push” integration of add Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync and Apple MobileMe (see our previous reviews for the details).

Management gets a boost with multi-move and multi-delete functionality. Unlike 1.x, where you had to individually select and approve each message for deletion, in 2.0 you can select as many as you see and wipe them out all at once. Great for nuking “push”-spam according to Dieter!

Smaller, but also very nice new additions include, if you’ve setup multiple accounts, the ability to see which account your sending from, and change it on the fly if you want to.

Receive a picture in an email? Now with 2.0 you can hold your finger down on it for a second, and Mail will ask if you want to save the image. If you do, it will be filed in the Camera Roll, same as screen captures. (Or the Saved Images if you’re using the iPod Touch).

I also noticed (though haven’t been able to verify yet if this is new to 2.0) that when forwarding an email, I was prompted as to whether or not I wanted to include the attachments. If this isn’t new, d’oh! Where’ve I been? If it is, equally sweet.

Safari

Update: Safari did get much, much faster, especially in Javascript execution! Still, I’m waiting for a full MobileSafari update that brings in some of the new WebKit technology, like the lightning-quick SquirrelFish javascript engine, which should go a long way to speeding up and stabilizing some of the more script-intensive sites. HTML 5, CSS animation, audio and video tags, SQLite local storage, and all the rest as well…

Maybe in 2.4?

Right now we get the same image-saving ability built into Mail (see above), and according to Daring Fireball, a horizontal keyboard that’s roughly 30 pixels shorter, consuming less of the vital real estate than it’s 1.x counterpart. Personally, I didn’t notice. Confession: I don’t use it much. I’m fine with the vertical keyboard. Call me a mutant if you must, but I really like the keyboard. (But then, I never liked, and hated using, Treo and Blackberry hard keyboards, so maybe even more pariah than mutant, eh?)

For those who do prefer the landscape keyboard, Apple still hasn’t seen fit to enable it system-wide, like in Mail, Notes, or any other app in which it might prove beneficial.

3.0?

Sigh.

Conclusion

Overall, iPhone Firmware 2.0 is a stunning achievement that really puts the iPhone on par with the Apple II and Mac as one of the great revolutions in modern technology. It takes it beyond simple Phone + iPod, or even smartphone, and makes it the leading contender for the next great shift in computing.

That said, it’s still far from perfect, and more to the here and now, suffers from stability issues and overall sluggishness problems that make me think Apple was cramming until the very last minute to finish the 2.0 release. That some users have reportedly fixed their problems (including overly-yellow screens, App Store app crashes, etc.) by hooking up to iTunes and restoring to a 2.0 firmware 2 build numbers later than the one that shipped makes this seem even more likely. (And no doubt, Apple is already prepping a 2.0.1 or even 2.1 update to polish things up — hey, it happened with the original iPhone!).

If I had to give it a score right now, it would still be a 10, with the understanding that when it came to the 2.0 release, the bar was reset to 11 early on.

If you’re an iPhone 3G owner, you already have it. If you’re an original iPhone 2G owner, it’s a free — and therefore no-brainer — upgrade (now that Apple’s servers are working again!). If you rock an iPod Touch, and are worried about the $10 “non-subscription accounting mandated” charge, I would still recommend it. It’s almost the exact same price as Super Monkey Ball, which many of you will want to download immediately there after…

So there it is, my iPhone 2.0 review. Did I miss anything? Have you discovered any more hidden gems buried anywhere? Let us know!

We’ll be bringing your our iPhone 3G review in two parts.  Part one (the part you’re reading now) is where we’ll give you a full, in-depth review of the new iPhone 3G Hardware.  Here you’ll find details on GPS, 3G speeds, the feel of the actual physical device, etc. If you’re on the fence as to whether or not you should upgrade to the iPhone 3G, we’re here to help and here’s where we are, uh, helping.

Part two will focus on iPhone 2.0 software, where a lot of the real magic this week is happening and it’s available on both versions of the iPhone.  That review is coming soon, for now, let’s take a look at the iPhone 3G hardware with (much) more depth than we gave you in our iPhone 3G unboxing video and picture gallery

Look and Feel

The 3G’s most significant change from the 2G is that the back of the phone has been switched from a flat piece of aluminum combined with a plastic bottom to an all-plastic bottom. It comes in white and black. All of this is nothing new to you, likely. What you might not know is that the plastic is, for lack of a better term, high-grade. It’s very hard, it almost feels more scratch-resistant than the original’s aluminum back (though this surely isn’t the case).

While I was initially worried that the plastic back would feel cheaper than the aluminum, that fear turned out to be unfounded. The plastic back may look a little less professional, perhaps, but I view it as a lateral move instead of a downward one. The added benefit of improved reception and GPS (more below) more than makes up for it.

Otherwise, the basic shape of the iPhone 3G is, well, darn near identical to the original iPhone (henceforth “the iPhone 2G” or just “original.”). You’re looking at a thin slab whose front is dominated by a large, 320×480 screen with a home button on the bottom and a speaker on the top. Compared to the original, the 3G’s only major difference on the front is that it’s slightly wider and therefore has a black ‘edge’ on the left and right sides of the screen. I’m not a fan, but what can ya do?

The iPhone 3G is also ever-so-slightly taller and thicker than the 2G. The net effect ought to be that the iPhone 3G feels much larger than the 2G, but actually that’s not the case at all. The reason is that the back of the iPhone is curved — it’s actually thinner at the edges than the original. The iPhone 3G feels as good in the hand as the original, if not better. There’s a warmth to the plastic that’s not there in the aluminum.

Rounding out the look and feel, what few buttons the iPhone 3G has are now metal and look and feel pretty darn good to me. More subtly, the grille on the earpiece speaker (and also on the speakers on the the bottom) is now also metal and looks good. Those speakerholes on the bottom are now just two holes (one for Mic, one for speaker) flanking two screws.

Overall the iPhone 3G makes up for that plastic backing and increased size through, you guessed it, sheer design. Larger footprint? Sure, but the curved back helps. Plastic? Sure, but it’s tough as nails. You get the picture. After a couple days with it, I prefer the look and feel iPhone 3G to the original.

Reception and Data

Call reception for me is heads and shoulders above the original iPhone. Calls are much clearer on 3G than they were on Edge, due to 3G’s improved infrastructure, but I’m also getting more signal even in Edge-only areas. I’d say that my signal is usually about 20% better (seriously!) with the iPhone 3G compared to the original iPhone.

I live in an Edge-only area (boo!), but the improved reception does make a difference for me, just a bit. I was also able to check 3G when I first got the iPhone. I myself had mixed results, averaging around 400kbps. It appears from reports I’m reading that my experience might be on the low end of people’s 3G experiences.

Sound and Call Quality

You’ve probably heard that the speaker on the bottom of the iPhone has improved sound. You heard correctly — it’s louder and has less distortion My only gripe is that it’s easier to muffle the sound when you’re holding the iPhone 3G sideways to watch a movie. The single speaker-hole is much easier to cover up than the original’s. This happens especially when I’m ‘cupping’ the phone to try to get some extra sound bouncing off my palm (admit it, you’ve tried it too). Still, a tiny quibble against the vast advantage of having a louder, better speaker.

In the category of sound — the headphone jack is now flush instead of recessed. Joy. There’s a small metal ring around the rim to bolster the strength of the jack, the idea probably being that when your headphone jack puts pressure by being tugged in this direction or that the stress gets transferred to the stronger casing instead of the weaker soldier points. The bottom line is that not only do we get to use our own favorite headphones, we can feel relatively comfortable that we won’t be busting up the headphone jack by doing that.

GPS

The GPS on the iPhone 3G picks up satellites like nobody’s business. Inside, where other smartphones I have don’t have a prayer of catching the signal from the skies, the iPhone has nary a problem. I also like how Google Maps bounces the location indicator until it’s finished trying to figure out where you are. It’s a subtle indication that nevertheless gets the job done very intuitively without pestering you with how many satellites you’re picking up (though, honestly, it would be nice to know.

I’ll admit, though, that I’m getting tired to telling applications that it’s ok to know where I am.

The only thing I could wish for is that Google Maps would also indicate direction once it’s able to guess. That and turn-by-turn directions, of course, which we’re still hoping for.

Screen (that ‘Yellow’ Issue)

Yes, my iPhone 3G is ‘yellower’ than my iPhone 2G, though it also looks slightly brighter, too. I don’t mind the change too much, but there it is, it’s there. As Rene noted over the weekend, I might be able to mediate that a bit by upgrading firmware. The bottom line is that Apple made a decision to make the screen look a bit warmer. It might not look that great on the blue-gray parts of the interface, but my whites sure do look whiter and contrast overall ‘feels’ better between white and black now too.

I’ll take that, improved readability is always welcome on these aging eyes.

Speed and Responsiveness

Alright, I can’t exactly blame this on the iPhone 3G because it also appears to be the case on the 2.0 update on the 2G, but I have to bring it up. The iPhone 3G feels like it’s a little slow in the interface, more so than the original. It’s not enough to make me chuck the thing against the wall, but it is noticable — especially in the contacts app.

The contacts app (and the phone generally) should be holy ground. It must never crash, ever ever (it hasn’t on the official ROM on me) and it must be speedy. People generally go into the contacts app because, well, they want to contact somebody, and so speed is key. I can see why Apple didn’t include contact search on the original iPhone ROM — because it’s sinfully slow.

There’s another, separate and larger issue here of our overall experience of the iPhone being degraded somewhat by buggy 3rd party apps. It’s happening to me just a bit, but we’re still very early in this brave new iPhone 2.0 world so I’ll give those apps a pass …for now.

On the other hand, when I open the contacts app, it should not take nearly 3 seconds for my 877 contacts. There shouldn’t be a delay between my pressing a key on the keyboard and the visual indicator popping up of nearly a second. Unacceptable. Bad Bad Bad. Apple – there’s still not an insanely great way to quickly search my contacts like I can on every other QWERTY smartphone: just start typing. The closest I’ve come is the Google 3rd party app, but it’s unnecessarily slow because it’s also searching the web.

Ok, rant off.

Battery Life

Er.. Rant back on. It’s still very early, of course, but over the weekend my iPhone 3G did not handle itself very well whilst in 3G range. I got a movie, a half hour of talking, probably a half hour of games, and maybe a half hour of web surfing. Yes — add all that up and you’re looking at just over 4 hours plus standby, so perhaps I was within range. Still, it felt like a far cry from the nigh-invincible battery on the iPhone 2G.

Add on the fact that Apple changed their dock connector to cease supporting power adapters that previous worked (the ones that charged via the firewire pin), and I ended up having a dead phone for my drive home from the airport Saturday night.

Things may get better as the battery gets ‘broken in’ a bit — or as I use the iPhone under normal circumstances and not “ZOMG NEW IPHONE” circumstances. In the meantime, I’m watching my battery life closely and that extra attention pains me a bit.

Conclusion: Should you Upgrade?

Well, should you upgrade? The best features of the iPhone 3G are also available on the iPhone 2G, namely, the iPhone 2.0 software upgrade. A full review of that is coming up.

Meanwhile — it comes down to two questions:

1. How important is GPS to you? If it’s above, say 40% important, I’d say upgrade.
2. How important is 3G to you? I’d say that there’s a much higher threshold for this. Yes, 3G is 2 to 3 times faster than Edge in my testing, but the tradeoff appears to be battery life. You really have to want it, call it a desire above 75%.

If your number is higher than either of the above, get thee to an Apple store. Actually, I don’t know why exactly I’m quoting percentages here, I guess it’s because the answer to “should you upgrade” isn’t a clear “yes” based on the hardware improvements. Stylistically, it’s a lateral move from one look-and-feel to another. Not better or worse, just different. Spec-wise, if you can get by without GPS and 3G, there’s no need to upgrade.

For me, my GPS need percentage hovers around 90%, so the upgrade was a necessity. In the end, that’s the best review I can give the hardware: for me, it’s better, despite my battery fears.

If MobileMe is Apple’s “Exchange for the rest of us”, then ActiveSync is Microsoft’s “Exchange for the most of them”. After Windows and Office, it’s arguably the 3rd pillar of Microsoft’s business domination. Blackberry’s can (and almost de facto do) connect to them, Windows Mobiles certainly connect to them. Even the aging Palm OS Treo’s have ActiveSync support. And with the 2.0 software, the iPhone does as well.

Caveat: Microsoft loves them some monopoly power and proprietary solutions (in this case, for example, using their own MAPI rather than the IMAP IDLE standard for “push” email). They may be becoming increasingly open in the face of Web-based competition, but their crown jewels are still closely guarded. So, while Outlook connects directly to Exchange for — according to them — the “richest experience”, and Windows Mobile probably follows a close second, iPhone like other ActiveSync licensees connects via something called Outlook Web Access, the same way a web browser might.

How does this experience stack up in richness? Read on to find out!

What is Exchange ActiveSync?

This is similar to how Blackberry’s work, though rather than every device being handled by a single central Network Operations Center (NOC), devices can connect to any Windows Server running Exchange (typically your business’ Exchange Server, or a Hosted Exchange solution).

What Kind of Data Does ActiveSync Push?

Email messages, calendar events, and contact listings.

Setting up ActiveSync

Exchange is a magical yet mysterious beast, typically requiring regular IT supervision and administration. If you’re interested in setting up Exchange for the iPhone, Apple provides a PDF overview, as well as utilities to aid in enterprise deployment.

To setup the iPhone for Exchange, start by setting up an email account by tapping Settings, then tapping Mail, Contacts, Calendars, and then Add Account…, and choose Microsoft Exchange.

What you do from there will depend on what version of Exchange you’re running. Theoretically, if you have Exchange 2007, your iPhone will be able to almost configure itself. If you have an earlier version, like the Exchange 2003 Server I was connecting to, you’ll have to enter your Exchange login info (user name, server name, password, etc.)

Using ActiveSync

Due to the problems with Apple’s iTunes activation server on launch day, July 11, I left the store with a still bricked iPhone, and while I was able to unbrick it later at home, I couldn’t connect to iTunes properly and therefore couldn’t sync my data over.

So, while I had a working iPhone 3G, it was a working iPhone 3G with nothing on it, no email, no calendars, no contacts… But a perfect opportunity to try out ActiveSync!

I went through the setup and immediately saw my mail begin to download. I tapped over to calendars and there were my appointments for the day. Contacts? All there.

It’s just that simple… which is really the point.

ActiveSync Email (and Spam!)

Email via ActiveSync works the same, with the same options, as any other mail account on the iPhone 3G, the only difference is the “push”.

Drawback? “Push” spam. If you get a lot of spam (and due to the nature of what I do, my business address has been scraped for over a decade, and I get tons and tons and tons of spam), you’ll immediately discover the annoyance of being buzzed/beeped whenever an “enhancement” or “warez” or “please help get my millions out of Africa” email comes in.

The server-based blacklists, heuristics, etc. filter some, but it’s always a balancing act to nuke the garbage while keeping customer or partner messages from getting accidentally nuked along with them. I’m experimenting with filters via Web Access, but so far this is looking like a major problem for me, given that the iPhone doesn’t seem to have any client side filtering of its own. Little help, Apple?

ActiveSync Contacts

Contacts enjoy both the standard iPhone 3G contact options — and if you use Exchange 2007 this includes picture support — and also Exchange Directory Search. Don’t have someone from the MegaCorp in your local list? Just tap on Groups, Directory, and search away:

ActiveSync Calendars

Like contacts, ActiveSync calendars support all the basic functionality of iPhone 2.0 calendars, with the immediacy of “push” updates (add or delete an event on your iPhone, and it shows up or disappears on your Outlook client or Web access right away), and something else: invitations.

If a co-worker plans a meeting and adds your name to it, you receive an invitation in your Calendar Inbox:

Invitations will display a handy number badge, same as email or SMS, to tell you how many invitations you have. You can choose to accept or decline them. Very sweet.

Bonus: Sharepoint

At its simplest, Microsoft Sharepoint is an online directory for document sharing and collaboration. MobileSafari (the iPhone 3G’s browser) can access corporate Sharepoint sites. Due to its high speed connection and its ability to open Office documents (Word, Excel, and now PowerPoint), and PDF files, the iPhone 3G becomes a good way to access your company’s shared directory from pretty much anywhere.

Again, however, because it’s not Internet Explorer and it’s not using the proprietary ActiveX plugin technology, you won’t get the “richest experience” possible. Hopefully Microsoft will continue their new push (pun intended) towards openess and provide non-IE browsers with a “richer experience” via better AJAX implementation. Maybe even SproutCore…

Using ActiveSync and MobileMe Together

Because I’d originally used ActiveSync with my old, indiscriminate Palm 680, when I hooked up my iPhone 3G, it pulled down a lot of Contact crud that was outdated, and that I’d never bothered to clean out of either Outlook (which I rarely use anymore). This also meant that I had a lot of duplicates from my prior MobileMe update. (But it did show off the awesome new color and translucency effects of the iPhone 3G’s calendar!)

However since ActiveSync is “push”, I just fired up Outlook Web Access in Safari and deleted all non-business, non-current contacts. Almost instantly, my iPhone 3G updated to reflect the changes, and the duplicates were dispatched, the crud cleansed. Likewise, I removed business events from iCal, removing them from MobileMe, which preventing duplicates on the iPhone 3G’s calendar. Now MobileMe exclusively handles personal data, ActiveSync business data, and thus far they work together seamlessly.

Conclusion

ActiveSync, due both to Microsoft’s enterprise domination and the magic of the technology, is an incredible addition to the iPhone 3G, and something that should make business users who value a large, multi-touch screen, not to mention the potential of Unix in your pocket, the polish of Apple’s interfaces, and the promise of the App Store, seriously consider the iPhone in their Enterprise.

Epic YES! Since the moment the original iPhone came out with its WiFi goodness, I’ve been begging asking for a way to use the iPhone to control the similarly connected iTunes, Front Row, and Apple TV. And now Apple has answered! (Er… except for Front Row, see below). And not only for the iPhone. While I’ll use that term exclusively below, everything here also applies to the iPod Touch.

Remote is FREE, and available either via iTunes (picture above) or right from your iPhone 3G via the App Store. It’s not hard to find, currently dominating the Top Free Apps charts. If you’re not sure how to use App Store yet, check out Brian’s excellent overview to get you started.

I chose to download directly from the iPhone so I could test out the 3G experience. It was fast. (However, when I later synced back with iTunes — my first time post App download — I was asked to re-authenticate my MacBook with the iTunes Store before it would sync the App for backup).

How did it work? Read on!

Getting Started

Note: If you have more than one WiFi network, make sure your iPhone and your iTunes and/or Apple TV are on the SAME network. If you can’t connect, be sure you also check your firewall settings and enable iTunes sharing. (Thanks to everyone troubleshooting in the comments!)

When it finds either, it will present you with a pin code.

For iTunes, you’ll be instructed to click on your iPhone under Devices.

(In response to some confusing, DON’T rush to plug your iPhone back into your computer. Remote doesn’t want a cable, it uses WiFi. Wait a few seconds and the your iPhone will pop up under Devices all on its own, though it’ll have the Remote icon to its left. That’s what you click on.)

For the Apple TV, once you’ve updated to version 2.1, go to Settings, General, Remotes. Enter the pin code and you’re in business.

Want to add another Apple TV and or iTunes Library, rinse and repeat the very same procedure. Want to remove an Apple TV or iTunes library? Tap the Edit button, toggle the red circle, and tap Delete.

Apple gets bonus points for making the process nearly identical to the already established method for setting up an Apple TV to work with iTunes, or adding or removing other entries/items on the iPhone. Good design is magnified by consistency.

Once setup, whenever you launch the Remote App from the iPhone, it will look for the last library you accesses, while also giving you the option to switch to another library. The connection can take a few moments, which is understandable given what it’s setting up and that the iPhone is still limited to 802.11g WiFi, and not the much faster 802.11n (draft) that the Apple TV and most modern routers support.

Configuration

Again, making the behavior identical to the iPod app gets Apple bonus points.

Using the iPhone Remote with iTunes and the Apple TV

Again, the iPhone is limited to the older 802.11g WiFi speeds, so it may take a few seconds to populate your list (understandable as cover art would need to be transferred and scaled on the fly, requiring some compute cycles likely on iTunes’ end where the desktop CPU could better handle the hit).

Once the list is up, again, it works just like the iPod app — sense a trend? Pick your playlist and then shuffle or song, your TV series or Podcast and then episode, your album and track, your movie, etc. and — here’s the different part — instead of launching on the iPhone, the sound and/or video starts up on your desktop or laptop in iTunes. Again, back with the iPhone app, the same controls are presented to you for play, pause, skip, etc.

And you can flip the cover art around and, if you’re in a playlist, album, TV series, Podcast series, etc. you’ll see a list of other songs/videos for you to quickly switch between.

UPDATE: Apple TV Keyboard Bonus!

How’d I miss this? Daring Fireball points out that while the Apple TV’s on screen keyboard is nothing special from a usability standpoint, once hooked up, the iPhone Remote’s full soft Querty becomes available for entering passwords and searching content. Since Apple hasn’t seen fit to include a Bluetooth chip for their own physical mouse and keyboard, this is the best data entry option to date. Nice bonus!

Where’s the Front Row love?

The only glaring omission in Apple’s otherwise amazing little Remote App is the apparent lack of support for Apple’s Front Row. For those unfamiliar with Front Row, it’s an application that basically sits on top of iTunes and allows the Mac to work like Apple TV, with the same remote control (the little white one) and an interface identical to the original Apple TV’s. It’s so good, in fact, many people buy a Mac Mini instead of an Apple TV and hook them up to their televisions for just that reason.

I did try starting up Front Row but the iPhone Remote didn’t interact with it at all. It stayed connected to my library, but the first time I tried to play something, it crashed iTunes. The second time iTunes stayed up, but instead of playing something via the Front Row interface (which is full screen), it began playing it invisibly in iTunes (I had to escape out of Front Row to see it).

Given the awesome job it does with iTunes and the Apple TV, given the natural fit of Front Row, it’s really surprising Apple left it out. Hopefully this will be addressed in an update.

Screaming for Streaming!

Conclusion

Rating: 4.9/5

Pros:

• “Just works” simple to set up
• Leverages familiar UI making it super easy to use
• Let’s you control your music and videos from anywhere in WiFi range
• Ultimate party gadget much?

• No Front Row support
• (No streaming, but then it’s not called Streamer… Sigh…)